Aijrhass vol3 print by iasir journals

ISSN (Print): 2328-3734 ISSN (Online): 2328-3696 ISSN (CD-ROM): 2328-3688

Issue 6, Volume 1, 2 & 3 March-May, 2014

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

International Association of Scientific Innovation and Research (IASIR) (An Association Unifying the Sciences, Engineering, and Applied Research)

STEM International Scientific Online Media and Publishing House Head Office: 148, Summit Drive, Byron, Georgia-31008, United States. Offices Overseas: India, Australia, Germany, Netherlands, Canada. Website: www.iasir.net, E-mail (s): iasir.journals@iasir.net, iasir.journals@gmail.com, aijrhass@gmail.com

PREFACE We are delighted to welcome you to the sixth issue of the American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences (AIJRHASS). In recent years, advances in science, engineering, formal, applied and natural sciences have radically expanded the data available to researchers and professionals in a wide variety of domains. This unique combination of theory with data has the potential to have broad impact on educational research and practice. AIJRHASS is publishing high-quality, peer-reviewed papers covering topics such as Business administration, Management, Marketing, Finance, Economics, Banking, Accounting, Human resources management, Entrepreneurship, Relationship management, Risk management, Retail management, Linguistics, International relations, Anthropology, Archaeology, Sociology, International business, Tourism and hospitality management, Law, Psychology, Corporate governance, Education, Ethics, Geography, History, Industrial relations, Information science, Library science, Media studies, Philosophy, Political science, Public administration, Sociology, Social welfare, Literature, Performing arts (music, theatre and dance), Religious studies, Women studies, Production and operations management, Organizational behavior and theory, Strategic management & policies, Statistics and Econometrics, Technology and innovation, Management information systems and other closely related field in the disciplines of arts, humanities and social sciences.

The editorial board of AIJRHASS is composed of members of the Teachers & Researchers community who are enthusiastically involved in the systematic investigation into existing or new knowledge to discover new paths for maintaining a strong presence in the arts, the humanities and the social sciences which can easily be coupled with the information and communication technologies. These fields respect objective and logical reasoning to optimize the impact of research in social, economic and cultural, quality of life to understand the advancements in humanities, arts and social sciences. These fields are the pillars of growth in our modern society and have a wider impact on our daily lives with infinite opportunities in a global marketplace. In order to best serve our community, this Journal is available online as well as in hard-copy form. Because of the rapid advances in underlying technologies and the interdisciplinary nature of the field, we believe it is important to provide quality research articles promptly and to the widest possible audience.

We are happy that this Journal has continued to grow and develop. We have made every effort to evaluate and process submissions for reviews, and address queries from authors and the general public promptly. The Journal has strived to reflect the most recent and finest

researchers in the fields of humanities, arts and social sciences. This Journal is completely refereed and indexed with major databases like: IndexCopernicus, Computer Science Directory,

GetCITED,

CRCnetBASE,

Google

DOAJ,

SSRN,

Scholar,

TGDScholar,

Microsoft

Academic

WorldWideScience, Search,

INSPEC,

CiteSeerX, ProQuest,

ArnetMiner, Base, ChemXSeer, citebase, OpenJ-Gate, eLibrary, SafetyLit, SSRN, VADLO, OpenGrey, EBSCO, ProQuest, UlrichWeb, ISSUU, SPIE Digital Library, arXiv, ERIC, EasyBib, Infotopia, WorldCat, .docstoc JURN, Mendeley, ResearchGate, cogprints, OCLC, iSEEK, Scribd, LOCKSS, CASSI, E-PrintNetwork, intute, and some other databases.

We are grateful to all of the individuals and agencies whose work and support made the Journal's success possible. We want to thank the executive board and core committee members of the AIJRHASS for entrusting us with the important job. We are thankful to the members of the AIJRHASS editorial board who have contributed energy and time to the Journal with their steadfast support, constructive advice, as well as reviews of submissions. We are deeply indebted to the numerous anonymous reviewers who have contributed expertly evaluations of the submissions to help maintain the quality of the Journal. For this sixth issue, we received 164 research papers and out of which only 51 research papers are published in three volumes as per the reviewersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; recommendations. We have highest respect to all the authors who have submitted articles to the Journal for their intellectual energy and creativity, and for their dedication to the field of humanities, arts and social sciences.

This issue of the AIJRHASS has attracted a large number of authors and researchers across worldwide and would provide an effective platform to all the intellectuals of different streams to put forth their suggestions and ideas which might prove beneficial for the accelerated pace of development of emerging technologies in formal, applied and natural sciences and may open new area for research and development. We hope you will enjoy this sixth issue of the American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences and are looking forward to hearing your feedback and receiving your contributions.

(Administrative Chief)

(Managing Director)

(Editorial Head)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences (AIJRHASS), ISSN (Print): 2328-3734, ISSN (Online): 2328-3696, ISSN (CD-ROM): 2328-3688 (March-May, 2014, Issue 6, Volume 1, 2 & 3). ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

BOARD MEMBERS

        

                 

EDITOR IN CHIEF Prof. (Dr.) Waressara Weerawat, Director of Logistics Innovation Center, Department of Industrial Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Mahidol University, Thailand. Prof. (Dr.) Yen-Chun Lin, Professor and Chair, Dept. of Computer Science and Information Engineering, Chang Jung Christian University, Kway Jen, Tainan, Taiwan. Divya Sethi, GM Conferencing & VSAT Solutions, Enterprise Services, Bharti Airtel, Gurgaon, India. CHIEF EDITOR (TECHNICAL) Prof. (Dr.) Atul K. Raturi, Head School of Engineering and Physics, Faculty of Science, Technology and Environment, The University of the South Pacific, Laucala campus, Suva, Fiji Islands. Prof. (Dr.) Hadi Suwastio, College of Applied Science, Department of Information Technology, The Sultanate of Oman and Director of IETI-Research Institute-Bandung, Indonesia. Dr. Nitin Jindal, Vice President, Max Coreth, North America Gas & Power Trading, New York, United States. CHIEF EDITOR (GENERAL) Prof. (Dr.) Thanakorn Naenna, Department of Industrial Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Mahidol University, Thailand. Prof. (Dr.) Jose Francisco Vicent Frances, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Huiyun Liu, Department of Electronic & Electrical Engineering, University College London, Torrington Place, London. ADVISORY BOARD Prof. (Dr.) Kimberly A. Freeman, Professor & Director of Undergraduate Programs, Stetson School of Business and Economics, Mercer University, Macon, Georgia, United States. Prof. (Dr.) Klaus G. Troitzsch, Professor, Institute for IS Research, University of Koblenz-Landau, Germany. Prof. (Dr.) T. Anthony Choi, Professor, Department of Electrical & Computer Engineering, Mercer University, Macon, Georgia, United States. Prof. (Dr.) Fabrizio Gerli, Department of Management, Ca' Foscari University of Venice, Italy. Prof. (Dr.) Jen-Wei Hsieh, Department of Computer Science and Information Engineering, National Taiwan University of Science and Technology, Taiwan. Prof. (Dr.) Jose C. Martinez, Dept. Physical Chemistry, Faculty of Sciences, University of Granada, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Panayiotis Vafeas, Department of Engineering Sciences, University of Patras, Greece. Prof. (Dr.) Soib Taib, School of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, University Science Malaysia, Malaysia. Prof. (Dr.) Vit Vozenilek, Department of Geoinformatics, Palacky University, Olomouc, Czech Republic. Prof. (Dr.) Sim Kwan Hua, School of Engineering, Computing and Science, Swinburne University of Technology, Sarawak, Malaysia. Prof. (Dr.) Jose Francisco Vicent Frances, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Rafael Ignacio Alvarez Sanchez, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Praneel Chand, Ph.D., M.IEEEC/O School of Engineering & Physics Faculty of Science & Technology The University of the South Pacific (USP) Laucala Campus, Private Mail Bag, Suva, Fiji. Prof. (Dr.) Francisco Miguel Martinez, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Antonio Zamora Gomez, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Leandro Tortosa, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Samir Ananou, Department of Microbiology, Universidad de Granada, Granada, Spain. Dr. Miguel Angel Bautista, Department de Matematica Aplicada y Analisis, Facultad de Matematicas, Universidad de Barcelona, Spain.

           

                  

Prof. (Dr.) Prof. Adam Baharum, School of Mathematical Sciences, University of Universiti Sains, Malaysia, Malaysia. Dr. Cathryn J. Peoples, Faculty of Computing and Engineering, School of Computing and Information Engineering, University of Ulster, Coleraine, Northern Ireland, United Kingdom. Prof. (Dr.) Pavel Lafata, Department of Telecommunication Engineering, Faculty of Electrical Engineering, Czech Technical University in Prague, Prague, 166 27, Czech Republic. Prof. (Dr.) P. Bhanu Prasad, Vision Specialist, Matrix vision GmbH, Germany, Consultant, TIFACCORE for Machine Vision, Advisor, Kelenn Technology, France Advisor, Shubham Automation & Services, Ahmedabad, and Professor of C.S.E, Rajalakshmi Engineering College, India. Prof. (Dr.) Anis Zarrad, Department of Computer Science and Information System, Prince Sultan University, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia. Prof. (Dr.) Mohammed Ali Hussain, Professor, Dept. of Electronics and Computer Engineering, KL University, Green Fields, Vaddeswaram, Andhra Pradesh, India. Dr. Cristiano De Magalhaes Barros, Governo do Estado de Minas Gerais, Brazil. Prof. (Dr.) Md. Rizwan Beg, Professor & Head, Dean, Faculty of Computer Applications, Deptt. of Computer Sc. & Engg. & Information Technology, Integral University Kursi Road, Dasauli, Lucknow, India. Prof. (Dr.) Vishnu Narayan Mishra, Assistant Professor of Mathematics, Sardar Vallabhbhai National Institute of Technology, Ichchhanath Mahadev Road, Surat, Surat-395007, Gujarat, India. Dr. Jia Hu, Member Research Staff, Philips Research North America, New York Area, NY. Prof. Shashikant Shantilal Patil SVKM , MPSTME Shirpur Campus, NMIMS University Vile Parle Mumbai, India. Prof. (Dr.) Bindhya Chal Yadav, Assistant Professor in Botany, Govt. Post Graduate College, Fatehabad, Agra, Uttar Pradesh, India. REVIEW BOARD Prof. (Dr.) Kimberly A. Freeman, Professor & Director of Undergraduate Programs, Stetson School of Business and Economics, Mercer University, Macon, Georgia, United States. Prof. (Dr.) Klaus G. Troitzsch, Professor, Institute for IS Research, University of Koblenz-Landau, Germany. Prof. (Dr.) T. Anthony Choi, Professor, Department of Electrical & Computer Engineering, Mercer University, Macon, Georgia, United States. Prof. (Dr.) Yen-Chun Lin, Professor and Chair, Dept. of Computer Science and Information Engineering, Chang Jung Christian University, Kway Jen, Tainan, Taiwan. Prof. (Dr.) Jen-Wei Hsieh, Department of Computer Science and Information Engineering, National Taiwan University of Science and Technology, Taiwan. Prof. (Dr.) Jose C. Martinez, Dept. Physical Chemistry, Faculty of Sciences, University of Granada, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Joel Saltz, Emory University, Atlanta, Georgia, United States. Prof. (Dr.) Panayiotis Vafeas, Department of Engineering Sciences, University of Patras, Greece. Prof. (Dr.) Soib Taib, School of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, University Science Malaysia, Malaysia. Prof. (Dr.) Sim Kwan Hua, School of Engineering, Computing and Science, Swinburne University of Technology, Sarawak, Malaysia. Prof. (Dr.) Jose Francisco Vicent Frances, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Rafael Ignacio Alvarez Sanchez, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Francisco Miguel Martinez, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Antonio Zamora Gomez, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Leandro Tortosa, Department of Science of the Computation and Artificial Intelligence, Universidad de Alicante, Alicante, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Samir Ananou, Department of Microbiology, Universidad de Granada, Granada, Spain. Dr. Miguel Angel Bautista, Department de Matematica Aplicada y Analisis, Facultad de Matematicas, Universidad de Barcelona, Spain. Prof. (Dr.) Prof. Adam Baharum, School of Mathematical Sciences, University of Universiti Sains, Malaysia, Malaysia. Prof. (Dr.) Huiyun Liu, Department of Electronic & Electrical Engineering, University College London, Torrington Place, London.

                                

Dr. Cristiano De Magalhaes Barros, Governo do Estado de Minas Gerais, Brazil. Prof. (Dr.) Pravin G. Ingole, Senior Researcher, Greenhouse Gas Research Center, Korea Institute of Energy Research (KIER), 152 Gajeong-ro, Yuseong-gu, Daejeon 305-343, KOREA. Prof. (Dr.) Dilum Bandara, Dept. Computer Science & Engineering, University of Moratuwa, Sri Lanka. Prof. (Dr.) Faudziah Ahmad, School of Computing, UUM College of Arts and Sciences, University Utara Malaysia, 06010 UUM Sintok, Kedah Darulaman. Prof. (Dr.) G. Manoj Someswar, Principal, Dept. of CSE at Anwar-ul-uloom College of Engineering & Technology, Yennepally, Vikarabad, RR District., A.P., India. Prof. (Dr.) Abdelghni Lakehal, Applied Mathematics, Rue 10 no 6 cite des fonctionnaires dokkarat 30010 Fes Marocco. Dr. Kamal Kulshreshtha, Associate Professor & Head, Deptt. of Computer Sc. & Applications, Modi Institute of Management & Technology, Kota-324 009, Rajasthan, India. Prof. (Dr.) Anukrati Sharma, Associate Professor, Faculty of Commerce and Management, University of Kota, Kota, Rajasthan, India. Prof. (Dr.) S. Natarajan, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, SSM College of Engineering, NH 47, Salem Main Road, Komarapalayam, Namakkal District, Tamilnadu 638183, India. Prof. (Dr.) J. Sadhik Basha, Department of Mechanical Engineering, King Khalid University, Abha, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Prof. (Dr.) G. SAVITHRI, Department of Sericulture, S.P. Mahila Visvavidyalayam, Tirupati517502, Andhra Pradesh, India. Prof. (Dr.) Shweta jain, Tolani College of Commerce, Andheri, Mumbai. 400001, India. Prof. (Dr.) Abdullah M. Abdul-Jabbar, Department of Mathematics, College of Science, University of Salahaddin-Erbil, Kurdistan Region, Iraq. Prof. (Dr.) ( Mrs.) P.Sujathamma, Department of Sericulture, S.P.Mahila Visvavidyalayam, Tirupati-517502, India. Prof. (Dr.) Bimla Dhanda, Professor & Head, Department of Human Development and Family Studies, College of Home Science, CCS, Haryana Agricultural University, Hisar- 125001 (Haryana) India. Prof. (Dr.) Manjulatha, Dept of Biochemistry,School of Life Sciences,University of Hyderabad,Gachibowli, Hyderabad, India. Prof. (Dr.) Upasani Dhananjay Eknath Advisor & Chief Coordinator, ALUMNI Association, Sinhgad Institute of Technology & Science, Narhe, Pune -411 041, India. Prof. (Dr.) Sudhindra Bhat, Professor & Finance Area Chair, School of Business, Alliance University Bangalore-562106, India. Prof. Prasenjit Chatterjee , Dept. of Mechanical Engineering, MCKV Institute of Engineering West Bengal, India. Prof. Rajesh Murukesan, Deptt. of Automobile Engineering, Rajalakshmi Engineering college, Chennai, India. Prof. (Dr.) Parmil Kumar, Department of Statistics, University of Jammu, Jammu, India Prof. (Dr.) M.N. Shesha Prakash, Vice Principal, Professor & Head of Civil Engineering, Vidya Vikas Institute of Engineering and Technology, Alanahally, Mysore-570 028 Prof. (Dr.) Piyush Singhal, Mechanical Engineering Deptt., GLA University, India. Prof. M. Mahbubur Rahman, School of Engineering & Information Technology, Murdoch University, Perth Western Australia 6150, Australia. Prof. Nawaraj Chaulagain, Department of Religion, Illinois Wesleyan University, Bloomington, IL. Prof. Hassan Jafari, Faculty of Maritime Economics & Management, Khoramshahr University of Marine Science and Technology, khoramshahr, Khuzestan province, Iran Prof. (Dr.) Kantipudi MVV Prasad , Dept of EC, School of Engg., R.K.University, Kast urbhadham, Tramba, Rajkot-360020, India. Prof. (Mrs.) P.Sujathamma, Department of Sericulture, S.P.Mahila Visvavidyalayam, ( Women's University), Tirupati-517502, India. Prof. (Dr.) M A Rizvi, Dept. of Computer Engineering and Applications, National Institute of Technical Teachers' Training and Research, Bhopal M.P. India. Prof. (Dr.) Mohsen Shafiei Nikabadi, Faculty of Economics and Management, Industrial Management Department, Semnan University, Semnan, Iran. Prof. P.R.SivaSankar, Head, Dept. of Commerce, Vikrama Simhapuri University Post Graduate Centre, KAVALI - 524201, A.P. India. Prof. (Dr.) Bhawna Dubey, Institute of Environmental Science( AIES), Amity University, Noida, India. Prof. Manoj Chouhan, Deptt. of Information Technology, SVITS Indore, India.

                               

Prof. Yupal S Shukla, V M Patel College of Management Studies, Ganpat University, KhervaMehsana. India. Prof. (Dr.) Amit Kohli, Head of the Department, Department of Mechanical Engineering, D.A.V.Institute of Engg. and Technology, Kabir Nagar, Jalandhar,Punjab (India). Prof. (Dr.) Kumar Irayya Maddani, and Head of the Department of Physics in SDM College of Engineering and Technology, Dhavalagiri, Dharwad, State: Karnataka (INDIA). Prof. (Dr.) Shafi Phaniband, SDM College of Engineering and Technology, Dharwad, INDIA. Prof. M H Annaiah, Head, Department of Automobile Engineering, Acharya Institute of Technology, Soladevana Halli, Bangalore -560107, India. Prof. (Dr.) Prof. R. R. Patil, Director School Of Earth Science, Solapur University, Solapur Prof. (Dr.) Manoj Khandelwal, Dept. of Mining Engg, College of Technology & Engineering, Maharana Pratap University of Agriculture & Technology, Udaipur, 313 001 (Rajasthan), India Prof. (Dr.) Kishor Chandra Satpathy, Librarian, National Institute of Technology, Silchar-788010, Assam, India Prof. (Dr.) Juhana Jaafar, Gas Engineering Department, Faculty of Petroleum and Renewable Energy Engineering (FPREE), Universiti Teknologi Malaysia-81310 UTM Johor Bahru, Johor. Prof. (Dr.) Rita Khare, Assistant Professor in chemistry, Govt. Women’s College, Gardanibagh, Patna, Bihar. Prof. (Dr.) Raviraj Kusanur, Dept of Chemistry, R V College of Engineering, Bangalore-59, India. Prof. (Dr.) Hameem Shanavas .I, M.V.J College of Engineering, Bangalore Prof. (Dr.) Sanjay Kumar, JKL University, Ajmer Road, Jaipur Prof. (Dr.) Pushp Lata Faculty of English and Communication, Department of Humanities and Languages, Nucleus Member, Publications and Media Relations Unit Editor, BITScan, BITS, PilaniIndia. Prof. Arun Agarwal, Faculty of ECE Dept., ITER College, Siksha 'O' Anusandhan University Bhubaneswar, Odisha, India Prof. (Dr.) Pratima Tripathi, Department of Biosciences, SSSIHL, Anantapur Campus Anantapur515001 (A.P.) India. Prof. (Dr.) Sudip Das, Department of Biotechnology, Haldia Institute of Technology, I.C.A.R.E. Complex, H.I.T. Campus, P.O. Hit, Haldia; Dist: Puba Medinipur, West Bengal, India. Prof. (Dr.) Bimla Dhanda, Professor & Head, Department of Human Development and Family Studies College of Home Science, CCS, Haryana Agricultural University, Hisar- 125001 (Haryana) India. Prof. (Dr.) R.K.Tiwari, Professor, S.O.S. in Physics, Jiwaji University, Gwalior, M.P.-474011. Prof. (Dr.) Deepak Paliwal, Faculty of Sociology, Uttarakhand Open University, Haldwani-Nainital Prof. (Dr.) Dr. Anil K Dwivedi, Faculty of Pollution & Environmental Assay Research Laboratory (PEARL), Department of Botany,DDU Gorakhpur University,Gorakhpur-273009,India. Prof. R. Ravikumar, Department of Agricultural and Rural Management, TamilNadu Agricultural University,Coimbatore-641003,TamilNadu,India. Prof. (Dr.) R.Raman, Professor of Agronomy, Faculty of Agriculture, Annamalai university, Annamalai Nagar 608 002Tamil Nadu, India. Prof. (Dr.) Ahmed Khalafallah, Coordinator of the CM Degree Program, Department of Architectural and Manufacturing Sciences, Ogden College of Sciences and Engineering Western Kentucky University 1906 College Heights Blvd Bowling Green, KY 42103-1066. Prof. (Dr.) Asmita Das , Delhi Technological University (Formerly Delhi College of Engineering), Shahbad, Daulatpur, Delhi 110042, India. Prof. (Dr.)Aniruddha Bhattacharjya, Assistant Professor (Senior Grade), CSE Department, Amrita School of Engineering , Amrita Vishwa VidyaPeetham (University), Kasavanahalli, Carmelaram P.O., Bangalore 560035, Karnataka, India. Prof. (Dr.) S. Rama Krishna Pisipaty, Prof & Geoarchaeologist, Head of the Department of Sanskrit & Indian Culture, SCSVMV University, Enathur, Kanchipuram 631561, India Prof. (Dr.) Shubhasheesh Bhattacharya, Professor & HOD(HR), Symbiosis Institute of International Business (SIIB), Hinjewadi, Phase-I, Pune- 411 057, India. Prof. (Dr.) Vijay Kothari, Institute of Science, Nirma University, S-G Highway, Ahmedabad 382481, India. Prof. (Dr.) Raja Sekhar Mamillapalli, Department of Civil Engineering at Sir Padampat Singhania University, Udaipur, India. Prof. (Dr.) B. M. Kunar, Department of Mining Engineering, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad 826004, Jharkhand, India. Prof. (Dr.) Prabir Sarkar, Assistant Professor, School of Mechanical, Materials and Energy Engineering, Room 307, Academic Block, Indian Institute of Technology, Ropar, Nangal Road, Rupnagar 140001, Punjab, India.

                             

Prof. (Dr.) K.Srinivasmoorthy, Associate Professor, Department of Earth Sciences, School of Physical,Chemical and Applied Sciences, Pondicherry university, R.Venkataraman Nagar, Kalapet, Puducherry 605014, India. Prof. (Dr.) Bhawna Dubey, Institute of Environmental Science (AIES), Amity University, Noida, India. Prof. (Dr.) P. Bhanu Prasad, Vision Specialist, Matrix vision GmbH, Germany, Consultant, TIFACCORE for Machine Vision, Advisor, Kelenn Technology, France Advisor, Shubham Automation & Services, Ahmedabad, and Professor of C.S.E, Rajalakshmi Engineering College, India. Prof. (Dr.)P.Raviraj, Professor & Head, Dept. of CSE, Kalaignar Karunanidhi, Institute of Technology, Coimbatore 641402,Tamilnadu,India. Prof. (Dr.) Damodar Reddy Edla, Department of Computer Science & Engineering, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, Jharkhand 826004, India. Prof. (Dr.) T.C. Manjunath, Principal in HKBK College of Engg., Bangalore, Karnataka, India. Prof. (Dr.) Pankaj Bhambri, I.T. Deptt., Guru Nanak Dev Engineering College, Ludhiana 141006, Punjab, India. Prof. Shashikant Shantilal Patil SVKM , MPSTME Shirpur Campus, NMIMS University Vile Parle Mumbai, India. Prof. (Dr.) Shambhu Nath Choudhary, Department of Physics, T.M. Bhagalpur University, Bhagalpur 81200, Bihar, India. Prof. (Dr.) Venkateshwarlu Sonnati, Professor & Head of EEED, Department of EEE, Sreenidhi Institute of Science & Technology, Ghatkesar, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India. Prof. (Dr.) Saurabh Dalela, Department of Pure & Applied Physics, University of Kota, KOTA 324010, Rajasthan, India. Prof. S. Arman Hashemi Monfared, Department of Civil Eng, University of Sistan & Baluchestan, Daneshgah St.,Zahedan, IRAN, P.C. 98155-987 Prof. (Dr.) R.S.Chanda, Dept. of Jute & Fibre Tech., University of Calcutta, Kolkata 700019, West Bengal, India. Prof. V.S.VAKULA, Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, JNTUK, University College of Eng.,Vizianagaram5 35003, Andhra Pradesh, India. Prof. (Dr.) Nehal Gitesh Chitaliya, Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel Institute of Technology, Vasad 388 306, Gujarat, India. Prof. (Dr.) D.R. Prajapati, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PEC University of Technology,Chandigarh 160012, India. Dr. A. SENTHIL KUMAR, Postdoctoral Researcher, Centre for Energy and Electrical Power, Electrical Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering and the Built Environment, Tshwane University of Technology, Pretoria 0001, South Africa. Prof. (Dr.)Vijay Harishchandra Mankar, Department of Electronics & Telecommunication Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic, Mangalwari Bazar, Besa Road, Nagpur- 440027, India. Prof. Varun.G.Menon, Department Of C.S.E, S.C.M.S School of Engineering, Karukutty,Ernakulam, Kerala 683544, India. Prof. (Dr.) U C Srivastava, Department of Physics, Amity Institute of Applied Sciences, Amity University, Noida, U.P-203301.India. Prof. (Dr.) Surendra Yadav, Professor and Head (Computer Science & Engineering Department), Maharashi Arvind College of Engineering and Research Centre (MACERC), Jaipur, Rajasthan, India. Prof. (Dr.) Sunil Kumar, H.O.D. Applied Sciences & Humanities Dehradun Institute of Technology, (D.I.T. School of Engineering), 48 A K.P-3 Gr. Noida (U.P.) 201308 Prof. Naveen Jain, Dept. of Electrical Engineering, College of Technology and Engineering, Udaipur-313 001, India. Prof. Veera Jyothi.B, CBIT, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India. Prof. Aritra Ghosh, Global Institute of Management and Technology, Krishnagar, Nadia, W.B. India Prof. Anuj K. Gupta, Head, Dept. of Computer Science & Engineering, RIMT Group of Institutions, Sirhind Mandi Gobindgarh, Punajb, India. Prof. (Dr.) Varala Ravi, Head, Department of Chemistry, IIIT Basar Campus, Rajiv Gandhi University of Knowledge Technologies, Mudhole, Adilabad, Andhra Pradesh- 504 107, India Prof. (Dr.) Ravikumar C Baratakke, faculty of Biology,Govt. College, Saundatti - 591 126, India. Prof. (Dr.) NALIN BHARTI, School of Humanities and Social Science, Indian Institute of Technology Patna, India. Prof. (Dr.) Shivanand S.Gornale , Head, Department of Studies in Computer Science, Government College (Autonomous), Mandya, Mandya-571 401-Karanataka, India.

                               

Prof. (Dr.) Naveen.P.Badiger, Dept.Of Chemistry, S.D.M.College of Engg. & Technology, Dharwad-580002, Karnataka State, India. Prof. (Dr.) Bimla Dhanda, Professor & Head, Department of Human Development and Family Studies, College of Home Science, CCS, Haryana Agricultural University, Hisar- 125001 (Haryana) India. Prof. (Dr.) Tauqeer Ahmad Usmani, Faculty of IT, Salalah College of Technology, Salalah, Sultanate of Oman. Prof. (Dr.) Naresh Kr. Vats, Chairman, Department of Law, BGC Trust University Bangladesh Prof. (Dr.) Papita Das (Saha), Department of Environmental Science, University of Calcutta, Kolkata, India. Prof. (Dr.) Rekha Govindan , Dept of Biotechnology, Aarupadai Veedu Institute of technology , Vinayaka Missions University , Paiyanoor , Kanchipuram Dt, Tamilnadu , India. Prof. (Dr.) Lawrence Abraham Gojeh, Department of Information Science, Jimma University, P.o.Box 378, Jimma, Ethiopia. Prof. (Dr.) M.N. Kalasad, Department of Physics, SDM College of Engineering & Technology, Dharwad, Karnataka, India. Prof. Rab Nawaz Lodhi, Department of Management Sciences, COMSATS Institute of Information Technology Sahiwal. Prof. (Dr.) Masoud Hajarian, Department of Mathematics, Faculty of Mathematical Sciences, Shahid Beheshti University, General Campus, Evin, Tehran 19839,Iran Prof. (Dr.) Chandra Kala Singh, Associate professor, Department of Human Development and Family Studies, College of Home Science, CCS, Haryana Agricultural University, Hisar- 125001 (Haryana) India Prof. (Dr.) J.Babu, Professor & Dean of research, St.Joseph's College of Engineering & Technology, Choondacherry, Palai,Kerala. Prof. (Dr.) Pradip Kumar Roy, Department of Applied Mechanics, Birla Institute of Technology (BIT) Mesra, Ranchi- 835215, Jharkhand, India. Prof. (Dr.) P. Sanjeevi kumar, School of Electrical Engineering (SELECT), Vandalur Kelambakkam Road, VIT University, Chennai, India. Prof. (Dr.) Debasis Patnaik, BITS-Pilani, Goa Campus, India. Prof. (Dr.) SANDEEP BANSAL, Associate Professor, Department of Commerce, I.G.N. College, Haryana, India. Dr. Radhakrishnan S V S, Department of Pharmacognosy, Faser Hall, The University of Mississippi Oxford, MS- 38655, USA. Prof. (Dr.) Megha Mittal, Faculty of Chemistry, Manav Rachna College of Engineering, Faridabad (HR), 121001, India. Prof. (Dr.) Mihaela Simionescu (BRATU), BUCHAREST, District no. 6, Romania, member of the Romanian Society of Econometrics, Romanian Regional Science Association and General Association of Economists from Romania Prof. (Dr.) Atmani Hassan, Director Regional of Organization Entraide Nationale Prof. (Dr.) Deepshikha Gupta, Dept. of Chemistry, Amity Institute of Applied Sciences,Amity University, Sec.125, Noida, India. Prof. (Dr.) Muhammad Kamruzzaman, Deaprtment of Infectious Diseases, The University of Sydney, Westmead Hospital, Westmead, NSW-2145. Prof. (Dr.) Meghshyam K. Patil , Assistant Professor & Head, Department of Chemistry,Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University,Sub-Campus, Osmanabad- 413 501, Maharashtra, India. Prof. (Dr.) Ashok Kr. Dargar, Department of Mechanical Engineering, School of Engineering, Sir Padampat Singhania University, Udaipur (Raj.) Prof. (Dr.) Sudarson Jena, Dept. of Information Technology, GITAM University, Hyderabad, India Prof. (Dr.) Jai Prakash Jaiswal, Department of Mathematics, Maulana Azad National Institute of Technology Bhopal, India. Prof. (Dr.) S.Amutha, Dept. of Educational Technology, Bharathidasan University, Tiruchirappalli620 023, Tamil Nadu, India. Prof. (Dr.) R. HEMA KRISHNA, Environmental chemistry, University of Toronto, Canada. Prof. (Dr.) B.Swaminathan, Dept. of Agrl.Economics, Tamil Nadu Agricultural University, India. Prof. (Dr.) K. Ramesh, Department of Chemistry, C.B.I.T, Gandipet, Hyderabad-500075. India. Prof. (Dr.) Sunil Kumar, H.O.D. Applied Sciences &Humanities, JIMS Technical campus,(I.P. University,New Delhi), 48/4 ,K.P.-3,Gr.Noida (U.P.) Prof. (Dr.) G.V.S.R.Anjaneyulu, CHAIRMAN - P.G. BOS in Statistics & Deputy Coordinator UGC DRS-I Project, Executive Member ISPS-2013, Department of Statistics, Acharya Nagarjuna University, Nagarjuna Nagar-522510, Guntur, Andhra Pradesh, India.

                                

Prof. (Dr.) Sribas Goswami, Department of Sociology, Serampore College, Serampore 712201, West Bengal, India. Prof. (Dr.) Sunanda Sharma, Department of Veterinary Obstetrics Y Gynecology, College of Veterinary & Animal Science,Rajasthan University of Veterinary & Animal Sciences,Bikaner334001, India. Prof. (Dr.) S.K. Tiwari, Department of Zoology, D.D.U. Gorakhpur University, Gorakhpur-273009 U.P., India. Prof. (Dr.) Praveena Kuruva, Materials Research Centre, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore560012, INDIA Prof. (Dr.) Rajesh Kumar, Department Of Applied Physics, Bhilai Institute Of Technology, Durg (C.G.) 491001, India. Dr. K.C.Sivabalan, Field Enumerator and Data Analyst, Asian Vegetable Research Centre, The World Vegetable Centre, Taiwan. Prof. (Dr.) Amit Kumar Mishra, Department of Environmntal Science and Energy Research, Weizmann Institute of Science, Rehovot, Israel. Prof. (Dr.) Manisha N. Paliwal, Sinhgad Institute of Management, Vadgaon (Bk), Pune, India. Prof. (Dr.) M. S. HIREMATH, Principal, K.L.ESOCIETY’s SCHOOL, ATHANI Prof. Manoj Dhawan, Department of Information Technology, Shri Vaishnav Institute of Technology & Science, Indore, (M. P.), India. Prof. (Dr.) V.R.Naik, Professor & Head of Department, Mechancal Engineering, Textile & Engineering Institute, Ichalkaranji (Dist. Kolhapur), Maharashatra, India. Prof. (Dr.) Jyotindra C. Prajapati,Head, Department of Mathematical Sciences, Faculty of Applied Sciences, Charotar University of Science and Technology, Changa Anand -388421, Gujarat, India Prof. (Dr.) Sarbjit Singh, Head, Department of Industrial & Production Engineering, Dr BR Ambedkar National Institute of Technology,Jalandhar,Punjab, India. Prof. (Dr.) Professor Braja Gopal Bag, Department of Chemistry and Chemical Technology , Vidyasagar University, West Midnapore Prof. (Dr.) Ashok Kumar Chandra, Department of Management, Bhilai Institute of Technology, Bhilai House, Durg (C.G.) Prof. (Dr.) Amit Kumar, Assistant Professor, School of Chemistry, Shoolini University, Solan, Himachal Pradesh, India Prof. (Dr.) L. Suresh Kumar, Mechanical Department, Chaitanya Bharathi Institute of Technology, Hyderabad, India. Scientist Sheeraz Saleem Bhat, Lac Production Division, Indian Institute of Natural Resins and Gums, Namkum, Ranchi, Jharkhand, India. Prof. C.Divya , Centre for Information Technology and Engineering, Manonmaniam Sundaranar University, Tirunelveli - 627012, Tamilnadu , India. Prof. T.D.Subash, Infant Jesus College Of Engineering and Technology, Thoothukudi Tamilnadu, India. Prof. (Dr.) Vinay Nassa, Prof. E.C.E Deptt., Dronacharya.Engg. College, Gurgaon India. Prof. Sunny Narayan, university of Roma Tre, Italy. Prof. (Dr.) Sanjoy Deb, Dept. of ECE, BIT Sathy, Sathyamangalam, Tamilnadu-638401, India. Prof. (Dr.) Reena Gupta, Institute of Pharmaceutical Research, GLA University, Mathura, India. Prof. (Dr.) P.R.SivaSankar, Head Dept. of Commerce, Vikrama Simhapuri University Post Graduate Centre, KAVALI - 524201, A.P., India. Prof. (Dr.) Mohsen Shafiei Nikabadi, Faculty of Economics and Management, Industrial Management Department, Semnan University, Semnan, Iran. Prof. (Dr.) Praveen Kumar Rai, Department of Geography, Faculty of Science, Banaras Hindu University, Varanasi-221005, U.P. India. Prof. (Dr.) Christine Jeyaseelan, Dept of Chemistry, Amity Institute of Applied Sciences, Amity University, Noida, India. Prof. (Dr.) M A Rizvi, Dept. of Computer Engineering and Applications , National Institute of Technical Teachers' Training and Research, Bhopal M.P. India. Prof. (Dr.) K.V.N.R.Sai Krishna, H O D in Computer Science, S.V.R.M.College,(Autonomous), Nagaram, Guntur(DT), Andhra Pradesh, India. Prof. (Dr.) Ashok Kr. Dargar, Department of Mechanical Engineering, School of Engineering, Sir Padampat Singhania University, Udaipur (Raj.) Prof. (Dr.) Asim Kumar Sen, Principal , ST.Francis Institute of Technology (Engineering College) under University of Mumbai , MT. Poinsur, S.V.P Road, Borivali (W), Mumbai-400103, India. Prof. (Dr.) Rahmathulla Noufal.E, Civil Engineering Department, Govt.Engg.College-Kozhikode

                                

Prof. (Dr.) N.Rajesh, Department of Agronomy, TamilNadu Agricultural University -Coimbatore, Tamil Nadu, India. Prof. (Dr.) Har Mohan Rai , Professor, Electronics and Communication Engineering, N.I.T. Kurukshetra 136131,India Prof. (Dr.) Eng. Sutasn Thipprakmas from King Mongkut, University of Technology Thonburi, Thailand. Prof. (Dr.) Kantipudi MVV Prasad, EC Department, RK University, Rajkot. Prof. (Dr.) Jitendra Gupta,Faculty of Pharmaceutics, Institute of Pharmaceutical Research, GLA University, Mathura. Prof. (Dr.) Swapnali Borah, HOD, Dept of Family Resource Management, College of Home Science, Central Agricultural University, Tura, Meghalaya, India. Prof. (Dr.) N.Nazar Khan, Professor in Chemistry, BTK Institute of Technology, Dwarahat-263653 (Almora), Uttarakhand-India. Prof. (Dr.) Rajiv Sharma, Department of Ocean Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai (TN) - 600 036,India. Prof. (Dr.) Aparna Sarkar,PH.D. Physiology, AIPT,Amity University , F 1 Block, LGF, Sector125,Noida-201303, UP ,India. Prof. (Dr.) Manpreet Singh, Professor and Head, Department of Computer Engineering, Maharishi Markandeshwar University, Mullana, Haryana, India. Prof. (Dr.) Sukumar Senthilkumar, Senior Researcher Advanced Education Center of Jeonbuk for Electronics and Information Technology, Chon Buk National University, Chon Buk, 561-756, SOUTH KOREA. . Prof. (Dr.) Hari Singh Dhillon, Assistant Professor, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, DAV Institute of Engineering and Technology, Jalandhar (Punjab), INDIA. . Prof. (Dr.) Poonkuzhali, G., Department of Computer Science and Engineering, Rajalakshmi Engineering College, Chennai, INDIA. . Prof. (Dr.) Bharath K N, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Mechanical Engineering, GM Institute of Technology, PB Road, Davangere 577006, Karnataka, INDIA. . Prof. (Dr.) F.Alipanahi, Assistant Professor, Islamic Azad University,Zanjan Branch, Atemadeyeh, Moalem Street, Zanjan IRAN Prof. Yogesh Rathore, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Computer Science & Engineering, RITEE, Raipur, India Prof. (Dr.) Ratneshwer, Department of Computer Science (MMV), Banaras Hindu University Varanasi-221005, India. Prof. Pramod Kumar Pandey, Assistant Professor, Department Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering, ITM University, Gwalior, M.P., India Prof. (Dr.)Sudarson Jena, Associate Professor, Dept.of IT, GITAM University, Hyderabad, India Prof. (Dr.) Binod Kumar,PhD(CS), M.Phil(CS),MIEEE,MIAENG, Dean & Professor( MCA), Jayawant Technical Campus(JSPM's), Pune, India Prof. (Dr.) Mohan Singh Mehata, (JSPS fellow), Assistant Professor, Department of Applied Physics, Delhi Technological University, Delhi Prof. Ajay Kumar Agarwal, Asstt. Prof., Deptt. of Mech. Engg., Royal Institute of Management & Technology, Sonipat (Haryana) Prof. (Dr.) Siddharth Sharma, University School of Management, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra, India. Prof. (Dr.) Satish Chandra Dixit, Department of Chemistry, D.B.S.College ,Govind Nagar,Kanpur208006, India Prof. (Dr.) Ajay Solkhe, Department of Management, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra, India. Prof. (Dr.) Neeraj Sharma, Asst. Prof. Dept. of Chemistry, GLA University, Mathura Prof. (Dr.) Basant Lal, Department of Chemistry, G.L.A. University, Mathura Prof. (Dr.) T Venkat Narayana Rao, C.S.E,Guru Nanak Engineering College, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India Prof. (Dr.) Rajanarender Reddy Pingili, S.R. International Institute of Technology, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India Prof. (Dr.) V.S.Vairale, Department of Computer Engineering, All India Shri Shivaji Memorial Society College of Engineering, Kennedy Road, Pune-411 001, Maharashtra, India Prof. (Dr.) Vasavi Bande, Department of Computer Science & Engineering, Netaji Institute of Engineering and Technology, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India Prof. (Dr.) Hardeep Anand, Department of Chemistry, Kurukshetra University Kurukshetra, Haryana, India. Prof. Aasheesh shukla, Asst Professor, Dept. of EC, GLA University, Mathura, India.

                                                

Prof. S.P.Anandaraj., CSE Dept, SREC, Warangal, India. Satya Rishi Takyar , Senior ISO Consultant, New Delhi, India. Prof. Anuj K. Gupta, Head, Dept. of Computer Science & Engineering, RIMT Group of Institutions, Mandi Gobindgarh, Punjab, India. Prof. (Dr.) Harish Kumar, Department of Sports Science, Punjabi University, Patiala, Punjab, India. Prof. (Dr.) Mohammed Ali Hussain, Professor, Dept. of Electronics and Computer Engineering, KL University, Green Fields, Vaddeswaram, Andhra Pradesh, India. Prof. (Dr.) Manish Gupta, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GJU, Haryana, India. Prof. Mridul Chawla, Department of Elect. and Comm. Engineering, Deenbandhu Chhotu Ram University of Science & Technology, Murthal, Haryana, India. Prof. Seema Chawla, Department of Bio-medical Engineering, Deenbandhu Chhotu Ram University of Science & Technology, Murthal, Haryana, India. Prof. (Dr.) Atul M. Gosai, Department of Computer Science, Saurashtra University, Rajkot, Gujarat, India. Prof. (Dr.) Ajit Kr. Bansal, Department of Management, Shoolini University, H.P., India. Prof. (Dr.) Sunil Vasistha, Mody Institute of Tecnology and Science, Sikar, Rajasthan, India. Prof. Vivekta Singh, GNIT Girls Institute of Technology, Greater Noida, India. Prof. Ajay Loura, Assistant Professor at Thapar University, Patiala, India. Prof. Sushil Sharma, Department of Computer Science and Applications, Govt. P. G. College, Ambala Cantt., Haryana, India. Prof. Sube Singh, Assistant Professor, Department of Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic, Narnaul, Haryana, India. Prof. Himanshu Arora, Delhi Institute of Technology and Management, New Delhi, India. Dr. Sabina Amporful, Bibb Family Practice Association, Macon, Georgia, USA. Dr. Pawan K. Monga, Jindal Institute of Medical Sciences, Hisar, Haryana, India. Dr. Sam Ampoful, Bibb Family Practice Association, Macon, Georgia, USA. Dr. Nagender Sangra, Director of Sangra Technologies, Chandigarh, India. Vipin Gujral, CPA, New Jersey, USA. Sarfo Baffour, University of Ghana, Ghana. Monique Vincon, Hype Softwaretechnik GmbH, Bonn, Germany. Natasha Sigmund, Atlanta, USA. Marta Trochimowicz, Rhein-Zeitung, Koblenz, Germany. Kamalesh Desai, Atlanta, USA. Vijay Attri, Software Developer Google, San Jose, California, USA. Neeraj Khillan, Wipro Technologies, Boston, USA. Ruchir Sachdeva, Software Engineer at Infosys, Pune, Maharashtra, India. Anadi Charan, Senior Software Consultant at Capgemini, Mumbai, Maharashtra. Pawan Monga, Senior Product Manager, LG Electronics India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, India. Sunil Kumar, Senior Information Developer, Honeywell Technology Solutions, Inc., Bangalore, India. Bharat Gambhir, Technical Architect, Tata Consultancy Services (TCS), Noida, India. Vinay Chopra, Team Leader, Access Infotech Pvt Ltd. Chandigarh, India. Sumit Sharma, Team Lead, American Express, New Delhi, India. Vivek Gautam, Senior Software Engineer, Wipro, Noida, India. Anirudh Trehan, Nagarro Software Gurgaon, Haryana, India. Manjot Singh, Senior Software Engineer, HCL Technologies Delhi, India. Rajat Adlakha, Senior Software Engineer, Tech Mahindra Ltd, Mumbai, Maharashtra, India. Mohit Bhayana, Senior Software Engineer, Nagarro Software Pvt. Gurgaon, Haryana, India. Dheeraj Sardana, Tech. Head, Nagarro Software, Gurgaon, Haryana, India. Naresh Setia, Senior Software Engineer, Infogain, Noida, India. Raj Agarwal Megh, Idhasoft Limited, Pune, Maharashtra, India. Shrikant Bhardwaj, Senior Software Engineer, Mphasis an HP Company, Pune, Maharashtra, India. Vikas Chawla, Technical Lead, Xavient Software Solutions, Noida, India. Kapoor Singh, Sr. Executive at IBM, Gurgaon, Haryana, India. Ashwani Rohilla, Senior SAP Consultant at TCS, Mumbai, India. Anuj Chhabra, Sr. Software Engineer, McKinsey & Company, Faridabad, Haryana, India. Jaspreet Singh, Business Analyst at HCL Technologies, Gurgaon, Haryana, India.

TOPICS OF INTEREST Topics of interest include, but are not limited to, the following:  Business administration  Marketing & Management  Finance  Economics  Banking  Accounting  Human resources management  Entrepreneurship,  Education and its applications  Business ethics  Relationship & Risk management  Retail management and communication  Linguistics  International relations  Anthropology & Archaeology  Sociology  International business  Tourism and hospitality management  Law  Psychology  Corporate governance  Demography  Education  Ethics  Geography  History  Industrial relations  Information science  Library science  Media studies  Philosophy,  Political science  Public administration  Sociology  Social welfare  Literature  Paralegal  Performing arts (music, theatre and dance)  Religious studies  Visual arts  Women studies  Production and operations management  Organizational behavior and theory  Strategic management Policy  Statistics and Econometrics  Personnel and industrial relations  Gender studies & Cross cultural studies  Management information systems  Information technology

TABLE OF CONTENTS (March-May, 2014, Issue 6, Volume 1, 2 & 3) Issue 6 Volume 1 Paper Code

Paper Title

Page No.

AIJRHASS 14-305

Lessons from Natural Disasters, A Case Study Based on Rehabilitation and Re-establishment of Tsunami affected Small and Medium-scale Enterprises (SMEs) in Sri Lanka Prof. S.W.S.B. Dasanayaka, Dr Gayan Wedawatta

01-10

AIJRHASS 14-306

THE BUDGET COST FOR THE MEMBER STATES OF THE EUROPEAN FREE TRADE ASSOCIATION Prof. Dr. Herman Matthijs

11-18

AIJRHASS 14-307

Classic Suit and Polystylism: Modern Parallels of Fashionable Forms Development Based on the Tendencies Analyses within the Framework of Great Britain and Ukrainian Fashion Week-2013 TATYANA KROTOVA

19-24

AIJRHASS 14-308

Multidisciplinary approach of noise in the urban environment Samira. DEBACHE BENZAGOUTA & Bachir.RIBOUH

25-28

AIJRHASS 14-310

The New Public Sphere: a Way to Democratization Ms. Daria S. Mukhortova

29-33

AIJRHASS 14-313

Stakeholders’ Needs Assessments on Curriculum Development for Library and Information Science Program at Jimma University in Ethiopia: A Review Lawrence Abraham Gojeh and Getachew Bayissa

34-43

AIJRHASS 14-314

Political symbolism and Mass Mobilisation for Political Participation in Nigeria Alakali Terfa T., Sambe, S. A, Tondo, Aondosoo Wilfred

44-49

AIJRHASS 14-315

Symbolic Deterritorialization: the Case of Francis Alÿs Jesús Segura Cabañero, Toni Simó Mulet

50-54

AIJRHASS 14-316

THE RELEVANCE OF FABRIC TOYS IN CHILDHOOD DEVELOPMENT AND EDUCATION Dr. (Mrs.) Gloria U. Anikweze

55-62

AIJRHASS 14-323

Fusion of Inner Mind and External Life in Welty’s “Delta Wedding” G. Mohana

63-66

AIJRHASS 14-325

Study the Awareness of Trained School Teachers in Relation to RTE Act at Elementary Level Nabin Thakur

67-71

AIJRHASS 14-326

Women in Public Sphere: An Enquiry into Women’s Representation and Participation in Politics Dr. Durga Prasad Chhetri

72-76

AIJRHASS 14-327

Regional Dimensions of Rural Employment and Levels of Development in Panayur and Chanderi Town: A Case Study of Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Nargis Salim

77-81

AIJRHASS 14-328

Appraisal of Public Awareness of Human Rights Campaigns in the Mass Media: A Study of Selected Local Government Areas in Benue State Ogah, Ijuo Abari, Ameh, Solomon Ochojila

82-89

AIJRHASS 14-331

Communication Skills & Regional Dimensions: A Study on Engineering Students Sita, Rekha

90-94

AIJRHASS 14-334

AN ASSESSMENT OF ITEM BIAS USING DIFFERENTIAL ITEM FUNCTIONING TECHNIQUE IN NECO BIOLOGY CONDUCTED EXAMINATIONS IN TARABA STATE NIGERIA Amuche Chris Igomu & Fan Akpan Fan (PhD)

95-100

AIJRHASS 14-341

A PANORAMA OF MARBLE CRAFT OF BHEDAGHAT AS GEOGRAPHICAL INDICATION UNDER THE INDIAN LAW Rama J Sirpurkar, Dr. Shashikala Gurpur

101-108

Issue 6 Volume 2 Paper Code AIJRHASS 14-353

Paper Title The Marginalized Groups in Indian Social Construct: A Critical Study of Mahesh Dattani Sanjiv Kumar, Dr. Prakash Bhadury

Page No. 109-114

AIJRHASS 14-358

Role of Sarsara in Revival of Spirituality and Management Pintu Mahakul

115-120

AIJRHASS 14-367

Art or Avant-garde – A reading of Jack Kerouac’s On the Road A.Mathini

121-123

AIJRHASS 14-368

Spread of Islam in Africa Javad Haghnavaz

124-128

AIJRHASS 14-369

A Novel Education Structure for Poverty Diminution in India Chhaya Yadavm Prof. (Dr.) S. P. Lal

129-133

AIJRHASS 14-373

A Comparative Study of Several Sights Between Jalaluddin Mohammad Balkhi(Rumi) and Emily Dickinson Zahra Ahmadi

134-138

AIJRHASS 14-376

Relationship between hardiness, self-efficacy and coping responses among IT employees U.Vijayabanu, V. Jhahani

AIJRHASS 14-377

Occupational Stress, Burnout and Coping in Police Personnel: Findings from a Systematic Review Prof. Poonam Kapade-Nikam, Prof. Mohsin Shaikh

144-148

AIJRHASS 14-378

The Relationship among Organisational Climate, Job Satisfaction and Happiness of the Employees of Educational Institutions Dr. Santosh Meena, Ms. Mahima Agarwal

149-152

AIJRHASS 14-379

A View – Real Democratic India Towards Superpower (Phase I) DHARANE S.S.

153-154

AIJRHASS 14-380

Mission Statement Analysis of Selected Public Sector and Private Sector Banks in India RAJANI K G, VIJAY LAKSHMY K V

155-161

AIJRHASS 14-381

Travelling through Cultural Spaces: R.K.Narayan – the Indian Vs the Writer in My Dateless Diary: an American Journey Bibhudatta Dash

162-165

AIJRHASS 14-382

The effectiveness of the entrance to the development of aesthetic skill mapping among fifth-grade students in primary and inclination towards Social Studies Dr. Hamdy Ahmed Mahmoud Hamed(Ph.D)

166-177

AIJRHASS 14-389

An Analysis of Theories of Diffusion Pankaj Kumar, Dr. Prabhjot Kaur

178-185

AIJRHASS 14-390

Testing the Mediation Effect Using Covariance Based Structural Equation Modeling With AMOS Wan Mohamad Asyraf Bin Wan Afthanorhan, Sabri Ahmad, Ibrahim Mamat

186-190

AIJRHASS 14-393

Mass media campaign to improve infant and young child feeding practices amongst tribal mothers of Chikhli taluka, Gujarat Shriya A.Seksaria and Dr. Mini K.Sheth

191-195

AIJRHASS 14-394

Teaching language through Mnemonics Programme in pre-school Children with Hearing Impairment Dr. Sita Ram Pal, Dr. Arun Banik

196-199

Issue 6 Volume 3 Paper Code

Paper Title

Page No.

AIJRHASS 14-395

The Socio-Political Implications of Some of the Episodes in Chinua Achebe’s Novel “A Man of The People” ADERINTO, S.I. ABIODUN

200-202

AIJRHASS 14-398

Impact of Spiritual Food on Managerial Decision Making Mantu Mahakul

203-208

AIJRHASS 14-399

Analysis of Vendors in Banking Industry Dr. Hariharan.N.P, Reeshma.K.J

209-211

AIJRHASS 14-404

A Stylistic Analysis of Dickens’ “No. 1 Branch Line: The Signalman” Dr. Sheelu Singh Bhatia

212-214

AIJRHASS 14-405

Imperatives and impediments of Inclusive Education and scheduled tribes in India on the era of transnational education Dr.HaseenaV.A

215-217

AIJRHASS 14-407

Effectiveness of Anganwadi Centres in Punjab in combating Malnutrition among Children Dr. Manisha Bhatia

218-223

AIJRHASS 14-412

Analysis of cost and Benefits of education – case study of Tamil Nadu Dr. Hariharan.N.P, Siva Gurunathan.S

224-227

AIJRHASS 14-413

A Comparative Study of Sustainability of Reason Specific Inter-State Migration in India: Empirical evidence from two states with severe poverty rates Pinak Sarkar, Nutan Shashi Tigga

228-235

AIJRHASS 14-423

An Intersection of Fact and Fiction: A Study of V.S.Naipaul’s The Middle Passage Pragnya Parimita Pradhan

236-238

AIJRHASS 14-429

Growth & Development of Tourism Sector in West Bengal: Issues & Concerns Dr. Sherap Bhutia

239-246

AIJRHASS 14-432

Early Centres of Origin of Agriculture In The Middle Ganga Plain Dr. Shitala Prasad Singh

247-251

AIJRHASS 14-443

Integrated Corporate Communication Dr. Rachna Rastogi

252-255

AIJRHASS 14-446

Evaluation of Groundwater Quality and its Suitability for Drinking and Agriculture use in and around Hingoli Region, Maharashtra, India Godbole Mahendra T. & Patode H.S.

256-263

AIJRHASS 14-448

Onset of Discussion and Realistic Characters in Drama Dr Parul Yadav

264-268

AIJRHASS 14-450

Effects of Community Based Schools In Promotion Of Education Established By Khwendokor in Rural Areas of Khyber Agency, Pakistan Shahzad Khan

269-272

AIJRHASS 14-453

The Impact of Parents’ Educational Level on Educational Achievement and Aspiration of Secondary School Girls Manpreet Kaur

273-278

AIJRHASS 14-456

Application of ARIMA Model for Forecasting Production of Jasmine Flower in Madurai District of Tamil Nadu, India K. Prakash and B. Muniyandi

279-285

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

ISSN (Print): 2328-3734, ISSN (Online): 2328-3696, ISSN (CD-ROM): 2328-3688 AIJRHASS is a refereed, indexed, peer-reviewed, multidisciplinary and open access journal published by International Association of Scientific Innovation and Research (IASIR), USA (An Association Unifying the Sciences, Engineering, and Applied Research)

THE SOCIO-POLITICAL IMPLICATIONS OF SOME OF THE EPISODES IN CHINUA ACHEBE’S NOVEL “A MAN OF THE PEOPLE” ADERINTO, S.I. ABIODUN Lecturer of English Language and Literature, Wolaita Sodo University, Wolaita Sodo, Ethiopia Abstract: The purpose of this Article is bring to the fore how Chinua Achebe has used A Man of the people to condemn the societal belief that politics is the best avenue for making money, which often lead people into siphoning money from the government purse unnecessarily when they finally have access to the mantle of power. Achebe has used different episodes in A Man of the People to show Clearly African people`s thinking about the political terrain, seeing it as an avenue to enrich themselves, with the Society adoring Corrupt politicians abnormally. This research work aims at exploring the implications of Achebe`s focus in putting in place this novel. Keywords: Episodes, Literary, Politics, Society, Corruption, Belief. I. Introduction African people have been seen by many to be people of kindness, easy-going, innocence and down-to- earth. However when it comes to politics, most Africans are always enmeshed in the belief that politics is the best way to make money, and this is one thing that Achebe sets out to lambast in A Man of the People. Most African people believe that the only way to get rich quickly is joining politics and when they attain political powers, they become extremely corrupt, putting the entire Society in economic jeopardy. Achebe also uses this novel to condemn the worshipping of Corrupt Politicians by the ordinary people in the different Africa societies. To Achebe when people hail and praise Corrupt Politicians, over their wealth, they are indirectly endorsing corruption in the society, which to Achebe is unwholesome. It is our contention therefore that Achebe without doubt has Achieved his purpose of writing this novel, exposing the mindset of those who Join politics and the ordinary people`s belief concerning the need to grab favors from politicians when they are indeed supposed to condemn these corrupt people in government. A Man of the People reveals Achebe`s disappointment in the African politicians, based on their negative attitude and his disappointment also centers on the ordinary people in different African Societies not showing concern about what their politicians are doing wrong to them. II. Core Socio- Political Implications that Achebe Wanted to Show in His Novel. A. People’s Mindset Towards Joining Politics In one of the episodes in this novel, Achebe showed how the African people often view politics. Achebe in this episode below showed the fact that African people’s intention in joining politics is merely to acquire wealth, and not to serve the ordinary people in the different African Societies. The episode below Justifies people`s thought in joining politics. Nanga must have gone into politics soon afterwards and then won a seat in parliament (it was easy in those days – before we know its cash price (p.3) The episode above shows that the member of Parliament Chief Nanga at the beginning of things in this novel joined Politics because of the money he could make out of it. He was actually a High School teacher initially in the world of this novel, but Nanga joined politics because he believes that teaching job cannot give so much money like joining politics and so he did, so he could have his own share of the “National cake”. Nanga also spends money lavishly in the world of this novel, since he believes he has much more of it which he has stolen from the government’s purse. In the episode below some group of villagers have come to welcome Nanga to their village and Nanga a serving Minister in the incumbent government went on spending so much money for the villagers. Odili, a High School teacher had to complain saying the villagers have taken so such money from Nanga, and the politician posited in response: You call this spend? You never see something my brother. I no de keep

Page 200

Aderinto et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 200-202

anini for myself na so so troway (p.14) The episode above shows the reckless way Nanga spends money. This episode reflects how African politicians spend money lavishly. Their intention is to join politics for the money they could make and since they did not work hard to get the money they have, what they do is to embark on spending spree. The statement Nanga made in the episode above “you never see anything my brother” means Nanga often spend much more money than odili had seen. Also the statement “ I no dey keep anini for myself, na so so troway” means Nanga spends money the way he likes because he knows he can get more since he is a politician and has access to a lot of money. B. The Indictment of the Ordinary People in the Society. Furthermore, Achebe condemned the ordinary people in the African societies for hailing and praising corrupt politicians whenever politicians come in their midst. Nanga, as he arrived a village in this novel was welcomed extremely well by the villagers and odili, another character in the novel got annoyed in seeing the villagers dancing and expressing their happiness over the presence of odili the serving Minster in their midst, odili posited: Here were silly ignorant villagers, dancing themselves lame and waiting to blow off their gun power in honour of one of those who had started the Country off down the slopes of inflation (P. 2) This episode above is an indictment of the ordinary people in the world of this novel. The villagers were merely dancing and rejoicing at seeing chief Nanga, the politician in their midst not minding the fact that he is part of those who are sinking the society into serious economic problem, due to their corruptive activities. The episode above epitomizes how the people of most African countries do feel happy when they have a corrupt politician in their midst, instead of lambasting them, people in many African countries merely go into unnecessary ecstasy over the “big Man” before them. Achebe sees this act as a misnomer. As an addendum to the episode above, another episode in the novel, that condemns societal support of the activities of African corrupt politicians, is signposted by Achebe in this novel. A group of people were talking about the various problems associated with politics and Nanga, a serving Minster in the incumbent government tries to explain how difficult and troublesome politics can be and a woman, another participant in the discourse postulated: I no kuku mind the katakata wey de inside Make you put Minister money for my hand and all the wahala on top. I no mind at all (P.15) Achebe has used the episode above to lampoon the ordinary people of the different African societies. In the episode, the woman in the world of this novel did not take Cognizance of the fact that the Minster in their midst is a corrupt politician hers was just to get money from him without minding the source of it. This negative attitude Achebe tends to frown at out completely. For Achebe the society should see corruption as a nefarious activity and not for the ordinary people to aid and abet it. C. The Womanizing Nature of African Politicians More so, Achebe has used this novel to condemn the womanizing nature of African politicians. The episode below shows how African politicians suddenly become womanizers after joining politics. In the episode, Chief Nanga the politician took a lady for himself as a concubine with the intention of marrying her in addition to his first wife. Andrew and Odili characters in this novel were having a discussion over who lady with chief Nanga was at a get –together and Andrew replied: “His girl friend” Odili retorted “ I see” (p. 23) Andrew later postulated: Actually it’s more than that he is planning to marry her according to native law and custom. Apparently his missus is too “bush” for his present position so he want a bright new parlour wife to play hostess at his parties .(p.23) The episode above shows that chief Nanga the politician took another woman as his girl friend with the intention of marrying her eventually, having got tired of his first wife. This episode shows how African politicians do get tired of their of their wives whom they married long back, thinking that they do not befit their status any more after joining politics and holding political powers. Achebe used this episode to showcase the fact that politicians can never be trusted when it comes to the issue of women D. The Bias of the Media Achebe has further shown in this novel how the media often tilt towards the government in power and neglecting the duty of fairness they owe the society. In this novel the Prime Minister had sacked some of the

Page 201

Aderinto et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 200-202

Ministers serving under him because they did not support him in his move to spend huge amount of money on revitalizing the nose-diving coffee business in the country. Some Ministers opposed him and he sacked them. A Newspaper, “Daily Chronicle” wrote an editorial supporting the Prime Minister’s decision of sacking his Ministers. The editorial goes thus: Let us now and for all time extract from out body politic as a dentist extracts a sinking tooth. All those decadent stooges versed in text-book economics and aping the white man’s mannerisms and way of speaking. Our true leaders are not those intoxicated with their oxford Cambridge of hazard degrees but those who speak the language of the people. In the episode above, the medium in question “The daily chronicle” supports the government in power at the expense of the rest of the people in the society. This exemplifies the attitude of those who work in the media houses in different African countries, supporting the government in power either for favors or for the fear of being persecuted. Achebe condemns the bias of the press, giving support to the government, as this portends injustice on the part of the Masses.. III. Conclusion In conclusion, it is pertinent to say that Achebe has achieved his purpose of writing this novel by using A Man of the People to condemn the African politicians’ negative tendencies and by extension, condemning the ordinary people in the different African societies, for their seeming endorsement of corrupt politicians. Achebe, an African writer of repute, realizes that African politicians are bereft of the right thinking and so must be corrected. The more reason he has written this novel to check their excesses accordingly. In addition, Achebe lambasts the ordinary people in different African societies for hailing, abetting and praising African corrupt politicians whom they are supposed to condemn for their misdeeds. For Achebe, the people in African societies should recognize that African politicians need to be put in the right track by the society pinpointing their wrongs in order that African societies become better and wholesome socially, economically and politically.Achebe,a morally upright personality is one man who believes that no society can experience any progress in an atmosphere of corruption and other unwholesome practices, hence the the reason he has written this novel as a weapon of attack on corrupt politicians and the society at large. For Achebe, any society that breeds corruption can never develop and so the people of Africa should live an upright way of life so that we can have an ideal African Societies free from social vices of all sorts. References Achebe Chinua (1967) A Man of The People: Anchor Books Garden City, New York Adejare, O. (1982). Towards a systemic Text Linguistics. Paper presented at the 9 th international systemic workshop, University of York, Toronto, 25-28 August. Abrams, M.H. (1957). A Glossary of Literary Terms. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. Adejare, O. (1992). Language and Style in Soyinka: A Systemic Text Linguistic Study of a Literary Idiolect Ibadan: Heinemann Education Books (Nig.). Akindele, D.O. (1986). 'Speakers' Rights in English-English and yoruba-English Family Discourse'. A.ph.D Dissertation, university of Nottingham. Attah, R.E.B. (1976). 'speech in prose Literature. Journal of Nigeria English Studies Association, 8/1 (23-32). Austin, J.L. (1962). How to Do Things with words London: oxford University Press. Banjo, A. (1987). 'Linguistic Perspectives on the Development of Human communication' in S.O. Unoh (ed.). Topical Issues in Communication Arts. Berry, M. (1975). Introduction to systemic Linguistics l, London: Batsford. Berry, M. (1981). "Systemic Linguistics and Discourse Analysis: A Multi-level Approach to Exchange Structure, in M. Coulthard and montgomery (eds.) Studies in Discourse Analysis, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul. Baldick, Chris (1983) The Social Mission of English Criticism. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Barthes, R. (1972). "Criticism as Language". Twentieth Centurv Literary Criticism. InDavid Lodge (ed.) Burton, D. (1978). 'Towards an Analysis of Casual Conversation'. Nottingham Linguistics Circular 7/2 (13l-164). Coulthard, M. (1977). An Introduction to Discourse Analysis London: Longman. Coulthard, M., and M. Montgomery (1981b). Studies in Discourse Analysis London: Routledge and Kegan Paul. Crystal, DF. and D. Davy (1975). Advanced Conversational English, London: Longman. Conor, U., and Kaplan, R.B. (eds.) (1987). Writing Across Languages: Analysis of L2 Text. London: Adfdison Wesley Publishing Co. Incorp. Dascal, M. (1977). 'Conversational Relevance', Journal of Pragmatics, 1/4 (309-328). Dascal M. and T. Katriel (1979). 'Digressions: A Study in Conversational Coherence', Poetics and Theory of Literature 4/2 203-232. Emenyonu, Ernest, N. (1986). (ed.) Literature and Society: Selected Essays on African Literature. Oguta: Zim Pan-African Publishers.

Page 202

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Impact of Spiritual Food on Managerial Decision Making Mantu Mahakul M.Sc. (Value Education & Spirituality) Annamalai University, Annamalainagar, Tamil Nadu, INDIA Abstract: From ancient days it is believed that there is strong connection between mind and body. Due to this food taken by human individuals not only provides energy to the body for work but also affects the mind a lot. Mental waves including vibration fluctuate according to the state of food materials taken inside. Attitudes are produced due to experiences in memory. Many of the attitudes are affected by vibrations generated by food materials and according to their nutritional values. It is truly said that as like as food you take as like as your mind will be. There are some foods which on taking produce aggressiveness, anger and negative attitudes and many vice full desires. While some foods provide mental satisfaction, peace and make mind energetic and help in quick decision making. Behaviour or attitudes play vital role in managing things and managerial decision making. In modern world many of the managers and employers suffer a lot due to unpleasant expressions generated in their minds while controlling and dealing their sub-ordinates and employees at workplaces. These adversely affect the employees and workers. Very often we do not know the causes of generation of aggressive and harmful behaviours of others. However there is invisible connection between them and nutrition with mind and body. Better health produces better attitudes. So we need to study about impact of food on mental and physical health with respect to spiritual food culture. Because in decision making consciousness plays major role and it depends on the purity or impurity of the mind waves. This study emphasizes about impact of spiritual food in healthy, better and proper managerial decision making. Hope this will be beneficial. Keywords: Food, nutrition, mind, attitudes and decision

I. Introduction Beloved supreme father says, “So, why do you feed that soul the food of hell? In heaven they have so many physical comforts, so why do you invoke that soul here and feed him the food of hell?” Also God speaks, “Now I am giving you the third eye of knowledge. You will then become the kings of kings once again.” (Morning Murli, 14.04.03) For millions of people in modern world food has become the matter of controversy and confusion. Food has given rise to many conflicts among different races of human beings. At this age increasing rate of obesities, diabetes, weight gain and eating disorders have puzzled the minds of many which have adversely affected human health and attitudes. Adding to these factors increasing rate of addictions, use of bad products which badly affect physical health and mental health and use of commercial beverages have increased the competition of consuming these worldwide for which the consumers of these have not forgotten certain steps of committing violence. Such usages have increased more confusion to many in taking decision of choosing their food and drink. It is seen that many of us have forgotten about spiritual connection of ours with food. Due to lack of knowledge about relationship of body with spirit very often we wander inside darkness. The lightest tiny spirit feels very much heavy today due to modern heavy chemical landed diet. However simple and nourishing diet adds flavour of life in soul making more energetic. From very ancient days people have taken advantages of spiritual food for nourishing their soul by perfection. Modern day’s food propels us in dilemma producing the behaviour of confusion about food and its relationship with mental thoughts from which the attitudes are generated frequently. Modern people spend many more money for consuming heavy chemical foods which taste very well but become hazardous in many cases which happens due to lack of knowledge and awareness about food and its nature. The Holy Bible states, “Why do you spend your money for that which is not bread and your labour for that which does not satisfy? Listen diligently to me, and eat what is good and delight yourselves in rich food.” (Isaiah 55:2, English Standard Version) Foods which do not benefit more and produce gases, clumsiness in mind, increase risk, produce disease, produce laziness in activities, give poisonous impact and spoil both physical and mental strengths are very often considered as foods of hell or harmful foods. Swami Vivekananda (1863-1902) defines spiritual food as food providing pure energy to the holy soul and body which is mainly obtained from plant sources with toxic free substances with pleasant essence of Godly feeling through which mind perceives love, mercy, peace and bliss. Mahatma Gandhi (1869-1948) defines spiritual food

Page 203

Mantu Mahakul, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 203-208

as life sustaining nutritious energy provider to both mind and spirit that does not contain any poisonous substances, harmful microbes but contains helpful minerals and vitamins of required amount to nourish and purify health both mental and physical to fit for sustaining in the universe peacefully with harmony. Sri Aurobindo (1872-1950) defines spiritual food as the sacred food of nourishment of both body and mind which is obtained from nonviolent way specifically from vegetable sources that helps in purifying body, mind, actions and attitudes of the consumed person. John W. Ritenbaugh (1932) defines spiritual food as source of energy of holy nature for both body and mind which nourishes purity in all regards up lifting human tendency with values from inner core of holy soul to fulfil Godâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s purpose. Diplomat of American board of holistic medicine Dr. Gabriel Cousens (MD) (1943) defines spiritual food as the food of holistic nature that is free from toxicity and aggressive ingredients, nutritious and nourishes both mind and body with pure minerals and vibrations in terms of increasing strength of life and life span. Generally decision means any conclusion or resolution reached after any consideration about any matter or thing in any organization as an authority or in personal level at any workplace or home. Prince Upendra Bhanja (1670-1720) defines decision making as an important adjacent process of life in day to day actions which is completely based on the trust of experiences of either spiritual or material nature with possible alternatives to shortly bring one definite and perfect one among them. Professor of psychology James T. Reason (1990) defines decision making as a cognitive process which is resulted in the selection of belief or in a course of action among different alternative possibilities which produces a definite final choice which may prompt or may not prompt respective action. James G. March (1994) says that decision making is a central human activity which is fundamental in nature to individual life, group life, organizational life and social life. Professor Stephen P. Robbins (2003) defines decision making as a process of choosing the best out of many alternatives basing on own experiences in all fields of performing duties or actions. He says that life is sum of decisions and better decisions mean a better life. Basing on his training experience Straus professor of Business Administration of Harvard Business School Max H. Bazeman (2005) says that for careful judgements in required situations persons are influenced by their own biases to some extent. These biases can better be overcome by managerial decisions. Examining judgement in different varieties of organizational contexts, practical strategies for changing decision making process and improving these become very much important parts of human behaviour. II. Objectives It is important to understand and evaluate the strength of mind and body basing on food intake. The nature of food, chemicals within and many more ingredients not only nourish the physical health but also affect the mental vibrations. It is necessary to realize the truth behind this and evaluate that how does food affect mind and thought process? Why does and how does bad food degrade the strength of life and spiritual food nourish physical and mental behaviour? How do attitudes are related to food induced thoughts and vibrations? How do different ingredients of food regulate and affect decision making process? Such many questions may affect minds of many forming such objectives of this study only with the motive to evaluate these properly and understand. III. Literature Review Many debates are happened from many years about the intake of food and relationship of mind with the nature of food. The scriptures of almost of all religions suggest for the spiritual food of good nature for better human behaviour and attitudes. There are several controversies exist many times due to misunderstanding about spiritual and non-spiritual food. Increasing rates of usages of non-spiritual foods have motivated the modern mass of human resources. Accordingly the violent behaviour and negative attitudes of many people are also increasing time to time across the world. Spiritual historians argue about such cases relate to heavy usage of processed and heavy chemical landed commercial foods specifically non-vegetarian foods obtained from violent sources of killing animals and birds. Researches remark about dangers of eating such foods as harmful for both physical and mental health and thus produce bad attitudes due to psychic imbalance. Few of the medical resources argue that certain amino acids required for human growth are not available in plant sources. However other teams including spiritual healers say that scarcity of amino acids can be fulfilled through vegetarian sources as nature abundantly preserves all materials for us. They say that animals like elephant, horse, cow, giraffe, buffalo, ox, gorilla, rhinoceros and hippopotamus, having more muscles than any other creatures in this universe consume large of proteins to fulfil getting almost all amino acids required for gaining muscles eating only vegetarian foods of plant sources. There is no need to eat meat for gaining more meat on body. A. Dangers of eating meat There are several dangers of eating meat. Modern medical science proves that cooked meat contains harmful compounds like carcinogens. Animal meat cooked in very high temperature, with multiple reactions of amino acids and creatine produces heterocyclic amines. On cooking red meat also relates with nitrosamines. Such things increase the risk of cancer and its development. Red meat contains saturated fats that increase the level of cholesterol that lead to heart diseases, diabetes, increases the risk of developing colorectal lung, stomach, pancreatic, oesophageal and endometrial cancer. Eating of meat, fish and other sea foods increase the uric acid content in the body that acidifies the body. It increases the risk of joint inflammation, creates mucus that is not

Page 204

Mantu Mahakul, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 203-208

miscible with water in the body, increases the body weight, disturbs hormonal secretions and its balance and drags premature onset of puberty and development of children. With intake of little meat increases the chance of greater amount of proteins that lead to excess of uric acid causes illness in joints and makes origination of many diseases. Research of Harvard School of Public Health indicates that eating red meat including fish, chicken etc. can hasten the death or deadly effect. Author Pan has studied more than 121,000 doctors and nurses in two big studies regarding meat related heart diseases, stroke, cancers and other disease deaths for 22 years. He has concluded that 13 to 20 % of death rates increase due to heart diseases and 19.5 % cancers related death rates due to consumption of meat. Pan confirms that cooking meat releases nitrosamines that increase the risk of cancer. It is said by the researchers that protein lovers are 74 % more likely to die which are obtained from meat sources. Research of University of South California (USC) clarifies this along with the indication that meat eaters are more likely to die in diabetes. Researchers of USC confirm that animal protein is the chief culprit. Also they clarify that plant based proteins specifically obtained from vegetables like beans do not seem to produce mortality effect as animal proteins. Valtor Longo says that almost everyone is having the chance of cancer cell or pre cancer cell with them with habit of meat eating. USC study of 6381 people of age 50 or more over a period of 18 years, shows that death risks are four times more likely high in meat consuming persons with animal proteins in middle age like 50-65. Richard Corliss describes meat as more complicated and hazardous food. Lack of physical exercise, increasing rate of addiction to narcotic substances and alcohol and due to bad habit of eating and consumption of red meat increase the risk of high bold pressure and reduced health standard. Fats in meat, heavy cholesterol and heavy salts in processed meat increase the chance of high blood pressure. It is confirmed from the research that vegetarians get low cholesterol than the non-vegetarians. In many cases it is seen that for neutralization of acids induced from meat eating is carried out by calcium. To fulfil the sufficient requirements of acid neutralization this calcium comes from human bones and gradually on long meat eating habit weakens the bones which results diseases like osteoarthritis and osteoporosis. It is further known from the research as per the report of Harvard School of Public Health that persons eating red meat are 19 % more subjective and persons eating processed meat are 51 % more subjective to suffer in diabetes. According to many medical authorities around 62 % strokes happen due to high blood pressure are the dangerous effect of eating of red meat. Brain hemorrhage i.e. internal bleeding of brain due to rupture of any vein or blood vessel happens if a person eats red meat ( meat of cow, goat, sheep and other most of the mammals) with condition of high blood pressure and in this case death is definite. However even a person with high blood pressure if eats green vegetables and maintains vegetarian diet remains safe and no such condition he faces. Maneka Gandhi argues that white meat i.e. meat of chicken etc. is also dangerous as excess protein cannot be kept inside body and it is converted in to uric acid. It is noted that production of each kg of meat emits 3 or 4 kg of CO 2 (Carbon dioxide) to the atmosphere multiplies many ecological problems. The water portal of UNESCO specifies that for production of 1kg of beef, 15000 litres of water is used. However production of 1kg of vegetables requires 1000 litres of water. Differences are not only restricting to water used but also many other factors. According to western agricultural engineers two and half acres of land (a hectare) is needed for two years for producing food for growth of a cow to obtain only 300 kg of meat. However that same hectare i.e. two and half acres of land can produce 7000 kg of wheat or 12000 kg of corn on cultivation for vegetarian diet for human consumption. Same thing is happening for growth of goat and sheep. Many of the people who die in starvation in this modern world can be feed well if the consumption of meat will be reduced and cultivation of vegetable cereals will be increased. The Holy Bible says, “It is good not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything that causes your brother to stumble.” (Romans 14:21, English Standard Version) Dr. Frank Hu, professor of nutrition of Harvard School of Public Health says, “We should move to more plant based diet. This can subsequently reduce the risk of chronic disease and risk of premature death.” Dr. Dean Ornish of the University of California, San Francisco, says, “What we include in our diet is important as what we exclude.” He also says that including lower fat diets are the strongest weapons for prevention of chronic diseases. Lower fats diets include all good vegetables from plant sources. Author Pintu Mahakul cum researcher of Berhampur University, India favours the vegetarianism as per his research findings on the turmeric of Kandhamal and suggests that every day people should consume little of turmeric powder along with cooking of vegetable dishes that reduce the risk of all types of cancers. B. Dangers of eating onion and garlic Usages of onion (Allium cepa) and garlic (Allium sativum) are increased these days. In ancient Indian, and Greek civilizations onions and garlic are not seem to be used in food. Archaeological discoveries indicate that the sculpture of garlic bulb dates back to 3700 BCE, while paintings of garlic are found in arts of 3200 BCE of Egyptian civilization. Spanish brings garlic to Americans in between 1400-1500s AD and Americans show huge reaction towards garlic in this era. Many debates are also going on this issue of usage of both. People ask why mediators and spiritual persons do not use these in their food although these are obtained from plant sources. Answering to such questions we can say these are falling under pungent food category. Onion and garlic both are toxic in nature. Research shows that usage of these lead to prostate cancer. Garlic contains neuro-poisons. Garlic totally desynchronizes the brain and causes for leading to the loose psychic mind. Very toxic sulphonehydroxyl ion present in it easily penetrates blood brain barriers like dimethyl sulphoxide i.e. DMSO and acts

Page 205

Mantu Mahakul, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 203-208

like poisons for brain cells. Garlic reduces the reaction time and decision making process interfering fine vibrations of mental waves. Dr. Robert Bob C. Beck in 1980s finds in his research that foods of garlic families have detrimental effect on brain and very much harmful in nature. They are also harmful to the animals like dogs and cats. Dr. Beck (Dsc) in 1950s says that while he takes flight test, flight surgeon warns him along with his team of pilots not to touch even garlic at least before 72 hours before driving aeroplanes as it reduces reaction time 3 to 4 times because it desynchronizes of the brain. He agrees that onions are just magnet for micro organisms like bacteria, fungi and viruses. Even it is not at all safe to use cut onion next day as it invites microbes. It also attracts flue towards it. Raw and cut onions become highly poisonous. Sliced onions are even not at all safe to keep in zip bags. As onion acts as magnet for poisonous bacteria, there is more chance of adverse stomach infections, excess bile secretions, food poisoning etc. Even of sulphur compounds fly in little air from the cut surface of broken tissue of onion and make watery eye and increase the chance of headache. The organosulphoxides in onions, garlic, leeks, chives and shallots react with red blood cells of dogs and cats causing damage or explode. Cats are more sensitive towards allium as it has more lytic effects. Consumption of onions and garlic causes halitosis i.e. bad breath. It is reported by the various researchers that 80 to 90% of the bad breaths originate in mouth are due to consumption of above five pungent plant foods. Tsang –Tsze reports that five pungent vegetables contain five different enzymes that cause detrimental effect to five organs of the body along with repulsive breath. He says that onion is harmful to lung, garlic to heart, leek to spleen, chive to liver and spring onion or shallot is harmful to kidneys. Roman poet Horace writes that garlic is the most harmful hemlock. In Reiki practice alliaceous plants are considered as first toxic along with usages of tobacco and alcohol as they have negative effects on the human body. Red onions dangerously produce dry cough, watery eyes, running nose, sneezing and many other cold related symptoms. In Greek civilization many aristocrat families do not eat onion and garlic. In ancient Roman civilization priests have also never shown interest for onion, garlic and meat and other harmful food materials considering them as main obstacles in the path of prayer and meditations. Traditional Chinese, traditional Japanese, Buddhists, Vaishnavas, Jainas and many pious people of the world avoid onion and garlic in any form. In William Shakespeare’s famous play, “Midsummer Night’s dream” character Bottom tells others not to consume onion or garlic to utter sweet breath. IV. Importance of the study There is invisible connection between food and mental actions. Nature of food, minerals and vitamins within them interfere the behaviours of human individuals. Toxic food generates toxic thoughts in mind and unfavourable or less suitable food generates waste and negative thoughts. However favourable and spiritual foods generate positive thoughts of high standard. Thoughts are directly related to action and thus to behaviours and attitudes. Vegetables obtained from plant sources which are free from toxicity and aggressive ingredients and harmful chemicals are generally considered as the favourable and spiritual foods. Food nourishes both physical and mental health. Good health is the key of better attitudes and decision making. Realizing this truth Donald Watson in 1944 cofounds the Vegan Society in England and also coined the term vegan which means strictly vegetarian. Dr. Gabriel Cousens (MD), an American physician brings forward the vegan movement with establishment of vegan schools for holistic education for children. In modern super markets the demand of vegan foods are continuously increasing. Ayurveda describes about the qualities of food and behaviours produced. Holy Gita states that foods of Sattva Guna which are free from toxicity, passionate and aggressive ingredients are of best qualities which give good health, wealth and good attitudes and behaviours are produced from these and hold the knowledge. Foods of Rajo Guna i.e. fill with passionate ingredients which give sorrows and pain and produce materialistic behaviours and attitudes generally generate selfish desires, bad attitudes and unethical actions. A person consuming this category of food works foolishly with sensual gratification. Foods of Tamo Guna i.e. fill with aggressive ingredients, toxic materials, rotten, spoiled and which produce diseases, laziness and many more harmful attitudes with mode of ignorance are dangerous. Persons adopting this category of food cannot take instant and effective decision due to slow and ignorant reaction time. It is clear from this that food ingredients are key factors for better health and attitudes. A. Effect of Vegetarian and spiritual food on human health and attitudes Modern food system is full with junk and fast foods which aggravates high blood pressure and other health complications with production of many more negative attitudes. Preparation of food at kitchen should be in hygienic condition and the person who cooks should have good motive because the mental vibrations enter inside the food invisibly create thoughts accordingly while another person takes this. The purely vegetarian food, when prepared with memory of Divine with good vibration in a pure place with pure mind in a strictly hygienic and neat and clean kitchen with clean utensils and before serving offered to God in mind and the person who takes first offers to Divine and eats in memory of Divine is called spiritual food. Such food generates calm and favourable vibrations in mind with many more positive attitudes which become pleasant to others. To keep blood pressure right National heart, lung and blood institute of America suggests consuming low fat foods which means strictly good vegetables. According to the institute, glutamic acid present in vegetable helps in reducing high blood pressure and thus it reduces hyper tension and aggressive behaviour.

Page 206

Mantu Mahakul, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 203-208

Fruits like lime, orange and grape contain phytonutrient and bioflavonoid which prevent the blood blocking in veins and allow circulating properly. Antioxidant lycopene present in tomato reduces the high blood pressure. Cauliflower, broccoli, cabbage, and other leafy vegetables contain glutamic acid which helps brain working properly. Magnesium, potassium and carotenoids present in melon fruits prevent hardening and thickening of blood vessels reducing cholesterol. To maintain blood pressure properly and to be free from diabetes it is better to be vegetarian. B. Effective managerial decision making produced by spiritual food We take decisions every day in our life frequently. This is definitely a cognitive process that results the entire course of action among several alternatives of actions or many alternative scenarios. Decision making process becomes pleasant while the mental status remains in a condition as good as possible. This can be well maintained by dietary plan of regular practice of intake of spiritual food. Purely vegetarian food keeps the state of mind free from negative tendencies and memory of Divine purifies every thought before instant decision. B.1. Purpose identification of decision: - Whenever we proceed for taking instant decision it is highly essential to identify the purpose of particular decision, its importance and effect after taking this in surrounding environment and persons. Purpose identification is a major step followed by thought process judged by intellect. B.2. Gathering of mass information: - Before taking decision it is highly essential to gather all possible information for analysis. Mind sharpens with spiritual food and a human individual shows interest and cleverly gathers all positive and valuable information with definite objectives. Due to mass information it becomes easier to understand the necessity of decision. B.3. Judging alternatives with God’s principle: - Taking alternatives for each aspect of decision is essential and to judge them is intellect’s work. Without proper judgement it is not so easier to choose a valuable alternative. If choosing gets motivation from selfish and material desires then it fails for effective decision making. Spiritually empowered human being who takes spiritual food on the basis of God’s principles takes judgement of alternatives frequently and properly for which spiritual food produces positivity B.4. Analysis of various choices during brainstorm: - Brainstorm is nothing but a moment in which one person suddenly becomes unable to think clearly over any matter or acts sensibly either in individual level, group discussion or for production of ideas in group discussion. Due to non-spiritual food the reaction time becomes slower three to four times of brain like intake of onion and garlic with existence of impurities and negativity. Spiritual food increases the reaction time of brain. So a person overcomes brainstorm and analyses various choices properly. This is also an important task done in favour of decision making process. B.5. Alternative evaluation: - Evaluation in quick manner is carried out only due to positive and pure vibrations of mind in good state. Without evaluating alternatives chosen decision cannot be taken effectively. Vegetarians bring better evaluation process than others to draw out perfect alternative among other alternatives. B.6. Selecting best alternative based on righteousness: - Random choosing of alternatives with material motives may not be fruitful. That may be tempted by unrighteousness. It is essential to have the efficiency of choosing alternative with righteousness within the periphery of spiritual laws of universe. Spiritual food maintains both physical and mental health in a state of righteousness which helps a lot in selecting alternative. B.7. Executing decision with spiritual aspect: - Execute is nothing but to plan and order properly. Decision chosen with best alternative now should be planned properly and ordered is sequence based on spiritual views for better success. Only intake of spiritual food keeps the state of mind in spirituality which helps in executing decision properly. B.8. Evaluation of final result: - Any decision leads to a result. A best decision brings out grand organizational success. If the result is not properly understood and analysed the decisions for future can never be taken in right manner. Evaluation of final result finishes a phase of decision making is definitely a product of effective sharp and pure mind. V. Discussion Spiritual food is different than material food. Spiritual food is purely vegetarian food prepared in memory of Divine. The vibrations enter in to it by the food maker are pure and of good and pleasant motives. Eating food we eat conscious vibrations of the maker. Good vibrations generate positive thoughts and remove negativity from mind. Mind needs special attention for the benefit of effective decision. Increasing rate of high blood pressure, diabetes and many other diseases are related to impure foods. Good health produces good attitudes. Spiritual food not only balances physical health but also keeps the person mentally fit. It’s difficult to take instant decision with ill mental state. That is again more crucial during risk and uncertainty. Eating red meat, onion and garlic produces pungent mental state and spoils the good physical health. It badly affects managerial decision making process due to bad reaction time and brainstorm. In modern organizational systems managers take frequent decisions even under work pressure, stress, dilemma and ill health. These may not be effective necessarily. To keep good health and mental fitness it is essential to strictly follow the spiritual food culture.

Page 207

Mantu Mahakul, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 203-208

VI. Conclusion Every plant based toxic free seed, leaves and fruits are suitable for food to maintain good health and produce better attitudes. Health and attitudes are correlated. Mind and body are also co related. There is strong connection between body mind and food. Spiritual food holds secret vibrations for effective decision making. After knowing these managers, employers and employees who take organizational decisions will become more careful for their daily intake of food knowing attitudes are produced from food. After having this study we can eagerly say that it will be beneficial for managers in planning, organizing, maintaining official workload by correcting their food intake practice. This also reduces the stress at workplace. Vegetarian managers take more frequent decisions properly then non-vegetarians due to rapid reaction time. Decision making becomes easier and the process is well evaluated and understood. Not only practice of spiritual food balances the workforce in purity but also teaches effectively the other generation of managers and employees about decision making process as important mental work. It becomes easier for effective training and development. Beloved God Father says that all impure, bad, toxic and pungent foods are the foods of hell. Finely God declares that he has given all required food materials in plants only to each bird, animal, reptiles and human beings. Strictly vegetarian foods obtained from good plant sources can be of better qualities and can be considered as the pure foods of heaven. God reminds this in Holy Bible and says, “Behold, I have given you every plant yielding seed that is on the face of all the earth and every tree with seed in its fruit. You shall have them for food. And to every beast of the earth and to every bird of the heavens and to everything that creeps on the earth, everything that has the breath of life, I have given every green plant for food. And it was so.” (Genesis 1:29-30, English Standard Version) References [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24]

BapDada “Morning Murli, 14.04.03.” Om Shanti, Madhuban, 2003, p 2. Bazeman, Max H. “Judgement in Managerial Decision Making.” Wiley, 6th Edition, 2005, pp 55-77, 210-231. ISBN 0471684309 Bhanja, Upendra. “Lavanyabatee.” From Granthabali, Dharma Grantha Store, Cuttack Block, Eric. “Garlic and Other Alliums: The Lore and the Science.” Royal Society of Chemistry, 1st Edition, 2010, pp11-67, 91117, 304-333, 410-467. ISBN 1849731802 Brahma Kumaris. “Why follow a Vegetarian Diet?” Brahma Kumaris, Washington DC. Available at http://www.brahmakumaris.org/us/washingtondc/vegetariancooking/whyvegetarian Cousens, Gabriel. “Spiritual Nutrition: Six Foundations for Spiritual Life and the awakening of Kundalini.” North Atlantic Books, Reprint edition, 2005, pp 12-77, 515-603. ISBN 1556434995 Fairfax. “Dangers of eating meat revealed.”One News, TVNZ, March 05, 2014 Gandhi, M. K. “The Story of My Experiments with Truth.” Navajivan Publishing House, 1927 Gandhi, Maneka. “Meat eating causes diseases.” The Bihar Times, May 2, 20110 “Garlic-Stinking Rose or Revered Medicine.” Vegetarians in Paradise. Available at http://www.vegparadise.com/highestperch71.html Mahakul, Pintu. “Turmeric: The Golden Herb of Kandhamal.” Prabhat Publication, Berhampur, 1st edition, 2010. ISBN 9788190994606 March, James G. “A Primer on Decision Making: How Decisions Happen.” The Free Press, New York, 1994, pp 57-100. ISBN 0-02-920035-0 McGee, Harold. “The Chemical Weapons of Onions and Garlic.” The New York Times, June 8, 2010. “Onions and Garlic-Toxic and Brain Synchronization Destroyer.” Brahma Kumaris, India. Available at https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/bkindia/0EVTyz1vg2k Park, Alice. “Eating Red Processed Meat raises your risk of early death.” Diet, Time, March 13, 2012. Available at http://healthland.time.com/2012/03/13/just-how-unhealthy-is-that-steak-the-deadly-dangers-of-eating-red-meat/ Paul, Goutam. “How Onions and Garlic Ruin my Research.” Goutampaul.com, Aachen, Germany. December 5, 2012, Reason, James. “Human Error.” Cambridge University Press, 1990, ISBN 0521314194 Ramsay, Barbara. “Food and Thought” Available at http://www.brahmakumaris.org/news-andmedia/articles/Health%20and%20Well-being/Food%20for%20Thought?set_language=en Ritenbaugh, John W. “Eating How Good it is!” (Part-1 -7) Forerunner, Bible Tools, 2001 Robbins, Stephen P. “Decide & Conquer: Make winning Decisions and Take control of Your Life.” FT Press, 1st Edition, 2003, pp 15-78. ISBN 0131425013 “Spiritual Nutrition: Feeding the body, nourishing the spirit.” Spirit of the earth-The Living Centre-Eco spiritual education Sanctuary, Available at http://www.thelivingcentre.com/cms/spirit/spiritual-nutrition-feeding-the-body-nourishing-the-spirit Sri Aurobinda. “The Hour of God.” Saashram (Editor), Sri Aurobindo Ashram Publication Department, 4th Edition, 1991. ISBN 8170582172 “The Dangers of eating Meat.” Dherbs.com, Available at http://dherbs.com/news/4804/4669/The-Dangers-of-EatingMeat/d,ai.html#.U0HIB3kkfIU Vivekananda, Swami. “Living at the source.” Ann Myren, Dorothy Madison (Editors), Shambhala Pub Incorporated, 1993.

Page 208

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Analysis of Vendors in Banking Industry Dr. Hariharan.N.P1, Reeshma.K.J 2 Professor of Economics, 2Research scholar, 1,2 School of Social Sciences and Languages, VIT University, Vellore-14, Tamil Nadu,INDIA 1

Abstract: Commercial banking in India has been witnessing lot of changes in the past two decades. Particularly after the introduction of core banking, Vendors are playing major role in introducing new concepts in banking, which are based on electronic handling of many transactions. There are big names like TCS, Infosys, Jack Hentry and David Henderson. Advanced platforms are being used and the banking sector has become vibrant. The architecture is standards-based and multi-tiered. Key words: core banking, architecture, platform, SOA. I. Introduction When trade becomes liberal and investments and capital movements become global, it becomes imperative for banking industry to surge towards core banking solutions from the traditional banking methodology. Introduction of core banking has resulted in computerization and net working in banking operations. With increase in value and volume of trade, both in domestic markets and international markets, new delivery channels for customers have been introduced (the internet banking, Mobile Banking, Mobile Automated Teller Machines (ATMs), multi- functional ATMs, shared ATM services, large scale usage of Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS) for quick, immediate funds transfer and smart card based cards to mention a few). Core banking introduced at the commercial banks has had its repercussions on Reserve Bank of India, where IT is being used extensively. RTGS, OLTAS, ORFS and electronic accounting system have led to greater use of IT on the banking industry. Most of the employees of banks are not having high competency in IT and IS related fields. Lot of bank functions are being outsourced the world over, and the full benefits of outsourcing in the Indian context have not yet been clearly proven. Many IT related tasks have been outsourced by banks and they work to the best advantage of banks. In this context, IS audit becomes more important and has become a regular process of concurrence and audit of banks. To this end, tools and technologies such as COBIT and conformity to internationally accepted standards such as ISO 27001 are being used. II. Reasons for Utilizing Vendors for Banks Cost effective, Modernization of banks: Core banking requires bank modernization and it is not possible to manage core banking functions with outdated techniques. It should be cost effective and efficient. For example, Accenture can handle 850 transactions per second, 20 million accounts, 25 million transactions posted per day [1] . The same way, Misys Bank Fusion Universal Banking can handle 5 million customers, 12 million accounts, and a database of 30 million transactions. That means, 600,000 online transactions per hour with 95% responding in less than 0.5 seconds, and 800,000 transactions in batch mode [2]. SOA based system: Many large banks have independent systems working from different vendors. They have different environment. Service oriented architecture can provide better integration between different entities. Usually the architecture of the system needs to be written in object oriented language, where it can be ported to other operating systems and data base easily. For example, CSC provides technology-enabled solutions and services through three primary lines of business: Business Solutions and Ser-vices, the Managed Services Sector, and the North American Public Sector. CSC’s offerings include system design and integration, information technology and business process servicing, applications software development, web and application hosting, mission support, and management consulting. With 97,000 employees and annual revenue of $16.2 billion, CSC provides software solutions and services for all sectors of the global financial services industry. CSC handles the deployment of its banking systems through its own implementation teams, as well as IBM’s. The implementation fees vary by the number of products defined, features used, application inter- faces, and database conversions [3]. The architecture is standards-based and utilizes a multi-tiered architecture consisting of:

Page 209

Hariharan.N.P et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 209211

API Layer: provides interface to Core bank online functions and is implemented as methods on Enterprise Java Bean (EJB 3.x). Business Logic Layer: implemented through Core bank controllers that incorporate the handling of domain objects such as customer, accounts, and transactions. Business Domain Layer: implements Core bank object servers, which incorporate the data domain such as accounts and transactions. Data Access Layer: provides access to the database [4]. Full view of the customer: For better communication between the bank and customers, the banks expect their vendors to provide multi channel technologies. Banks insist on multi channel options like ATM, internet, mobile and IVR to attract and serve customers. Core banking solutions are also expected to facilitate product development and provide flexible customization capabilities. Celent has developed a framework for evaluating vendors called the ABCD Vendor View. This is a standard representation of a vendor marketplace designed to show at a glance the relative positions of each vendor in four categories: Advanced technology: refers to Architecture, Hardware platform Integration (messaging/middleware layer), User interface, Operating systems and Databases. Breadth of functionality: refers to Teller/Platform, Internet/Mobile, ATM, Loan Origination, Mortgage Servicing, Wealth Management/Securities/Mutual Funds, Letters of Credit, Cash Management, Remote Deposit Capture, Payroll Small Business Administration (SBA), Asset Liability Management, Bill Pay Cards, Customer Data Analytics/CRM, Data Warehouse, Risk Management, Payments, Transfers, Customization Capabilities, and Languages Supported â&#x20AC;&#x17E; Currency Supported. Customer base: This refers to estimated total assets of banks using the system. For example, a vendor may have say 10 banks with Rs 1000 crores assets, and another vendor may have, say equal number of banks, 10, but the assets may be worth 100,000 crores. Depth of client services: refers to Change management, Level of maintenance support, Releases and updates and Customer Feedback [5]. III. Indian based Companies as Bank Vendors Infosys Limited is global consulting, software and IT services company founded in 1981. Offerings of Infosys range from business and technology consulting, system integration, products & platforms, maintenance, reengineering, IT infrastructure, and business process outsourcing. Finacle is a universal banking solution from Infosys aimed at the core banking, wealth management, CRM, Islamic banking, treasury, e-banking, and mobile banking requirements of retail, corporate, and universal banks. Infosys has more than 140,000 employees in the whole company (including subsidiaries) and more than 7,500 in the Finacle division. Infosys had revenue of $6 billion in 2011, with almost $300 million of that attributed to their core banking products. Partners of Infosys are SAS, Surya Soft, RSA, Arcot, Sun Tec, FRS Global, NEWGEN and Covina & Value First to mention a few. The three largest financial institutions running the Finacle platform are Australia and New Zealand (ANZ) Regional Bank with $514 billion in assets, State Bank of India, India with $369 billion in assets (Overseas branches) and Southeast Asian Bank with $255 billion in assets [6]. Tata Consultancy Services (TCS) is a global provider of technology services, outsourcing, and business solutions. TCS has over 214,000 employees and reported revenue of over $8.2 billion during the year ending March 31st 2011, $3.7 billion of which came from the Banking, Financial Services, and Insurance (BFSI) segment. TCS has over 145 offices in 42 countries worldwide. TCS Financial Solutions, a strategic business unit of TCS, provides financial product solutions to financial institutions globally across the banking, capital markets, and insurance domains under the brand name TCS BaNCS. TCS BaNCS is positioned as a solution to the Financial Services Industry, offering Core Banking, Payments, Treasury, Securities Processing, Corporate Actions, Insurance and Policy Administration solutions. TCS also recently introduced its TCS BaNCS Core Banking solution as a 100% Java version in the market place which is being deployed at few of its client sites. A few of the largest financial institutions running the TCS BaNCS plat-form include: Deutsche Bank Ag, Germany: $27,410 billion in assets (core banking payments, deposits, and loans). State Bank of India, India: $369 billion in assets (retail and commercial deposits and loans implemented on domestic branches). Large US Bank: $147 billion in assets (payment solution) [7]. IV. Impact of Vendors on the Banking Sector Total number of employees in banks as 2013 was 1175,149 of which employment by State Bank of India group is 228, 296 (19.42%). Total number of bank branches was 70,373 in 2005 and at present it is 109,811 in 2013

Page 210

Hariharan.N.P et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 209211

(an increase of 56.04 percentage). Deposits with Indian banks amount to Rs 67504.54 billion (equal to US $ 1.1 trillion) [8]. After the introduction of vendors (vis-à-vis core banking) these has been a lot of expansion in banking activity. The number of ATMs as an January 2014 is 96853(66.40%) among public sector banks, 47815 (32.78%) among private sector banks and 1190 (0.82%) among foreign banks. Total credit and debit card transactions in public sector banks was Rs: 1262444.816 million of which credit cards transaction was Rs: 18480.446 (1.46%) million and debit card transaction was Rs: 1243964.37 (98.54%) million. Total credit and debit card transaction in private sector banks was Rs: 608011.59 million of which credit cards transaction was Rs: 72538.18 (11.93%) million and debit card transactions was Rs: 535473.41 (88.07%) million. Total credit and debit card transaction in foreign banks was Rs: 1950421.71 million of which credit cards transaction was Rs: 143126.07 (7.34%) million and debit card transactions was Rs: 1807295.64 (92.66%) million [9]. More than 95 percent of public sector banks have been fully computerized. It has started with installation of simple computers and total branch automation has been done now. Satellite banking has been developed to provide greater connectivity between bank branches in rural and hilly areas. In the past three four years phone and mobile banking have been developed. Mobile banking has the potential to become a mass banking channel. The Electronic Clearing House (ECS) was introduced in RBI in 1995 and it operates and a principle of ‘Single debit multiple credits (like payment of salary, dividend, and pension) and ‘Single - credit multiple debit’ (like collection of electricity bill, telephone bill and property tax) Now most of the commercial banks have developed systematically important payment systems (SIPS) consisting of the Interbank Clearing System, the High Value Clearing System, the Equities Clearing and Settlement systems of the Stock Exchange, the MICR Clearing System, the Government Securities Clearing system, the Foreign Exchange Clearing Systems, and the Real Time Gross Settlement System. Some of the major vendors for the banks and their products are given below: I-flex Solution (Oracle Financial Services Software limited): Flexcube core banking solution, retail, corporate, internet banking, investor servicing and asset management, other offerings include flexcube lending suite, flexcube for Islamic banking, private banking, Reveleus–risk management solutions, Mantas–risk and compliance solutions. Infosys: Finacle–core banking solutions, e- banking, CRM, treasury, cash management, wealth management, Islamic banking. TCS- BaNCS: Suit of solutions covering banking, capital market and insurance firms. Nucleus software: Finnone–comprehensive suit of software for retail banking application, cash@will–cash management, TRADe facto–trade finance, BankOnet–internet banking, power card–credit cards, FMS–fraud management system [10]. V. Conclusion After the entry of vendor into the banking sector, there has been improvement in the bank services, and the banks have become more customers friendly. Services of bank vendors in providing services like net banking, ATM, mobile banking have resulted in less visits by customers and has given the comfort of transacting banking business from the comfort of one’s home. Personal banking services have also reduced time delay in banking operations. Certain deficiencies do arise because in western countries, credit rating for individual customers is system generated and so the number of credit cards is more than debit cards (as in the case of India). Bank administration becomes more systematic and scientific with vendors and core banking, and with bigger names involved as bank vendors, the smaller defects as exist in Indian banking industry are set to disappear in the near future. VI.

References

[1] www.accenture.com [2] www.misys.com [3] www.csc.com/in [4] www.fisglobal .com/APAC/India [5] www.celent.com [6] www.infosys.com [7] www.tcs.com [8] www.rbi.org.in [9] banking statistics, rbi report (2013) [10] www.dnb.co.in /BFSISector in India/BankC6.asp

Page 211

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

A Stylistic Analysis of Dickens’ “No. 1 Branch Line: The Signalman” Dr. Sheelu Singh Bhatia Assistant Professor, Jazan University Kingdom of Saudi Arabia No. 1 Branch Line: The Signalman presents the struggling life of London people. This story looks like an episode of a drama, as this story begins with a dialogue, 'Hallona! Below there!' This dialogue is used many times in the story. This dialogue is very important in this story because the signalman heard this dialogue many times, he was very attentive and all his concentration went to this voice, when he performed his duty and a single mistake in his work, result any accident. He lives in a hilly area as Dickens tells us that he found a rough zigzag, descending path notched out, which he followed. The cutting was extremely deep, and unusually precipitate. It was made through a clammy stone; that became oozier and wetter as I went down. For these reasons, he found the way long enough to give time to recall a singular air of reluctance or compulsion with which he had pointed out the path. He lived in a very slippery area; he was a dark sallow man, with a dark beard and rather heavy eye brows. His post was in a solitary and dismal place, and on the other side, a dripping wet wall of jagged stone, excluding all view but a strip of sky Dickens himself writes about the dirty place that: "... the perspective one way only crooked prolongation of this great dungeon; the shorter perspective in the other direction terminating in a gloomy red light, and the gloomier entrance to a black tunnel, in whose massive architecture there was a barbarous, depressing and forbidding air. So light sunlight found its way to this spot, that it had an earthly, dead smell; and so much cold wind rushed through it, that it struck chill to me, as if I had left the natural world". This displays the living place of the signalman that he lives in a dark slummy, lonely area outside the natural world. As Dickens's age has been considered a time of ugliness, 'there was ugly religion, ugly law, ugly relation between the rich and the poor, ugly clothes, and ugly furniture'. And Dickens also put his hero in very ugly place. He himself was a writer of lower middle class and never lost his sympathy for the poor and he presents the life of the signalman in that slummy area. Dickens said that this was a spirit, not a man. He responses with readiness and in well-chosen words, which shows his exactness and watchfulness. His work is to change that signal, to trim those lights, and to turn the iron handle and then. He tried a little algebra and gave his answers in low voice. Dickens tells us about his work and his house, minutely that: "He took me into his box, where there was a fire, a desk for an official book in which he had to make certain entries, a telegraphic instrument with its dial, face and needles and the little bell of which he had spoken". Dickens presents the struggling life of a dutiful signalman. Dickens emphasis upon the story, not the hero, only one hero completes the story by telling his dangers to the writer. He lives outside the natural world and a spectra disturbs him and nobody helps him during the need of hour. At last he was cut down by an engine because of coincidence of the two voice he was confused with the voice of engine with the voice of spectra, he finds himself unable to identify the warning of the engine driver. The story ends with tragic death of the signalman. The writer writes in the last. "He was cut down by an engine, Sir. No man in England knew his work better. He had struck the light, and had the lamp in his hand. As the engine came out of the tunnel, his back was towards her, and she cut him down". As the story begins with a dialogue, shows dickens's different ways of introducing the story. The dialogues and coincidence are very important in this story. The plot of this story is irregular, loose and incoherent very small description is given about the past life of the hero. The small incidents are joined to complete the story, every events has its own importance and gives the complete meaning to the story. As David Cecil Says,

Page 212

Sheelu Singh Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 212214

"Dicens may not construct the story well but he tells it admirably." Dickens was more interested in man than manner. His interest was in character rather than incident. In his work, the character is main thing and the plot is subordinate to character. Though Dickens is not a master of plot construction, yet as a narrator of his tales he is admirable. When the first sense of the story, he grips the attention of the reader and does not allow it to loosen till the end. He introduces enough of thrill and excitement, to keep up the excited interest of his readers. Dickens presents the sufferings of lower class people and miseries in No. 1 Branch Line; the Signalman. In this story he talks with the hero of the story, came to know the real dangers of a duty man in London. He tries to present the real picture of London life of contemporary society. Dickens first tell us about the first experience when he met with Tom, he writes that: "The monstrous thought came to my mind, as I perused the fixed eyes and the saturnine face that this was a spirit; not a man ... In discharging of his duties; I observed him to be a remarkably exact and vigilant, breaking off his discourse at a syllable, and remaining silent until what he had to do was done ..." Dickens presents the tragic end of a dutiful person, who loses his life on their duty and never care about dangers. A spectra comes again and again to disturb him because his duty is near a dark tunnel. He gives signal to the train and lives outside the natural world. One day he finds himself unable to identify the warning of engine driver because he thinks that this is the voice of spectra and he ignore it and this is the reason, he meets a tragic end, cut by an engine. Dickens himself writes that: "I cannot describe the thrill that seized upon me, when, close at the mouth of the tunnel, I saw the appearance of a man, with his left sleeve across his eyes, passionately waving his right arm. The nameless horror that oppressed me passed in a moment, for I saw that this appearance of a man was indeed to whom he seemed to be rehearsing the gesture he made." Dicken's Signalman, Tom met with a tragic end lost his life on duty. He lived in a tunnel, outside the natural world. Dickens himself describes his native place that: "His post was in a solitary and dismal place as ever I saw. One other side, a dripping wet wall of jagged stone, excluding all view but a strip of sky; the perspective one way only crooked prolongation of this great dungeon; the shorter perspective in the other direction terminating in a gloomy red light, and the gloomier entrance to a black tunnel, in whose massive architecture there was a barbarous, depressing and forbidding air. So light sunlight found its way to this spot, that is had an earthly, dead smell; and so much cold wind rushed through it, that it struck chill to me, as if I had left the natural world." Dickens tried to show his critical condition at his post, in a very slippery or damp area near a tunnel. He struggles throughout the life and never tries to escape from the reality or the dangers of life and face every danger but his life presents the picture of a poor person, nobody helps him in the hour of need. "His pain of mind was most pitiable to see. It was the mental torture of a conscientious man, oppressed beyond endurance by an unintelligible responsibility involving life." He performs his duty faithfully and never complaints to anybody. A spectra disturbs him many times. This story shows his struggling life and at last, he meets a tragic end. He was cut down by an engine driver because he finds himself unable to identify the warning of engine driver. "He was cut down by an engine, Sir. No man in England knew his work better. He had struck the light, and had the lamp in his hand. As the engine came out of the tunnel, his back was towards her, and she cut him down." Dickens used very short dialogues in his story and when we go through the story, we feel like talking on telephone, one is asking the question and other is giving response. There is repetition of dialogue. For example: "Hallona! Below there!" "Look out! Look out!" "Hallona! Below there! Look out! Look out! What's wrong? What has happened, where? And at other place he says, "That mistake?" "No. That someone else". "Who is it?"

Page 213

Sheelu Singh Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 212214

"I don't know". "Like me?" Dickens used very short sentences in his story and here is a logical connection between every paragraph. The story runs smoothly, language is very simple and compelled the reader to complete the story in one sitting. Dickens uses his best device, coincidence in this story and makes the story tragic. The tragic end of the Signalman, creates the feeling of pathos in our heart, and compels us to think over this point in order to improve the condition of poor people at work. It makes us realize the worse condition of the poor people and nobody gives him reward for this. Really it is a very pathetic story. References Bonheim Helmut, “The Principle of Cyclicity in Dickens’s ‘The Signalman’”, in Anglia, 106: 3/4, 1988. Caporaletti Silvana, “Metamorfosi di un testo narrativo: ‘The Signalman’ di Charles Dickens”, in Strumenti Critici, XII, 1, Jan. 1997. Clive et al. (eds.), Nineteenth Century Suspense, MacMillan, London 1988. Day Gary, “Figuring out the ‘Signalman’: Dickens and the Ghost Story”, Beeom. Greenman David J., “Dickens’s ultimate achievements in the Ghost Story: ‘To be Taken with a Grain of Salt’ and ‘The Signalman’”, in The Dickensian, no. 417, vol. 85, 1, Spring, 1989. Justin Henry. “The Signalman’s Signal-man”, Journal of the Short Story in English, no. 7, Autumn 1986. Mengel Ewald, “Structure and Meaning in Dickens’s ‘The Signalman’”, in Studies in Short Fiction, 20:4, 1983. PR Lewis, Disaster on the Dee: Robert Stephenson's Nemesis of 1847, Tempus Publishing (2007) ISBN 978-0-7524-4266-2.

Page 214

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Imperatives and impediments of Inclusive Education and scheduled tribes in India on the era of transnational education Dr. HaseenaV.A Assistant Professor, Post Graduate Department of Economics M.E.S Asmabi CollegeP.Vemaballur, Kodungallur, Kerala, India. Abstract: The tribal population in India, an estimated 87 million, is marked by intense diversity in precolonial times, nomadic communities sustained themselves through livelihood options such as cattle rearing, trade, crafts, carrying items for barter etc. The adivasis of India repeatedly rebelled against the British in the Northeast, Bengal, Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Gujarat and Andhra Pradesh. Adivasi rebellion in hills and forest was concurrent with education of the rest of India (Devy, 2008). Branded as “criminals” during the long period of British rule, the land possessed by the “criminal tribes” was alienated. At the time of independence, India started to view the adivasis as primitive, and thus out of step with history. Key words: Inclusive Education, scheduled tribes , transnational education I. Introduction Traditionally referred to as Adivasis, tribes, or tribals, scheduled tribes (STs) constitute about 9% of India’s population. Despite diversity in their community history, languages, production practices, and relationships with the non-tribal world, approximately 87 million Indians fall under the adivasi population, of which nomadic and denotified communities1 (DNTs), are at a projected 60 million. Nine States – Andhra Pradesh, Chattisgarh, Gujarat, Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Orissa, Rajasthan, and West Bengal – together account for more than four-fifths of the total tribal population in India. Each of the 573 scheduled tribes has their own language, and differs from the one mostly spoken in the State where they reside. Tribals are not a homogenous group. Different tribes, even if living in the same village, maintain exclusive identities. Socialization is generally endogamous and they identify more with people belonging to their tribe rather than to those living in the same village or area. Education has recently witnessed a rapid transformation, particularly in the areas of access, pedagogic reform and community participation in tribal areas. Emphasis has been on improving access to primary education through schemes of non-formal education (NFE), and attempts to improve quality via training, using local teachers, adapting curriculum and providing locally relevant teaching-learning materials to tribal students. II. Transnational education Education as a means of advancement of capacity, well-being and opportunity is uncontested, and more so among communities on the periphery. Marked improvements in access and to some extent in quality of primary education in tribal areas have occurred, and stem from government and non-government initiatives. However, the number of out-of-school children continues to be several millions, mainly due to a lack of interest and parental motivation, inability to understand the medium of instruction (i.e. state language), teacher absenteeism and attitude, opportunity cost of time spent in school (particularly for girls), large seasonal migration etc. Low literacy rates in tribal communities continue to indicate a need for overarching support that tackles issues from health to attitudes of non-tribal population. Therefore, Transnational Education implies crossing the borders of national higher education systems; it usually falls within the category of Non-official Higher Education, which in its turn is defined as "all forms of higher education activities operating in parallel to and outside the official higher education system of the host country". This means that Non-official Education operates only outside the official context in the host country, and that TNE may operate both in and outside such a context. The dynamics of internationalization are changing. Many of the students that traditionally would have traveled overseas to study for an international qualification are now pursuing foreign degrees in their home, or neighboring, countries at local institutions through an array of collaborative arrangements with degree-awarding institutions from major education-exporting countries. Students in this segment of the international education market, referred to as transnational education (TNE), study for foreign qualifications in any manner of ways. The most commonly understood delivery method is through the international branch campus, but these foreign

Page 215

HaseenaV.A, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 215-217

outposts are responsible for just a tiny fraction of the degrees being delivered by institutions across borders. More common are in-country partner arrangements that might include the franchising, twinning or validating of degree programs to teaching institutions and other organizations by awarding institutions in countries like Australia and Great Britain. The wide array of transnational delivery options is oftentimes confusing, while issues related to quality control, assessment and student learning outcomes can be opaque. For credential evaluators, this can present problems and a range of questions related to document verification and institutional recognition. In this article, we take a look at the scale of the transnational education market, offer definitions of some of the main delivery methods, and then explore some of the issues that arise for credential evaluators when handling documents from these programs. Fundamental changes in how society thinks are essential to enable the marginalized to engage with the mainstream, and thereby improve their survival (and revival) chances after a disaster. In societies where prejudice and bias run deep and there is little public debate on key issues, the need for a profound shift in attitude is critical. To education, a host of programs and measures have been initiated since India’s Independence. With education viewed as a crucial input for total development of tribal communities, elementary education has been made a priority area in the tribal sub-plans since the 5th Five Year Plan (1974-79). As of March 2001, there were 16 million ST children out of a total child population of about 193 million in the age group of 6-14 years in the country. These are the situation happening in one part of the country. The increased publicity of transnational education and its wide acceptability by the society is highly terminable. But in the same country there is increased degree of marginalization of the Scheduled tribe community. The marginalized, by definition and logic and irrespective of faith, form or culture are smaller in number than the dominant (or mainstream) social groups. Indian society is marked by age-old tensions between marginalized groups, castes, tribes, and multiple social layers stemming from a bowl of linguistic, racial and religious groups. People displaced by factors such as natural disasters, manmade political events (e.g. wars), economic changes, inconsistency in patterns of livelihood support, have continuously added to swelling numbers of these marginalized communities. Low literacy rates continue to indicate a need for more holistic support, from health to non-tribal attitudes, thus allowing for delivery of highquality education. Despite the education initiatives, there is disparity among the states in terms of tribal literacy rates ranging from 82% in Mizoram to 17% in Andhra Pradesh. The ST literacy rate continues to be below the national average of 29.6%, with literacy rates among tribal communities (in particular women) tending to be the lowest. There exist areas in the tribal-dominated districts across India that remains largely unserved by primary education facilities. Tribal children tend to inhabit forests and hard-to-reach areas where dwellings are spread and access to good quality education is more limited. Low enrolment coupled with soaring drop-out rates in primary schools exacerbates the problem, which has its origin in a gamut of inter-related cultural and socio-economic variables. Adivasis are associated with a certain stigma and behavior, which can be partially tackled through a change in mindset among non-tribals Children are taught by teachers who may or may not be from the tribal community. The presence of tribal teachers, especially from the same community, has shown and improved school participation of tribal children, as these teachers understand and respect the culture with greater sensitivity. Assuming that tribal teachers are a more natural fit, many states have appointed community teachers or nearby teachers. However, cases have indicated that special training – on both course materials as well as appropriate conduct with tribal students has to be undertaken – even if the teacher has tribal origins. Teacher absenteeism continues to be a major issue in tribal areas due to long commutes and low motivation levels. Education as a means of advancement of capacity, well-being and opportunity is uncontested, and more so among communities on the periphery. Marked improvements in access and to some extent in quality of primary education in tribal areas have occurred, and stem from government and non-government initiatives. However, the number of out-of-school children continues to be several millions, mainly due to a lack of interest and parental motivation, inability to understand the medium of instruction (i.e. state language), teacher absenteeism and attitude, opportunity cost of time spent in school (particularly for girls), large seasonal migration etc. Low literacy rates in tribal communities continue to indicate a need for overarching support that tackles issues from health to attitudes of non-tribal populations. Recognizing that the education system is currently designed for the dominant group, there needs to be investment in creating support mechanisms that supplement the assimilation of tribal children into the formal education system. This balancing act between preserving tribal cultural identity and mainstreaming for economic prosperity can be better achieved through creating stronger community cultural wealth by developing a tribal child as an individual. Educational content must encompass building life skills that can help integration with the mainstream system. Social exclusion, a term that has recently claimed its territory in development parlances, can be looked at as a way of thinking flexible enough to meaningfully accommodate the socio-economic and demographic dimensions in poverty discussions without losing the scientific rigour of such discussions. Social exclusion is

Page 216

HaseenaV.A, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 215-217

not the same as deprivation though elements/aspects of deprivation can be helpful in operationalising social exclusion from a research perspective. While absolute measures of deprivation (e.g. poverty line, access to drinking water etc) are meaningful, social exclusion and its measures achieve meaning only when presented on a relative context (e.g. no of voting rights for females, a particular caste cannot take up a particular occupation, political participation of gays etc.). As deprivations like these over time can negatively affect the living standards of such persons/sections and since such deprivations are based on socio-demographic considerations, in order to formulate effective policies for overall development, the underlying aspects of such deprivation must also be discussed. III. Education and modern society Education in the modern society assumes roles ranging from a basic ingredient for its successful functioning to a mechanism capable of weaving the multitude of distinctly different threads that can create a better tomorrow. Considering the importance of education in nation building and economic development, along with governments around the world, the central and state governments in India have been allocating considerable share of their resources in the field of education. However, upon closer examination we can find that the educational development in India is lopsided with substantial inter-regional differences and prominent disparities between communities/sections of the society where some enjoy a disproportionate advantage over the others. Kerala, a state known for its high human development and near universal literacy, tops the Indian states in educational attainment in the primary and secondary levels. However, the educational performance of the state assumes a very different stature, quite a deplorable one, when one looks at its dispersion and outliers instead of the averages. IV. Conclusion Though governmental policies and efforts from the government and NGOs have helped in addressing to a great extent, if not completely eliminating, the inter-generational differences in attaining literacy as well as primary and secondary education, the achievements in professional and higher education sectors in the state is painted with dull colors. Upon examining the socio-demographic fabric it can be understood that disparities at the community, gender and regional levels plague the higher and professional education sector in Kerala. Many factors could be identified, most of which are usually eschewed terming them as elusive to policy interventions, for the lag in higher secondary and professional education sectors in Kerala vis-à-vis the primary and secondary education sectors. We can observe that academic inquiries about these factors, traditionally, have been defined in the poverty-development-policy framework. While such studies have greatly increased the understanding of the area, the inferences derived from these are limited owing to the reach of the indicators used in the studies. Moreover it may also be pointed out that these studies tend to discount the dynamic nature of the contexts (like tribal communities, socio economically backward classes, rural areas etc) when researching on issues like effectiveness of educational policies. Good teachers prefer to live in urban/semi urban centers and therefore, need to commute for 4-5 hours per day to reach tribal area schools. Lack of electricity and water results in poor school infrastructure causing dismal sanitary conditions and low ventilation. Long lead times for delivery of teaching materials imply that textbooks and training materials arrive at the schools after the training program, or not at all. Despite the education initiatives, there is disparity among the states in terms of tribal literacy rates ranging from 82% in Mizoram to 17% in Andhra Pradesh. The ST literacy rate continues to be below the national average of 29.6%, with literacy rates among tribal communities (in particular women) tending to be the lowest. References Ayyappan, A. (1948). Report on the Socio-Economic conditions of the tribals, Aboriginal tribes of the province of Madras, ‘Madras superintendent, Government printing press. Das Gupata, N.K. (1960). Tribal language and education, Linguistic features of the tribes, Himalaya publishers, New Delhi. Chathopadhyaya and Kamal Dev. (1978). cultural disparities in tribal life, Tribalism India,Vikas publishing House, Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi. Anon, P. (1982). Mainstream culture and impact of education on tribals, Forest Environment and Tribal Economy, Concept publishers, New Delhi. Alaxander, K.C, Prasad R.R and Jahagirdar, M.P. (1984). Tribal Education and Tribal Development”, Tribal culture in India. Rawat publications, New Delhi. Budhadeb chaudhari. (1987).Contemporary Society in Tribal Studies, Tribals in Meghalaya, Concept publishing company. Christoph Von Haimendorf. (1990). The problems of Tribal education, Tribes of India, the struggle for survival, Oxford University Press, Walton street, Oxford OX26DP.

Page 217

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Effectiveness of Anganwadi Centres in Punjab in combating Malnutrition among Children Dr. Manisha Bhatia1 Assistant Professor (Home Science) Krishi Vigyan Kendra, Punjab Agricultural University VPO Langroya, Shaheed Bhagat Singh Nagar, District (Nawanshshr) Punjab INDIA Abstract: India has been ranked at 67th position with 31.7 score on the Global Hunger Index 2010 out of 84 countries. India is placed above Bangladesh and below Pakistan and China. These figures portray a dismal picture of the country more so when viewed in the light of the fact that India is world’s largest producer of milk and edible oils and second largest producer of wheat and sugar. Among all states, Punjab is found to be the best performing state on Nutrition Security in India State Hunger Index 2008. But the situation on count of nutritional status among children is quite worrisome in the State especially the children below 5 years of age. ICDS today represents one of the world’s largest programme to combat malnutrition through its network of anganwadi centres. The present paper aims to discuss how far these anganwadi centres have been effective in the combating malnutrition among children in state of Punjab through empirical evidences and facts? The data on the various aspects of ICDS implementation and various nutrition indicators collected from Department of Women and Child Development, Department of Planning, Department of Health and Family Welfare, Government of Punjab, Ministry of Women and Child Development is brought into service. Data from various surveys such as National Family Health Survey (NFHS), District Level Household Survey (DLHS), National Nutrition Monitoring Bureau (NNMB) and National Sample survey Organisation (NSSO) is also analysed Keywords: Anganwadi centres, ICDS, Nutritional status, Children I. Introduction Recognising the eradication of extreme poverty and hunger through providing food and good nutrition in the first Millennium Development Goal itself tells the importance of bringing the issue of global and national hunger in the fore in policy debates, especially in developing countries. India has been ranked at 67 th position with 31.7 score on the Global Hunger Index 2010 out of 84 countries. India is placed above Bangladesh and below Pakistan and China. These figures portray a dismal picture of the country more so when viewed in the light of the fact that India is world’s largest producer of milk and edible oils and second largest producer of wheat and sugar. On the lines of Global Hunger Index India State Index is calculated for 17 major states in the country. India State Hunger Index is based on the same underlying variables as the Global Hunger Index- the proportion of population that does not consume adequate calories, proportion of underweight children under 5 years of age and mortality rate among children under five years. India State Hunger Index 2008 scores range from 13.6 for Punjab to 30.9 for Madhya Pradesh. Not even a single state is comfortably placed in low or moderate hunger category with four states-Punjab, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh and Assam are placed in serious category and all other states in alarming category. Among all states, Punjab is found to be the best performing state on Nutrition Security (Table 1). But the situation on count of nutritional status among children is quite worrisome in the State especially the children below 5 years of age. ICDS today represents one of the world’s largest programme to combat malnutrition. The main aim is reduction in child mortality and achievement of optimal physical, mental and psycho-social development of India’s children. For improvement of nutritional and health status of children in the age group of 0-6 years supplementary nutrition is provided to children below 6 years of age and to nursing and expectant mothers thought a network of anganwadi centres. The present paper aims to discuss how far these anganwadi centres have been effective in the combating malnutrition among children in state of Punjab through empirical evidences and facts?

Page 218

Manisha Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 218-223

Table 1: India State Hunger Index and its Underlying Components State

Punjab Kerala Andhra Pradesh Assam Haryana Tamil Nadu Rajasthan West Bengal Uttar Pradesh Maharashtra Karnataka Orissa Gujarat Chattisgarh Bihar Jharkhand Madhya Pradesh India

Prevalence of calorie under nourishment (%) 11.1 28.6 19.6 14.6 15.1 29.1 14.0 18.5 14.5 27.0 28.1 21.45 23.3 23.3 17.3 19.6 23.4 20.0

Proportion of underweight among children <5 years (%) 24.6 22.7 32.7 36.4 39.7 30.0 40.4 38.5 42.3 36.7 37.6 40.9 44.7 47.6 56.1 57.1 59.8 42.5

Under five mortality rate (deaths per hundred) 5.2 1.6 6.3 8.5 5.2 3.5 8.5 5.9 9.6 4.7 5.5 9.1 6.1 9.0 8.5 9.3 9.4 7.4

India State Hunger Index Score 13.63 17.63 19.53 19.83 20.00 20.87 20.97 20.97 22.13 22.80 23.73 23.80 24.70 26.63 27.30 28.67 30.87 23.30

India State Hunger Index Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Source: India State Hunger Index Comparisons of Hunger Across States Note: The State Hunger Index represents the index calculated using a calorie undernourishment cutoff of 1,632 kcals per person per day to aloe for comparison of the India State Hunger Index with the Global Hunger Index 2008. The ISHI score for India using this cutoff is 23.3 and corresponds more closely with the GHI 2007 score for India of 23.7 than any other calorie cutoff.

II. Methodology To reach to the conclusion the author will try to highlight the nutritional status of the children of Punjab. The paper will examine the implementation status of ICDS to break the vicious cycle of malnutrition in the state of Punjab. This is under the backdrop that if these goals are achieved in the best performing State than only one could except to achieve the Millennium Development Goals targeted to be achieved by 2015. The data on the various aspects of ICDS implementation both physical and financial progress and various nutrition indicators collected from Department of Women and Child Development, Department of Planning, Department of Health and Family Welfare, Government of Punjab, Ministry of Women and Child Development will be brought into service. Data from various surveys such as National Family Health Survey (NFHS), District Level Household Survey (DLHS), National Nutrition Monitoring Bureau (NNMB) and National Sample survey Organisation (NSSO) will also be analysed. From a food deficit state Punjab has become a food surplus state. But increased food production does not ensure nutrition for all. Right kind and amount of food intake is important to determine the nutritional status of an individual. So let us take a view of the nutritional status of children in Punjab. III. Research Findings and Discussion Health of an individual is directly influenced by the nutrient intake. Healthy children grow up into healthy adults who are strong, more productive and an asset for the nation. The foundation for healthy adults is laid down during childhood. So the intake of proper nutrition in the childhood is an important factor determining the future health and productivity of a nation. Three standard indices of physical growth describe undernutrition levels among children. These include heightfor-age (stunting), weight-for-height (wasting) and weight-for-age (underweight). As per NFHS-3, 35 per cent of the children under 5 years of age in Punjab are stunted which is indicative of their undernourishment for some time (Table 2). Almost one in ten are wasted which is resultant of inadequate recent food intake or recent illness. One-fourth of the children in the State are underweight which takes into account both chronic and acute undernutrition. The number of stunted children is almost double in case of illiterate mothers in Punjab when compared with mothers who had formal education. Thus the impact of education on the nutritional status of children in terms of their failure to reach linear growth is clearly indicative. Table 2 Nutritional Status of Children in Punjab, 1992-2006 Stunted Wasted 38.0 21.1 15.2 8.1 34.7 10.2

NFHS-1 (1992.93) NFHS-2 (1998-99) NFHS-3 (2005-06) Residence Urban Rural Education Illiterate Below middle Below matric Martic and above Source: IIPS, Mumbai 2005-06

Underweight 46.0 24.7 23.6

35.1 37.5

9.2 9.2

21.4 26.8

52.4 50.0 34.1 23.6

13.1 3.1 10.1 5.4

38.4 40.7 22.9 12.8

Page 219

Manisha Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 218-223

Similarly children of illiterate mothers in Punjab are three times more prone to be thin as compared to children of mothers having education of matric and above. The prevalence of underweight children is more than double in case of children of illiterate mothers as compared to the children of mothers having formal education of matric and above. At district levels 14 districts of Punjab had about 30 to 50 per cent underweight children (Table 3). Southern parts of the State had shown higher prevalence of underweight children, their proportion was particularly high in Muktsar district (DLHS-II, 2006). Districts Amritsar Bathinda Faridkot Ftehgarh Sahib Firozpur Gurdasur Hoshiarpur Jalandhar Kapurthala Ludhiana Mansa Moga Muktsar Nawanshahr Patiala Rupnagar Sangrur Punjab Source: IIPS, Mumbai 2006

Table 3 Underweight children in Punjab, 2006 Weight-for-age -3SD 16.8 17.4 10.4 13.6 16.6 15.2 9.5 9.9 11.5 13.5 19.0 14.0 24.2 9.3 12.2 8.0 12.4 13.9

-2SD 45.6 42.9 35.9 33.6 46.1 39.8 41.3 29.8 42.8 38.4 40.5 37.0 51.4 29.5 38.1 37.4 38.2 40.0

Government of India targeted to reduce the prevalence of undernutrition in children by 50 per cent by 2012. Strategies for achievement of target include implementation of Supplementary Nutrition Programme under ICDS. Launched on 2nd October 1975, ICDS today represents one of the world’s largest programme to combat malnutrition. The main aim is reduction in child mortality and achievement of optimal physical, mental and psycho-social development of India’s children. For improvement of nutritional and health status of children in the age group of 0-6 years supplementary nutrition is provided to children below 6 years of age and to nursing and expectant mothers. ICDS in Punjab was launched in 1975 in Nurpur Bedi block of Fatehgarh Sahib district. In 1996 the coverage of ICDS services was extended to all the blocks. During 2007-08 in Punjab 20,169 AWCs and 148 projects were operational. With the aim to universalise ICDS by providing anganwadi in every settlement and ensuring full coverage for all children, six additional ICDS projects and 6487 AWCs were sanctioned by Government of India. Thus in 2008-09, a total of 26,656 AWCs and 154 ICDS projects (Table 4) were sanctioned in the State. Table 4 Number of AWCs Operational in Punjab, 2004-09 Year Number of AWCS Number of ICDS Projects 2004-05 14730 142 2005-06 14730 142 2006-07 17421 142 2007-08 20169 148 2008-09 20169 148 2009-10 26646 148 Source: Ministry of Women and Child Development, Government of Punjab

Of the sanctioned anganwadi centres 20,169 were operational in Punjab till September 2009. Thus the State was successful in operationalising 76 per cent of the sanctioned anganwadi centers by September 2009. Within a span of three months the number of operational anganwadi centres raised to 26,656. The State was successful in operationalising 99 per cent of the sanctioned AWCs till December 2009. As per the Directorate, Social Security and Women and Child Development, Punjab, the proposal for AWC/min-AWCs on demand is under consideration. Two NGOs namely Child Welfare Council and Punjab State Advisory Board run 8 ICDS Projects under ICDS in Punjab. The performance of AWCs run by the NGOs in comparison with those run by the State in an interesting exercise and needs to be studied in details for which a field based study may be conducted on a representative sample for fair judgement of ground realities. District wise data points out that Jalandhar and Tarn Taran districts lead in operationalising the sanctioned anganwadi centres. On the other hand Sangrur, Barnala, Bathinda and Gurdaspur districts lagged behind on this aspect (with operationalising only 70 per cent of the sanctioned anganwadi centres).

Page 220

Manisha Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 218-223

In Punjab, the Anganwadi centres covered a population of 1,99,73,171 of which 20,99823 are children below 72 months (Table 5). Among them 54 per cent constituted boys. A total of 16,070 disabled children were identified by these Anganwadi centres. Of the population covered 4 per cent are adolescent girls (11-18 years) while 2 per cent pregnant women and lactating mothers. In 21,505 centres, 257 mothers at the risk and 604 children in the age group of 0-6 years at risk are also covered (Table 6). Under this Scheme, approximately 70 per cent scheduled caste beneficiaries are covered. Table 5 Population Coverage of Anganwadi Centres in Punjab, 2009 Age Group (in months) Children covered Boys Girls 0-6 1,01,341 87,113 6-12 1,10,807 95,666 12-36 3,62,089 3,15,611 36-60 3,66,334 3,16,228 60-72 1,84,178 1,60,456 Total 11,27,749 9,75,074 Source: Department of Planning, Government of Punjab Table 6 Population Coverage of Anganwadi Centres in Punjab, 2009 Population Covered Number 20,99,823 Children (0-72 months) 8,56,373 Adolescent Girls (11-18 years) 1,96,266 Pregnant Women 1,87,690 Lactating mothers 94,12,303 Other Male 72.20,716 Other Females 257 Mothers at risk 604 Children at risk (0-6 years) 16,070 Children with disabilities (0-6 years) 1,99,73,171 Total Source: Department of Planning, Government of Punjab

The expenditure of ICDS is met mainly from two sources. Funds provided by the Centre under ICDS (General) are utilised to meet the expenses on account of expenditure on salaries and honorarium for ICDS staff, training, basic medical equipment, play school, learning kits etc. Funds made available by the State government are utilised to provide supplementary nutrition to beneficiaries. For the Eleventh Five Year plan (2007-12) an amount of Rs.30,000 lakh is allocated under Supplementary Nutrition Programme (SNP). From 2005-06 onwards Government of India decided to reimburse 50 per cent of the actual expenditure incurred on supplementary nutrition by the State. The cost of supplementary nutrition varies depending upon recipes and prevailing prices. However, Central Government keeps on issuing the guidelines on cost norms from time to time. Supplementary nutrition rates have been revised with effect from October 2009. The latest norms revised include Rs.4 for children up to 6 years of age, Rs.5 for pregnant and lactating women and Rs. 6 for severely malnourished children (Table 7). The State was able to utilise 82 per cent of the allocated funds. Supplementary nutrition is provided to the children below 6 years of age and to nursing and expecting mothers from low income group families for 300 days in a year. Special attention is paid to the delivery of supplementary nutrition to severely malnourished children below 3 years of age. Table 7 Norms of Supplementary Nutrition Programme, Punjab Beneficiaries Calories (Kcal) Proteins (Grams) Children under 6 years 500 12 to 15 Malnourished children upto 6 years 800 20 to 25 Pregnant and lactating mothers 600 18 to 20 Source: Directorate, Department of Women and Child Development, Punjab Table 8 Nutritive Value of Food Items provided to the Beneficiaries under SNP in Punjab Items Quantity (Grams) Calories (Kcal) Proteins (grams) 3 to 6 years children Panjiri 49 291.00 6.18 Kheer 74 267.73 6.10 Dalia 72 297.48 8.94 Halwa 37 146.02 2.42 Milk 5 17.8 1.09 Pregnant Women and Lactating Mothers Panjiri 84 365.00 7.74 Kheer 125 484.69 12.65 Dalia 72 297.48 8.94 Source: Directorate, Department of Women and Child Development, Punjab

Page 221

Manisha Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 218-223

At present two types of supplementary nutrition is being provided to the beneficiaries in the state. One is Take Home Ration (THR) while the other is Hot Cooked Meal (HCM). THR is made available to the beneficiaries in the form of Panjiri through various modes i.e. Self Help Groups (SHGs), local procurement by the Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) or centralised procurement at the district level. Ready to eat Panjiri is procured from MilkFed. These meals are cooked by Anganwadi Workers/Anganwadi Helper (AWW/AWH) at the AWCs under the supervision of Mothers Committees and SHGs. Panjiri, dalia and kheer is being provided to the beneficiaries twice a week on alternate days. These food items provide energy and protein. In addition, these food items contain micronutrients such as Iron, Calcium, Vitamin A, Vitamin B1, Vitamin B2 and Vitamin C (Table 8). The requirement for supplementary nutrition to beneficiaries is met by allocating food grains (wheat and rice) by the Centre government to the State government at subsidised rates. During 2008-09 a total of 9129 metric Tones of Wheat and 3073 Metric Tones of Rice were allocated. Of the allocated grains 2134.208 Metric Tones of Wheat and 1518.725 Metric Tomes of Rice was utilised. During 2009 a total of 1697 Metric Tones of Wheat and 1789 Metric Tones Rice were allocated. Till June 2009 of the allocated grains the utilisation figures were Nil for the State. To ensure the quality of food grains, committees are constituted at the district level and food grain samples are checked. The two Nutrition Resource Centres of the State placed in Ludhiana and Chandigarh also check the food samples under SNP. The issue of quality of food grains provided in the AWCs has been raised in the media from time to time. There is a need to have an in-depth study on the quality of food grains provided to AWCs. A systematic assessment of the satisfaction levels generated from a representative sample is the need of the hour. Apart from providing SNP, supplements of Iron and Folic acid are being provided to children and pregnant and lactating mothers in the form of tablets and syrup through ICDS centres. In addition to this, Vitamin A drops supplied by the Health Department are administered to the children. On the basis of health check-up, the severely malnourished women and children are referred to the hospitals by the ICDS centres. Government targeted to cover 16,56,930 beneficiaries under SNP during 2007-11 and was able to cover 81 per cent of the target (Table 8). Coverage of target was lower in case of children as compared to the women beneficiaries. Year

2005-06 2006-07 2007-08 2008-09 2009-10

Targets Women

Children

176760 209052 257922 249524 307171

486090 574893 199007 1430449 1289363

Table 8 Physical Performance of SNP in Punjab, 2005-10 Achievement Performance (Women) Total Women Children Total Achievement as (% of target) 662850 204479 552374 756853 115.7 783945 254358 864528 1118886 121.7 1656929 292609 1057230 1349839 113.4 1679973 306310 1060940 1367250 122.8 1596534 294068 1056042 1359710 95.7

Total 814617 4118819 4933436 892987 2007-09 Source: Department of Planning, Government of Punjab

3183812

4076799

109.6

Performance (Children) Achievement as (% of target) 113.6 150.4 75.6 74.2 82.6

Performance (Total) Achievement as (% of target) 114.2 142.7 81.5 81.4 85.2

77.3

82.64

For achieving the target fixed up by government to reduce malnutrition in the State by 50 per cent first step was to operationalise the anganwadi centres and maximising the coverage of beneficiaries. The State was quite successful in operationalising the centres and achieving the coverage targets for women beneficiaries by the end of 2009. But how far these efforts have resulted in reducing malnutrition among children in the State? One of the yardsticks to measure this achievement is the weight-for-age data of these beneficiary children collected through process of regular growth monitoring of every child. Based on this weight-for-age data the children are grouped into Normal, Grade I, II, II and IV categories. Children in grade I and II are moderately malnourished while those in Grade II and IV are severely malnourished. During 2007-08 about 64 per cent of the children were placed in normal grade while 35 per cent were moderately malnourished and 0.25 per cent was severely malnourished (Table 9). The proportion of children in the normal grade increased only by 0.76 per cent points while those falling in Grade I remain almost same. However a slight decline in Grade II children was seen (0.73 per cent points). Table 9 Nutritional Status of Children in Anganwadi Centres, Punjab, 2007-10 Number of Normal (per Grade I (per Grade II (per children weighed cent) cent) cent) 1914561 63.89 32.32 3.52 2007-08 2016688 64.90 31.42 3.40 2008-09 2094796 64.65 32.46 2.79 2009-10 0.76 0.14 -0.73 Change Source: Directorate, Department of Women and Child Development, Punjab Year

Grade III and IV (per cent) 0.25 0.26 0.08 -0.17

Page 222

Manisha Bhatia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 218-223

Also the proportion of severely malnourished children declined by only 0.17 per cent points. This indicated that proportion of normal children increased at a very slow pace and the decline in the proportion of children in Grade II, III and IV children is very sluggish. In this scenario the reduction in malnourished children by 2012 seems difficult to be achieved. Rigorous efforts are required to ensure the administration of supplementary nutrition to the beneficiaries. Nutrition and health education is a key element of services provided by anganwadi worker. This forms a part of behaviour change communication strategy. As a part of nutrition and health education, Nutrition Week and Breastfeeding Week are celebrated every year in the anganwadi centres across the State. To facilitate this component Nutrition Resource Centres in State at Ludhiana and Chandigarh provides training to the field functionaries regarding nutritional requirements of children and mothers. In addition they also provide print material on nutrition and monitor the food samples under SNP. The data above indicates that efforts are being made by government towards reducing malnutrition in the State by operationalising the sanctioned anganwadi centres, increasing the coverage of beneficiaries and proving nutrition and health education. This data provided a optimistic state of affairs towards reduction of malnutrition. Table 10 Utilisation of ICDS services in Punjab Percentage of children age 0-71 months in areas covered by an AWC Percentage of children who received any service from an AWC

64.9 14.1

Percentage of children who received supplementary food

13.0

Percentage of children aged 36-71 months who were weighed at an AWC

5.1

Percentage of children aged 0-59 months whose mothers received counselling from an AWC after child was weighed

16.7*

Percentage of mothers who received no services from AWC during pregnancy Percentage of mother who received supplementary food during pregnancy

91.8 7.8

Percentage of mother who received health check-ups during pregnancy

3.2

Percentage of mother who received health and nutrition education during pregnancy

3.2

Percentage of mothers who received no services from an AWC while breastfeeding Percentage of mothers who received supplementary food from an AWC while breastfeeding Percentage of mothers who received health check-ups from an AWC while breastfeeding

94.4 5.5 2.0

Percentage of mother who received health and nutrition education from an AWC while breastfeeding

2.5

Source: IIPS, Mumbai, 2006 *Based on 25-49 unweighted cases

However the performance of ICDS as indicated in NFHS-3 tells a different story. Only 13 per cent of the children under the age of 6 years received supplementary food (Table 10). Only five per cent each of the children received health check-ups and growth monitoring services at an anganwadi centre in Punjab. Among children under age six years in areas covered by an anganwadi centre, only 8 per cent had mothers who received any service from a centre during pregnancy and even less (6 per cent) had mother who received any service while breastfeeding. IV Conclusion The present study indicates that the performance of anganwadi centres in terms of operationalisation of centres, coverage of the target beneficiaries as seen in the data provided by government reports is quiet satisfactory but despite of these impressive figures these centres have not been able to bring positive change in the nutritional status of children who enrol in these centres. Infact the data from NFHS -3 indicated that the percentage of women who received no services from anganwadi centres during pregnancy and lactation is more than 90 per cent. It is high time that the implementers should ensure optimum utilisation of the services provided by these centres and benefit should reach the people who really need them. V References [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Ahmed , S.I. and M. Bhatia, “National Family Health Survey II Punjab (A Preliminary Analysis of Health and Family Welfare Indicators)”, Chandigarh, Population Research Centre, CRRID. 2007. Gupta, A. and J.E. Rhode, “Infant and Young Child undernutrition, where Lies the Solution”, Economic and Political Weekly, December 4, 2004, pp.5213-5216. International Institute for Population Sciences, “District Level Household and Facility Survey (DLHS-III)” 2007-08, Mumbai:IIPS. International Institute for Population Sciences and Macro International, “National Family Health Survey (NFHS-III) India, 2005-06”, 2008, Mumbai: IIPS. Menon, P., A. Deolalikar and A. Bhaskar, “India State Hunger Index: Comparison of Hunger Across States” 2009, Washington, D.C., Bonn and Riverside. Saxena, N.C., “Hunger, Undernutition and food Security in India,” Policy Brief Series 7, Centre dir Legislative Research and Advocacy, February 2009, New Delhi. Singh I and K Grover, “Nutritional Profile of Urban Pre-School children of Punjab”, Anthropologist, Volume 5 No.3, 2009.

Page 223

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Analysis of cost and Benefits of education â&#x20AC;&#x201C; case study of Tamil Nadu Dr Hariharan.N.P1, Siva Gurunathan.S 2 Professor of Economics, 2Research scholar, 1,2 School of Social Sciences and Languages, VIT University, Vellore-14, Tamil Nadu, INDIA

Abstract: In India, education is on the concurrent list and management of educational institutions becomes responsibility of both the union and state governments. Presence of private institutions has made education costlier and not affordable to a large number of persons. In their quest for better job opportunities, even the less affluent puts their wards in private unaided institutions. Cost of education is calculated on the fee that the student pays, while benefits are directly related to employability. Relationship between cost and benefit seems to be mismatched and details are analyzed in this paper. Keywords: Cost, benefit, stake holders, employability. I. Introduction From the last decade of the 20th century, more and more corporate educational institutions have been started in the state of Tamil Nadu (and also on many parts of India).From nursery schools to engineering colleges and private universities, more corporate players have started new institutions, and their goal, as in the case of any corporate business, is to provide what the consumer needs and maximize profits. In the field of education economy, there are innumerable stake holders, (for example the parent, student, and government) who decide what price to be charged (for education at different levels), what should be the compound product to be given to the student (like air conditioned class rooms, buses to ferry students, hostels, play grounds, amenities and ambience). In the process, education becomes a complicated compound product which involves cost and the stake holders are prepared to pay the cost depending on the benefits expected (ranging from knowledge to friends, habits, employability and brands of products). II. Cost Benefit analysis for School education In India, education is on the concurrent list of administration, and hence, the Union government and the provincial governments share responsibility of administering and funding education. In Tamil Nadu, there are 34,532 government schools, 8,455 private aided schools and 8,542 private schools which do not get any grant/ financial aid from government. Though the number of government schools constitutes 67.02% of the total number of schools in Tamil Nadu, the number of students is 4,763,000 (which is 36.71% of student population in schools in Tamil Nadu). The percentage of private aided schools is 16.41, but they are able to admit nearly 4,405,000 students (which is roughly 33.95% of student population in schools in Tamil Nadu.). Though the number of private unaided schools is much less (16.57%), they are able to admit nearly 3,807,000 (which is roughly 29.34% of student population in schools in Tamil Nadu) [1]. This shows the popularity of private unaided schools compared to the aided and government schools. In Tamil Nadu, per capita income is 10,902, as per census data of 2011. Number of persons living Below Poverty Line (BPL category) accounts for 82.63 lacs and assuming that all the children in BPL category are sent to school, because of Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA) program, the students from BPL category shall be 9.91 lacs (as per national average, children in the age group of <14 constitute 12.1% of population). Looking at income distribution in Tamil Nadu, within the Tamil Nadu median income for rural household is 22,400 and for urban house hold it is 51,200[2]. The top 5 % of the households in rural get income of 110, 633 and it is 210,000 in urban. Considering the above facts, it may be inferred that students from Above Poverty Line (APL) category choose to study at private unaided school, paying fees, rather than going to the government/government aided schools. For a family of four members, with an annual income of less than 1.1 lacs in rural area and 2.1 lacs in urban area [3], it is very difficult to send children to schools, paying fees. Family expenses like rent, food, travel, dress, medicines, family functions and religious functions take away almost the entire income of the family.(Of

Page 224

Hariharan.N.P et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 224227

the total number of children in the schools, namely 135 lacs, around 43.5 lacs children study in unaided schools). The Tamil Nadu government providing Noon Meal scheme, good number of freebees like books, note books, educational kit, uniforms (at present two sets are given)free bus passes, bi-cycles and laptops, controls the fee structure of private unaided schools. In spite of all these, the private unaided schools are able to attract huge percentage of children. Reasons could be the commercial attraction that the private schools give like Air conditioned Smart class rooms, clean campus, facilities like good labs, and non conventional subjects like, Drawing, swimming, singing, sports, games and good play grounds. In Tamilnadu, there had been complaints that the private unaided schools are charging exorbitant rates and exploiting students and stake holders. There have been frequent reports on the press and media that prospective students seeking admissions are asked to pay for construction of school buildings, lab fees, parentsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; day and school day celebrations, and were collecting money in every possible way that one can imagine. The Tamil Nadu government appointed a committee headed by Justice Thiru S.R .Singaravelu (2012-2015) to fix fees for the schools. Accordingly, on the basis of certain guide lines, the fee structures of schools have been rationalized. Government and government aided schools are providing education through free education, but the private unaided schools charge tuition fees, lab fees, library fees etc, and along with some donation. Justice Singaravelu committee had recommended for schools in urban area 18,150(for the primary school), 32, 850 (for the middle school), 22,450 (for the secondary schools) and 26, 600 (for the higher secondary schools). For the rural schools, Justice S.R. Singaravelu committee had recommended 300 for primary, 1,900 for upper primary, 400 for secondary and 1100 for higher secondary schools [4]. The private schools are able to attract students in spite of the higher cost of education. The private schools have been asked to teach the same syllabus content as in taught in government schools after the introduction of uniform secondary education (Samacheer kalvi). In spite of that, they attract students because of better ambiance and greater facilities like very good class room, water and toilet, play ground, swimming pool and computer lab. Looking at the school results (as released on 9 th May 2014) aided and government school students have done far better than the students of unaided schools. Students have been paying high cost for their education in unaided schools, apparently not reaping the benefits at an optimal level. Of the total number of the students who have appeared for plus two examinations in Tamil Nadu, 3.3 lacs were boys and 4.14 lacs were girls. Large number of students have secured 200 out of 200 in Mathematics, physics, Chemistry and Commerce [5]. They are equally divided between government, government aided and private unaided schools. Even in the corporation schools which are not preferred by the students fared well. If pass the examination and marks in plus two are considered as yardstick of benefits of education, the conclusion is that the high cost bearing students of private unaided schools have not gone any higher benefits. III. Cost Benefit Analysis for College Education In India, the federal set up in administration is more evident on higher education. There are State universities, and central universities apart from Deemed to be universities and Institutes of Excellence. The colleges and Universities are administered, regulated and controlled by various central government agencies like the University Grants Commission (UGC), All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) and Ministry of Human Resource Development (MHRD). These regulatory bodies are help to maintain the quality of the collegesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; education by sending inspection teams. The state governments also have an important role to play in the administration of higher education. The state government has the right to appoint Vice Chancellors of the State Universities, teaching and non teaching staff of government and government aided colleges and Universities. Salary for all of them is met by state exchequer. There are private unaided colleges and universities, for whom no grant is received from UGC, AICTE or the State government. The self financing institutions are expected to manage their expenses from their own funds. The State government does not interfere in the appointment of staff of the unaided institutions, but there are general guide lines which all institutions are to follow. As per data available in 2013, in Tamil Nadu, there are 62 government Arts and Sciences Colleges, 133 government-aided Arts and Sciences Colleges and 438 unaided private Arts and Sciences Colleges. Among the total number of Arts colleges in Tamil Nadu, 155,898 are enrolled in government colleges, 355,953 students are enrolled in government aided colleges and 372,664 are enrolled in unaided institutions. Per college enrollment of students in government institutions work out to 2,514, for government aided institutions it is 2,676 and for unaided private institutions, the ratio is 850[6]. In Tamil Nadu, the government and government aided Arts and Science colleges are providing the free education for the students (there is no fee for the students) under EVR Nagammai Scheme. And the private unaided Arts and Science colleges are receiving the fee from the students on the basis of the course (G.O.Ms.No.187) [7]. The Private unaided Arts and Science College taught same syllabus of the course but cost

Page 225

Hariharan.N.P et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 224227

of the education is based on demand for seats in colleges, which varies from 2000/-for B.A. courses to 5,000 for B. Sc and 9000 for B.Com. The government and government aided colleges charge lower fees for their courses (in government institutions, in many cases, no fee is charged) and they are more popular and are able to attract more number of students. On the other hand, the unaided arts and science colleges attract much less number of students, than the government and aided institutions; reasons could be that the cost of studying at unaided colleges is much higher. The aided institutions are able to fair well because of Project Genesis Training Programme and job fairs conducted by them. IV. Salary of Arts and Science College Graduates The graduation of Arts and Science students can get placement at government. However, they can get salary 242,400 per annum [8]. On the other hand if they get placement at private companies or industry, they are unable to get even one lac per year. . V. Cost Benefit Analysis for Engineering Colleges Tamil Nadu has the maximum number of engineering colleges for a state. There are 535 engineering colleges in Tamilnadu of which 7 are government engineering colleges, 3 private aided engineering college and the remaining 525 private unaided engineering colleges. Admission to engineering colleges is centralized and done by the Anna University. The sanctioned intake of the students for 2013 was 254,319 for the 535 engineering colleges. According to data available, nearly 78,188 seats fell vacant in engineering colleges [9]. Though 100+ vacancies were there in government engineering colleges, the major chunk of vacancies was from the Unaided engineering colleges. Lack of campus placement (and low expectation of getting jobs without on campus recruitment), poor facilities in colleges, lack of efficient teachers are generally quoted as reason for the poor intake. VI. Fee structure in Engineering College In Tamil Nadu, the government engineering colleges fee is 7,550 and aided engineering colleges fee is 8,500, the centralized institutes of engineering colleges by the Anna University have fixed the fee for the different course and quota (Government quota and Management Quota) to the private unaided engineering colleges. For the government quota of Civil and CSE is 32,500, for Mechanical, EEE, ECE and Information Technology fee is 40,000 and for Management of Business Administration (MBA) fee is 25,000. The Management quota fee levels for the courses are Civil, Mechanical. EEE, ECE, CSE, Information Technology fee is 62,500 and Management of Business Administration (MBA) fee is 70,600[10]. VII. Salary of Engineering Graduate in Tamil Nadu The graduate engineers are expected to get salary form the government posting 4, 69,200[11] per annum and private companies like Infosys 366,093, from HCL 448,910, WIPRO 316,675[12] in Tamilnadu, between 258, 824 to 765,205, they can get bonus 50 to 101,130[13]. VIII. Cost Benefit analysis of Foreign (Higher) education After completing degree courses in India, students prefer to go to US, UK, Canada, Australia and Singapore for doing Masters. Cost of Masters is highest in US, ranging from 40 lacs to 60 lacs. Education in other countries is relatively less costly. But a student getting Masters from US University has higher probability to earn than students from other foreign universities.

IX. Salary of Foreign engineer graduate The salary of the foreign engineer graduate students get the median of the salary per month is, for Bio medical $ 81.540, for Civil, environmental $ 77,560, for chemical $90,300, for Electrical and computer engineering $84,540, for Geological, Mining $82,870, for Material Sciences $83,120 and Mechanical Engineering $78,160[14]. X. Bank Loan for Education In India, banks have been providing educational loan to students for their higher education. The Indian Banker Association has framed comprehensive education loan scheme to the students, the amount of loan for education in India is 7.5 lacs 20 lacs for education outside India. Up to 4 lacs no collateral security is demanded and rate of interest shall not exceed the Prime Lending Rate (PLR). Above 4 lacs, rate of interest shall be PLR + 1%.Normally, the Repayment period is 5 to 7 years, with provision of grace period one year after completion of the studies [15].

Page 226

Hariharan.N.P et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 224227

In State Bank of India (SBI), the rate of interest for loan amount up to 4 lacs is 13.50 % p.a, the repayment years is up to 10 years, between 4 lacs to 7.50 lacs 13.75 % p.a. repayment years up to 10 years and above 7.50 lacs 14.75 % p.a, [16]. XI. Conclusion Cost of education is low in government institutions and government aided institutions, be it school, college or university. In private unaided institutions, fees are higher, because many of the private institutions are run on profit motive. While benefits are almost equal in school and engineering education between aided and private institutions, reason for higher demand for private unaided schools look illogical. In the case of private engineering colleges, demand for better managed institutions is justified on account of employability of students. With very poor employability, future of Arts and science colleges look bleak, in spite of the fact that education is highly affordable in such institutions.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

XII. References Government of Tamil Nadu, Department of School Education 2012-2013, School education Policy 2012-2013. www.planning commission .com Government of Tamil Nadu, Human Development Index Report 2012-2013 Government of Tamil Nadu, Justice S.R Singaravelu Committee Report 2012-2015 www.tnresult.nic.in Government of Tamil Nadu, Department of higher Education 2012-2013, Department of Collegiate Education, Higher education Policy 2012-2013. www.tn.gov.in www.tn.gov.in Government of Tamilnadu, Department of Technical Education 2012-2013 www.annauniv.com, www.studychacha.com www.tn.gov.nic.in Respective companiesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; websites www.payscale.com United States department of labor 2013 (engineering graduate salary statistics) Indian Bankers Association Report 2012-2013 www.sbi.org.in

Page 227

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

A Comparative Study of Sustainability of Reason Specific Inter-State Migration in India: Empirical evidence from two states with severe poverty rates Pinak Sarkar1, Nutan Shashi Tigga2 Doctoral Scholar, Centre for Development Studies, Trivandrum, India

1,2

Abstract: In India migration is assuming greater significance with the emerging development dynamics and its ensuing implications. Although migration as a process has different aspects, this paper primarily focuses on empirically examining the ‘sustainability’ potential of migrants from two statistical approaches: sustainability through ‘probabilistic approach’ and ‘distributional approach’. It was found that from the probabilistic view point, the migrants with educational reason progress slower to longer duration of stay as against migration with employment, implying employment as a reason more sustainable when seen as progression. Conversely, from the distributional perspective, education led migration has higher cumulating migrant stock in the initial period and hence in the distributional sense more sustainable. I. Introduction Migration is a dynamic process with various implications of its own and the reasons for which people migrate depends on the developmental attributes of the origin and destination regions. Migration can be either internal or international. Internal migration can be viewed as an economic survival strategy for the poor in the Asian countries which help in poverty reduction (Deshingkar, 2006). Among the Asian countries, India has the highest internal migration. On one hand it constitutes of states which are extremely underdeveloped with very limited economic activity such as North-Eastern states, Bihar, Uttar Pradesh etc., while on the other hand there are regions and states making fast economic progress such as Maharashtra, Delhi, Gujarat etc. Migration can be seen as a process of mobility for achieving the goals of livelihood improvement, and the extent to which households succeed in achieving these goals depends on the destination and selectivity of migration (de Hass 2010). Most of recent literature claims that migration is a development- induced process thus, reflects uneven development of regions (McDowell and de Haan 1997). It can also be viewed as a process of mobility which plays a positive role in improving livelihood of people; also it is associated with poverty reduction effect (de Haan 1999 and Skeldon 2002). The other aspect is that migration especially from the rural areas to the urban centers has historically been very crucial for urbanization process (Lall et al, 2006). II. Migration Scenario in India and the background of this study In present times some of the determining reasons for migration in India are marriage, employment, business and education. According to Census 2001, marriage as a reason of migration, constituted about 43.1 million (43.8 per cent) of total migration in India. Followed by employment 14.4 million (14.7 per cent), education 2.9 million (3 per cent) and business 1.1 million (1.2 percent). Hence, after excluding marriage as a reason for migration, employment and education assumes a very significant share. Graph-1: Net-Migration of all the Indian states 6000000 4000000

0 -2000000 -4000000 -6000000

Jammu &… Himachal… Punjab Uttaranchal Haryana Delhi Rajasthan Uttar Pradesh Bihar Sikkim Arunachal… Nagaland Manipur Mizoram Tripura Meghalaya Assam West Bengal Jharkhand Orissa Chhattisgarh Madhya Pradesh Gujrat Maharastra Andhra Pardesh Karnataka Kerala Tamil Nadu

2000000

Source: NSSO, 64th Round 2007-08.

Page 228

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235

In the background of this understanding of the reason specific migration in India, the present study focuses in examining the sustainability of migrants originating from the most impoverished states of India. In the context of this study the term “sustainability”, is used to explain the durational stay of migrants at the place of destination/ continuation of a migrants’ stay. For empirical exercise, the origin states taken into consideration are Uttar Pradesh and Bihar, for two reasons, firstly, these two Indian states witnessed the highest number of net-migration1 out-side the state (Graph-1), and secondly, these states are also among the top five states with the highest percentage of people living below the poverty line with Bihar topping the list (Graph-2). On the other hand, we take Maharashtra as the destination state because it receives the highest inflow of interstate migration in India2. Graph-2; Share of Population below Poverty Line of Indian states 60

Percentage Below Poverty Line

50 40 30 20 10

%BPL Bihar Chhattisgarh Manipur Jharkhand Assam Uttar Pradesh Orissa Madhya… All India West Bengal Arunachal… Rajasthan Maharashtra Karnataka Gujarat Andhra… Mizoram Nagaland Haryana Uttarakhand Tripura Tamil Nadu Meghalaya Punjab Delhi Sikkim Kerala Himachal… Jammu &…

Source: NSSO Sample Survey 2009-10, Poverty estimates, Poverty ratio, Tendulkar Methodology

The three key research questions addressing the relevance of durational analysis in this study are as follows:  As a reason specific migration, what is the certainty that migrants will sustain for longer duration in a place of destination?  Is there any differential in sustainability of migrants at the place of destination between those migrating for education vs. those migrating for employment?  Is there any difference in the pattern of sustainability of migrants originating from the Uttar Pradesh against those originating from Bihar? III. Methodology The term ‘sustainability3’ in this study is exclusively referred to, as the continuation of a migrant’s stay or the longevity of a migrant’s stay at the place of destination. We try to address ‘sustainability’, through two dimensions4: First the ‘probabilistic approach’, it explains the likelihood of greater durational stay at the destination by calculating probability. This approach informs about the migrant’s probability to progress or enter into the next duration level. For example, a person in the duration category say, “1 to 4 Years”, probably would stay longer than that, hence we examine the probability of entering into the higher order duration category. However, analyzing sustainability through probabilistic approach does not explain anything about the retained stock of migrants at a particular duration category. The second dimension, through which ‘sustainability’ is analyzed in this study, is by calculating the retained stock of migrants with accumulated duration of stay at the initial duration category5. This is done by calculating 1

Net-Migration is the difference between In-Migration and Out-Migration. Net-Migration for Uttar-Pradesh is -6.4 million (28247469255257=6430511) and Bihar is -3.6 million (1619031-5260659=3641628). 2 Net-Migration for Maharashtra is 5.1 Million (7313139-2145868=5167271). 3 Though, the meaning of the term ‘Sustainability’ might have different connotations. This study makes an attempt to exclusively use the term ‘sustainability’ to describe the continuation of a migrant’s stay at a destination. 4 Similar methodology has been used in the M.Phil. Dissertation titled, “An Economic Analysis of Education and Employment led Migration from North-Eastern states to various other states of India” submitted at the Centre for Development Studies, Trivandrum by Pinak Sarkar, and also in an upcoming paper by the same author, tiled “Sustainability Quotient of the Student Migration in various Metropolises in India”. 5 There are four duration categories used in this paper, as Census data provides only four durations groups of ‘Less than 1 Year’, ‘1 to 4 Years’, ‘5 to 9 Years’ and ‘10 Years and above’ in D-3 Series which provides information on ‘Migration by place of last residence, duration of residence and reason for migration’.

Page 229

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235

the Relative Frequency (RF) which provides the distribution of migrants across durations to examine the dominance of migrants or stock of migrants at each duration group. This we termed as the distributional approach. IV. Data In India, migrants are not required to register either at the place of origin or at the place of destination as a result the most credible sources of information on migration are the Indian Census and the National Sample Survey (NSS) data. In this study we only employ the Census 2001 database in the absence of the Census 2011, D-Series data on migration which is yet to be published. For examining the sustainability of migrants we take Census data based on “Place of Last Residence” (PLR), the Census also provides migration data based on “Place of Birth” (POB) criterion which is not much used. The Census D-Series data mainly provides information on age, gender, duration, reasons for migration, education, socio-economic background and economic activity of migrants. V. Theoretical Background In the subsequent section we briefly discuss the important theories of migration. There exist volumes of literature on migration models and approaches explaining different processes of migration and factors which motivate a migrant to sustain at a place of destination. Shrestha (1988) argued five different modeling approaches to understand migration behavior and the contexts which promote migration. The five modeling approaches are discussed below: Economic/behavioral models are used to argue the theory of utility maximization of the migrants. In other words, migrants would be motivated to seek better economic welfare/opportunities and migrate to a place which offers better infrastructural and economic opportunities. The ecodemographic “push” models, wherein migration is induced due to excessive population pressure and reduction in wages, most common in economically backward region with huge population pressure, which in turn restricts economic growth stagnating the economy and leading to fall in the wage rate. This triggers the inhabitants who are left with very few options which force them to move out of the region for better economic welfare. The spatial attraction model, i.e., “pull” factors, enables migrating to a region endowed with better opportunities of employment and welfare. The “pull” factors are clearly evident in the case of India, with the metropolitan centers and big cities such as Mumbai, Bangalore, Chennai, Delhi, and Kolkata etc., rich in opportunities and facilities, thereby attracting migrants from the backward and poor regions. These “pull” factors are educational facilities, employment opportunities, quality health care and other infrastructural arrangements which a big city provides. Anthrosociological models, these models emphasizes on the importance of group networks encouraging migrants to move from backward regions to better or advanced regions with the help of connection or network effect of already migrated friends and relatives . The Neo-Marxist dependency model, this model views uneven development and articulation of pre-capitalist with capitalist models of production as the root cause of migration. The sustainability of youth migration from the backward states to better-off state to a large extent can be directly or indirectly determined by the theoretical approaches mentioned above. The mentioned migration modeling approaches also in a way explains the contexts that promote migrations and also determines the sustainability of various reason specific migrations. VI. Dynamics of Migration in understanding sustainability As already discussed in the preceding section, employment is a significant reason for migration. Many people after completing their education or attaining some minimum level of qualification choose to move out of their origin state for better employment opportunity. However, the employment led migration is not confined only to the literate groups, much of which is actually comprised by the illiterate work force. The illiterate group of employment-led migrants is mainly equipped with traditional skills which are useful for some manual and menial work in the industry, construction and agriculture. Importantly, longevity or higher durational stay at the place of destination among the skilled labor force is comparatively more than the unskilled labor migrants. The skilled labors usually try to get some work experience and expertise in the present job, which includes a skill upgradation process, and then they prefer to move out of their old jobs in order to maximize their opportunity. Conversely, the unskilled labor forces mainly comprising of the lowly paid workers in the industries and constructions etc., are found to be more flexible. They continuously search better jobs either due to uncertainty of job after a period or due to fluctuation of demand for labor in an industry, for example, they shift from agriculture to construction. Therefore, it can be argued that as the migration for employment constitutes people at different skill level, there durational stay also depends on their respective skills. Next category of migrants is the education-led migrant groups. Such a kind of mobility occurs when people migrate for attaining higher education and skills through trainings at a destination. But, this kind of mobility can also be seen in different contexts. Education-led migration as already discussed, mostly occurred with the aim of accumulating quality higher education. However, it will be unjust to limit education led migration only to higher education receiving group as such migration also occurs due to inadequate educational infrastructures in the backward regions; therefore, students sometimes even migrate to cities to receive general education.

Page 230

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235

Additionally, high rates of education-led migration are also due to political instability and violence in certain regions, which forces the parents to send their children to cities with stable environment. Thus, it can be suggested that migration for education also involves certain hidden or over looked factors which are not always discussed. VII. Analyzing Sustainability through the Probabilistic Approach Using the probabilistic approach we intend to calculate progression among the reason specific migrant groups progressing to the higher duration categories because when sustainability is viewed as progression, higher progression is seen as higher sustainability. This is done to understand the current pattern of migration duration and the expected changes in the pattern which will occur in the near future. A. Progression of Migrant groups from Uttar Pradesh to Maharashtra: In this section, the expected progression of each of migrant groups from duration of lower order to that of the higher order is calculated. Table-1, gives the number of employment and education related migrants residing in Maharashtra at each duration category from Uttar Pradesh. Whereas, Table-2, gives the probability values for the possible progression of these two reason specific migrant groups. Table-1: Migrant groups from Uttar Pradesh to Maharashtra Duration

< 1 Year

1 to 4 Years

5 to 9 Years

10+ Years

Total

Employment

29533

223319

221292

531168

1005312

Education

1065

9646

3549

5762

20022

Source: Census 2001. Table-2: Progression Probability Reason

Group-A

Group-B

Group-C

Employment

0.97

0.77

0.71

Education

0.95

0.49

0.62

Note: a)

Group- A explains the probability6 of an individual in “Less than 1 Year” category to move to the categories of higher durations. b) Group- B explains the probability of the individual in the “1- 4 Years” category to move to the category of higher durations. c) Group- C explains the probability of the individual in the “5- 9 Years” category to enter the “10 Years and above” category. The probability value of Group-A for both the employment and education related migrants’ originating from Uttar Pradesh shows that the migrants who belong to the category of “Less than 1 Year” duration, the probability for them to progress further to the groups of higher durations are higher. Figures reveal almost insignificant difference between the probability values of employment (0.97) and education (0.95) related migrants. The reason behind such high probability values may be because of the fact that people migrating for whatever purpose tend to sustain for not less than a year, whether seeking employment or education. In Group- B, though the probability values of both the categories reduces to 0.77 and 0.49 respectively, the reduction in probability value for education is much higher than the employment category. This may be because of the fact that the employed category after being employed for three to four years tend to settle down at the place of destination, thus, higher probability for them to continue further at the same destination. On the other hand, people migrating for educational purposes after completing their education in three to four years, tend to move out, resulting in considerable reduction in probability to sustain further. In Group- C, there is not much change in the progression probability of employment (0.71) and education (0.62). B. Progression of Migrant groups from Bihar to Maharashtra: To examine whether Bihar follows similar pattern of migration as observed in Uttar Pradesh, the probability values are calculated for each group (Table-3). Table-3: Migrant groups from Bihar to Maharashtra Duration

< 1 Year

1 to 4 Years

5 to 9 Years

10+ Years

Total

Employment

12570

75831

54432

63535

206368

Education

546

4696

836

724

6802

Source: Census 2001. To be specific, say for the “employment” group, it is the ratio of (289872 + 259331 + 677628) to the group total value of 1265227. We follow this rule in defining the other probabilities also reported below. 6

Page 231

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235

Table-4: Progression Probability Reason

Group-A

Group-B

Group-C

Employment

0.94

0.61

0.54

Education

0.92

0.25

0.46

Comparing the two tables-Table-2 and Table-4, it is observed that the progression trends of migrant groups originating from Uttar Pradesh and Bihar are similar. But, what is important to note is that the progression of each reason specific migrant groups originating from Bihar to the higher duration category is much lower than those originating from Uttar Pradesh. Hence we can argue that the migrants from Bihar for employment and education specific reasons are more mobile compared to those originating from Uttar Pradesh as their continuation at the place of destination is relatively less likely. VIII. Verifying migration sustainability through distributional approach In the previous section, we dealt with the issue of progression where higher progression was seen as higher sustainability of migrants, whereas, in this section, we measure sustainability in the distributional sense. In the distributional sense higher dominance/retained stock of migrants in the initial durations is seen as higher sustainability. The main objective in this section is to make a comparison of these two reason specific migration groups in accordance with their retained stock or accumulation at the initial duration level. For this purpose, the relative frequency (RF) of each of the four duration categories, “Less than 1 Year”, “1 to 4 Years”, “5 to 9 Years”, and “10 Years and above” are calculated. The RF values for both the groups give the dominant duration span. Next, the Cumulative Relative Frequency (CRF) are calculated and compared to determine the dominance of migrated stock in the duration groups. It is important to know that staying or continuation in a place of destination is a stochastic cumulative process of the migrant population, the relative number of migrants at any point in time depends on the number of migrants settled in the past. Through such comparisons, the (less than type) cumulative relative frequencies of each group are obtained which are then plotted in a single figure to access the dominance of both.

Relative frequency for a category 

Number of Observations falling in that category Total number of Observations

Instead of the relative frequency for a given category one can also use percentage for a category, which can be computed as follows:

Percentage for a category  Relative frequency for the category  100 %

A. Migration originating from Uttar Pradesh: In this section, we analyze the groups through distributional approach. First of all the respective relative frequency (RF) and cumulative relative frequency (CRF) are calculated to evaluate the dominance of each group in their respective duration categories. Table-5: Employment Specific Migrants Uttar Pradesh Duration < 1 Year

Employment 29533

RF 0.03

CRF 0.03

1 to 4 Years 5 to 9 Years 10+ Years

223319 221292 531168

0.22 0.22 0.53

0.25 0.47 1.00

Source: Census 2001. Table-6: Education Specific Migrants from Uttar Pradesh Duration

Education

CRF

< 1 Year

1065

0.05

1 to 4 Years

9646

0.48

0.53

5 to 9 Years

3549

0.18

0.71

10+ Years

5762

0.29

1.00

The relative frequencies for these reason specific migration groups indicate about the relative share of migrants falling in each duration category. In the case of employment led migration from Uttar Pradesh, it is observed that (Table-5) the relative percentage share is highest for the duration category of ’10 Years and above’ which comprises 53 per cent of the migrants, however, for the preceding two duration groups, it is very sparsely distributed and in that sense of the term less sustainable in the initial period with less retaining stock. However, for the education led migration group the distribution share is very peculiar and it is not in accordance with the employment group. For the education group it is found that the RF value is highest with 48 per cent for the ‘1 to 4 Years’ duration. The main reason for such a result is that, people migrating for educational purposes

Page 232

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235

have less flexibility in the ‘1 to 4 Years’ duration group to move out compared to the employment led migrants. The reason is that students have to complete their educational course which lasts for at least three to four years in most of the cases. As a result, the retained stock of migrants for education category at the duration group of “1 to 4 Years” always dominates and in this sense more sustainable than the employment category at the initial duration category. For a better understanding of such a scenario, we plot the CRF values of both the employment and education led migration from Uttar Pradesh in a line graph, (Graph-3). This pictorial representation of the stock cumulation shows that the cumulative retained stock of education led migrants is highest in the duration group of ‘1 to 4 Years’. The reason for such a pattern is already discussed in the preceding paragraph. Therefore it will not be wrong to argue that when sustainability is measured in the distributional perspective, education seems to have highest sustainability in that particular duration. Graph-3: CRF of employment and education led migration from Uttar Pradesh 1.20 1.00

0.80 0.60

Uttar Pradesh to Maharashtra Emp CRF

0.40

Uttar Pradesh to Maharashtra Edu CRF

0.20 0.00 < 1 Year

1 to 4 Years 5 to 9 Years 10+ Years

9.2 Migration originating from Bihar: In this section, the same analysis is repeated for the employment and education led migrants originating from Bihar (Table-7 & Table-8). Table-7: Employment Specific Migrants from Bihar Duration

Employment

CRF

< 1 Year

12570

0.06

1 to 4 Years

75831

0.37

0.43

5 to 9 Years

54432

0.26

0.69

10+ Years

63535

0.31

1.00

Source: Census 2001. Table-8: Education Specific Migrants from Bihar Duration

Education

CRF

< 1 Year

546

0.08

1 to 4 Years

4696

0.69

0.77

5 to 9 Years

836

0.12

0.89

10+ Years

724

0.11

1.00

Similar to the previous section, here we observed that the education led migrants are more sustainable at the initial duration group of ‘1 to 4 Years’, for same reasons mentioned above (Section-9-1). For the employment groups the retained stock are lower in the initial duration periods and hence less sustainable (Table-7). Like the previous section, we again plot the CRF values of employment and education category (Gaph-4), the sustainability of education led migration is found to be higher than the employment led category. Graph-4: CRF of employment and education led migration from Bihar 1.20 1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00

Bihar to Maharashtra Emp CRF Bihar to Maharashtra Edu CRF

< 1 Year

1 to 4 Years 5 to 9 Years 10+ Years

Page 233

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235

After analyzing sustainability from the distributional approach of stock cumulation it is observed that the education led migrants are more sustainable in the initial duration category as people migrating for education are less flexible in mobility during the course period and are more likely to complete their education before they can migrate back to the origin or some other destination. Whereas, employment led migrants are more flexible to move in the initial duration of migration and hence are less sustainable. It is also observed that such a pattern is true for both the states irrespective of the difference in flow and poverty levels. B. Cross-Comparison of the CRF of the migrants originating from Uttar Pradesh and Bihar for each reason specific groups: In the subsequent section, an attempt is made to compare the stock cumulation of the employment and education led migrant groups separately origination from Uttar Pradesh and Bihar. This will help us to evaluate the state on the basis of higher cumulative stock of each migrant group. Table-9 gives the CRF values of four groups of migrants to the destination state of Maharashtra: 1. Employment from Uttar Pradesh, 2. Education from Uttar Pradesh, 3. Employment from Bihar and 4. Education from Bihar, all these groups are then cross compared in the next section. Table-9: CRF of employment and education led migrants from Uttar Pradesh and Bihar Duration

UP-M Employment

B-M Employment

UP-M Education

B-M Education

< 1 Year

0.03

0.06

0.05

0.08

1 to 4 Years

0.25

0.43

0.53

0.77

5 to 9 Years

0.47

0.69

0.71

0.89

10+ Years

1.00

Source: Census 2001. Graph-5: Comparing CRF of employment led migrants from Uttar Pradesh and Bihar 1.20 1.00 0.80

UP-M Emp

0.60

B-M Emp

0.40 0.20 0.00

< 1 Year 1 to 4 Years 5 to 9 Years 10+ Years Graph-6: Comparing CRF of education led migration from Uttar Pradesh and Bihar 1.20 1.00 0.80 0.60

UP-M Edu

0.40

B-M Edu

0.20 0.00 < 1 Year

1 to 4 Years

5 to 9 Years

10+ Years

Graph-5 gives a pictoral representation of the employment category of migrants, which shows that the stock cumulation of the migrats for employment purposes from Bihar tends to sustain more than the migrants from Uttar Pradesh for the same purpose. Similarly, for the education category too, the migrants from Bihar have higher cumulation, i.e., higher sustainability than migrants from Uttar Pradesh. One major cause for higher stock cumulation (sustainability) of the migrants from Bihar can be attributed to the high poverty rates inBihar (54 per cent) since decades. Whereas, in Uttar Pradesh the BPL is around 38 per cent of the total population which is considerably lower than Bihar. IX. Results As sustainability in this study is viewed in two different sense of the term, it should not be confused because when sustainability is viewed as progression, (higher progression is seen as higher sustainability). Whereas, on the other hand, when sustainability is viewed from distributional approach, (higher dominance/retained stock of migrants in the initial durations are seen as higher sustainability). Using the two approaches, we find some interesting pattern of migration in Bihar and Uttar Pradesh.

Page 234

Pinak Sarkar et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 228235



From the probabilistic view point, the migrants with educational reason progress slowly to longer duration of stay as against migration with employment purpose. The reason for such an outcome is that, people migrating for education purpose have a tendency to return to their origin state or even further migrate to some other destination after completion of their education which mainly takes three to four years in case of a degree. Whereas, higher progression is observed for employment category of migrants because once a migrant has continued for three to four years in a destination, there is higher probability of him/her to settle down resulting in higher progression. As a result examining sustainability through progression, shows that employment led migrants are more sustainable at the destination. The other important point is that the progression of each reason specific migrant groups originating from Bihar at each duration category is much lower than those originating from Uttar Pradesh.  From the distributional perspective, the migration stock cumulates higher for education, implying higher dominance of education led migrants at initial duration and in this sense more sustainable. The reason behind higher stock cumulation for education led migration is that people migrating for education requires to stay at a destination for three to four years to complete an average degree course as a result they are less mobile during that period and hence more sustainable, on the other hand employment in this particular sense is less sustainable because there are more flexibility for an employment led migrant in the initial duration to move out of the destination, the employment led stock cumulates only after five to six years of stay when they tend to settle down. When compared between Uttar Pradesh and Bihar for each migration streams separately, it is found that Bihar originated migrants are more sustainable at the initial duration which may be because of higher poverty rates in Bihar. X. Conclusion This study attempts to investigate the issue of sustainability of reason specific migrants originating from two major poverty ridden and highest out-migration states in India: Uttar Pradesh and Bihar to the prosperous and highest in-migration state of Maharashtra. However, robustness in these results could be more with age-specific controls and adjusting for the possible change in stated reason for migration with longer duration of stay at the destination. References Census of India. (2001). Migration Tables. Office of the Registrar General of India: New Delhi. De Haan, A. (1999). Livelihoods and poverty: The role of migration-a critical review of the migration literature. The journal of development studies, 36(2), 1–47. De Haas, H. (2010). Migration and Development: A Theoretical Perspective. International Migration Review, 44(1), 227–264. Deshingkar, P. (2006). Internal migration, poverty and development in Asia: Including the excluded. IDS Bulletin, 37(3), 88–100. Lall, S., Selod, H., & Shalizi, Z. (2006). Rural-urban migration in developing countries: A survey of theoretical predictions and empirical findings. World Bank Policy Research Working Paper, (3915). McDowell, C., & De Haan, A. (1997). Migration and sustainable livelihoods: A critical review of the literature. Institute of Development Studies Brighton. Shrestha, N. R. (1988). A structural perspective on labour migration in underdeveloped countries. Progress in Human Geography, 12(2), 179–207. Skeldon, R. (2002). Migration and Poverty. Asia-Pacific Population Journal, December.

Page 235

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

An Intersection of Fact and Fiction: A Study of V.S.Naipaul’s The Middle Passage Pragnya Parimita Pradhan Asst. Professor, Synergy Institute of Engg. & Technology Dhenkanal, Odisha, 759001, INDIA Abstract: Many great writers have started their career in journalism before trying their hands at fiction. Journalism inculcated in them the power of keen observation and nurtured in them a respect for facts. It also taught them to be suspicious of rhetoric, abstractions and hypocrisy. The writers learned their craft as reporters of fact. As their craft matured, consciously or unconsciously the facts took the garb of fictional narrative simultaneously revealing the attitude of these writers. V.S.Naipaul started his career as a writer of fictions but ventured into the field of non-fiction by writing The Middle Passage. The book covers his year-long trip through Trinidad, British Guiana, Suriname, Martinique and Jamaica in 1961.Himself a West Indian, a Trinidadian of East Indian descent, Naipaul, in this book, conjures up a negative image of Trinidad. The Middle Passage marks the culmination of a phase of Naipaul’s career where he examines his West Indian background on the basis of his remembered impressions of childhood and early youth. It is also an examination of his own relation to that society and of the reasons why he rejected it.The book shows a dexterous amalgamation of fact and fiction. Keywords: fact, fiction, fictional narrative, non-fiction “Borders are set up to define the places that are safe and unsafe, to distinguish us from them. A border is a dividing line, a narrow strip along a steep edge. A borderland is … created by the emotional residue of an unnatural boundary. It is a constant state of transition. The prohibited and forbidden are its inhabitants.” -Gloria Anzaldua The above lines highlight the significance of a borderline which sometimes may be ill-defined. The porous nature of the borderland may open up fresh avenues for the germination of new ideas. Naipaul’s travel writings symbolize the borderlands between fact and fiction. Naipaul seems to share the same platform with Ernest Hemingway by venturing into the field of nonfiction. Hemingway raised a few eyebrows by publishing Death in the Afternoon in 1932 when he was at the peak of his power and reputation as a fiction writer. Similarly Naipaul turned to nonfiction after he wrote A House for Mr Biswas, the masterpiece of his literary career. Hemingway had begun his career as a newspaper journalist; so Death in the Afternoon could be seen as a return to his beginnings as a fact writer. Critics have examined his newspaper days in light of the influences on the style and subject matter of the later fiction. Making a distinction between journalism and writing Hemingway elucidates, “In writing for a news paper, you told what happened and, with one trick and another, you communicated the emotion aided by the element of timeliness which gives a certain emotion to any account of something that has happened on that day”. However his goal in his writing, as opposed to his journalism, was to create work that “would be as valid in a year or in ten years or, with luck and if you stated it purely enough, always.”(Hemingway 3) He seemed to sum up: journalism was fleeting, while writing was permanent. Thus his aim in his extended nonfiction was always to create books that would acquire “ a certain permanent value” ( 5) As Hemingway saw it, fiction had its source in the recollected and observed facts of experience, but if the work was to last the material had to be intensified through invention into a new and independent reality. He went on to elaborate: “Writing about anything actual was bad. It always killed it. The only writing that was any good was what you made up, what you imagined. That made everything come true.” (7) The same aesthetic principle applied to nonfiction: to escape the death of topicality fact had to be mingled with invention, what was true with what was made up. Like Hemingway, Naipaul’s nonfictions occupy the muddled area between fact and fiction. In his seminal essay Toward a Theory of Non-fiction, Eric Heyne comments that “There has been much confusion about theoretical issues concerning the distinction between fact and fiction, the qualities of literary status in nonfiction, and the responsibilities of the author in turning history into art. Further Heyne rejects the definitions of nonfiction: “literary non-fiction and fiction are fundamentally different, despite their resemblances in structure or technique, and this difference must be recognized by any theory that hopes to do justice to powerful nonfiction narratives” (480). In Connery’s opinion, literary nonfiction is like a prose narrative which

Page 236

Pragnya Parimita Pradhan, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 236-238

employs rhetorical techniques of fiction ( xiv) . In the section “ A Third way to tell the Story : American literary Journalism at the Turn of the century “ of “ Literary Journalism in the Twentieth century”, Connery argues that literary journalism is driven by an impulse to tell the story in a new way. John Hellmann in his Fables of Fact says: “The terms ‘ new journalism’ and ‘nonfiction novel’ both serve as names for a contemporary genre in which journalistic material is presented in the form of fiction. (1) According to Genette, nonfiction may “fictionalize” itself without being transformed into fiction, just as fiction may “defictionalize” itself. This possibility “ is the proof that genres can perfectly well change normsnorms that after all [ … ] were imposed on them by no one but themselves”.( 83)Thus there exists a reciprocal relationship between fictional and factual writing. The so-called differences are self imposed. In this regard, Linda Hutcheon’s arguments are noteworthy : “ like the flower which shares Narcissus’s name, the ‘nonfictional novel’ is a natural outgrowth of the old realistic tradition”. She contends that the origins of novelistic self-consciousness may be found in early journal and epistolary novels which are concerned with “ writing and reading within the structure of the novel itself” , and where “ the writer calls his reader’s attention to the activity of writing as an event within the novel” ( 12,16). Naipaul’s life was a journey which he has expressed through a variety of narrative forms ranging from fiction to travelogues to autobiography and history. For him, travelling was not a journey to reach destinations of far off countries, but a new way of seeing things. His urge to travel was the symbolic manifestation of the tendency to experiment with the novel form. He felt that fiction is an inadequate vehicle to express the authenticity of details and voice. Thus he used travel writing to strike a balance between mere fictionalization and factual representation at the same time continuing to render his material in the form of literature. After writing his masterpiece A House for Mr. Biswas, he began to lose faith in the once great literary form’s ability to express “the complexities of modern patchwork societies”. Moreover, he felt that travelling would enable him to broaden his limited world view that was afforded to him in Trinidad and in London. The Middle Passage is based on Naipaul’s travel through the West Indies in 1960. It delineates his sense of disillusionment which he experiences after seeing the Island in disarray. “Nothing was created in the West Indies”(29) forms the epitome of his observation on the island. Naipaul expresses his deep concern for the Negroes and the East-Indians who have been transported to a new world. Uprooted from their native civilization, these people were subjected to harsh economic exploitation. The creation of a new society with a multi-cultural identity were like “Manufactured societies, labour camps, creations of empire”. While the East Indians were able to retain their cultural practices, the Negroes failed to proclaim their cultural identity and yielded to the white man’s culture. This earned them a sense of superiority over their fellow men in Africa. Thus in the West Indies, the whites enslaved people of other communities and unleashed their own regime crushing the rights of the non-whites: “………, with Indians entering the Civil service and small-island Negroes muscling in on the taxi business, there has been a certain direct rivalry; but this is out-weighed by a long-standing division of labour which is taken so much for granted that Trinidadian are hardly aware of it. Coconut-sellers, for instance, are Indians; it would be unnatural and perhaps unwise to receive a coconut blank hand. No one, not even an Indian, will employ a mason or a carpenter who is not a Negro. The lower down the scale one goes the nicer the divisions of labour become. Negroes sale ice and its immediate by products shaved ice, “Presses”, snowballs. Indians sell ice lollies. Before the war Indians swept the streets of Port of Spain; Negroes emptied the cesspits. Each felt a hearty contempt for the other.(85) Derek C. Bowe remarks that there is a deeper basis for Naipaul’s disgust. As a second generation Trinidadian whose grandfather had immigrated to Trinidad from Uttar Pradesh, India, Naipaul could not identify with the subcontinent. He felt as if he was deprived of his due share of recognition as the son of a journalist. England seemed to beckon him as a land of opportunity. Naipaul’s critical stance towards the Caribbean is expressed from the very beginning of the book: “There was such a crowd of immigrant type West Indians on the boat train platform at waterloo that I was glad I was travelling first class to the West-Indies” (9). His description of mentally ill passengers as “Lunatics” exposes his insensitivity towards the Negroes. His detestation of these people seems unbridled: “His light grey jacket was as long and loose as a short top coat’ his yellow shirt was dirty and the frayed collar undone’ his tie was slack and askew….. His face was grotesque. It seemed to have been smashed n form one check. One eye had narrowed; the thick lips had bunched into a circular swollen protuberance; the enormous nose was twisted. When, slowly he opened his mouth to spit, his face became even more distorted. He spat in slow intermittent dribbles. (10, 11) Although from a pure literary point of view, these descriptions stand unparalleled what comes to the fore is the bottomless apathy of the writer towards everything Caribbean. When the boat reaches Trinidad, Naipaul says, “I began to feel all my old fear of Trinidad. I did not want to stay. I had left the security of the ship and had no assurance that I would ever leave the island again” (42). In the opinion Bowe, Naipaul’s ignorance about the achievement of West Indies is unsavoury. Even a casual look at West Indian history up to the point of the Middle Passage’s publishing would have documented

Page 237

Pragnya Parimita Pradhan, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 236-238

the region’s accomplishments. Firstly, Naipaul does not recognise the contribution of Sir Eric Williams, the internationally recognised historian and author of Capitalism and Slavery. The seminal work maintained that revenue from Britain’s West Indian plantations provided her with the basis for her economic and industrial success. The writer’s selective memory about West Indian accomplishment neglects mentioning the pioneering literary work of George Lamming, author of In the castle of My Skin and The Pleasures of Exile. It doesn’t acknowledge the economic vision of Sir Arthur Lewis, who was later to be awarded a Nobel Prize. It belittles the poetry of another Caribbean Nobel Laureate Derek Walcott. It is surprising that a man of Naipaul’s learning would go so far in his ingratitude that he would be unable to admit the benefits he got from the land. Trinidad’s government awarded him a scholarship as an 18 year old Queen’s Royal College student, which led to his reading of English at Oxford and his subsequent writing career. Ironically, for all his aversion to the West Indies, he is deeply indebted to it. Thus The Middle Passage offers itself as a brilliant study of the amalgamation of fact and fiction as it shows the remarkable transformation of geographical, historical and social realities of the West Indies. It is as if Naipaul re-invents his travel experience from the bits and pieces of the notes which he has taken at the time of journey. This makes the travel narrative move around different time-space points. Critics have claimed that Naipaul’s travel narratives deviate from reality as there is possibility of the distortion of his original observations. However, in the deft hands of the writer the final travel narrative acquires a chronological order and evolves as an organic whole.        

Works Cited Anzaldua, Gloria. Borderlands/La Frontera. 2nd. Ed. San Francisco. Aunt Lute Books. 1987; 1999.Print Connery,ThomasB. “Preface”.Connery(ed.).A Sourcebook of American Literary Journalism :Representative Writers in an Emerging Genre.New York:Greenwood Press,1992,xi-xv.Print Genette,Gerard.Fiction & Diction.Trans.Catherine Porter.Ithaca and London:Cornell University Press,1993(1991).Print Hellmann,John.Fables of Fact:The New Journalism as New Fiction.Urbana et al.University of Illinois Press,1981.Print Hemingway,Ernest.Death in the Afternoon. London:Jonathan Cape,1958(1932).Print Heyne,Eric. “Toward a Theory of Literary Nonfiction". Modern Fiction Studies 33.3 (Autumn 1987): 479-90.Print.Reprinted in Gale Research Company's Literary Criticism Series. Hutcheon,Linda. Narcissistic Narrative:The Metafictional Paradox.New York and London:Methuen,1984.Print Naipaul, V.S. The Middle Passage: The Caribbean Revisited. 1962. Harmondsworth, Middlesex, England: Penguin Books Ltd, 1969.Print.

Page 238

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Growth & Development of Tourism Sector in West Bengal: Issues & Concerns Dr. Sherap Bhutia Assistant Professor (W.B.E.S.), Post Graduate Department of Geography Chandernagore Government College, (Affiliated under University of Burdwan) Dist. Hooghly, Pin: 712136, West Bengal, INDIA Abstract: Tourism as a modern term is applicable to both international and domestic tourists. Tourism aims to recognize the importance of the continuity of natural resources and the continuity of culture and the balances within culture. Tourism generates local employment both directly in the tourism sector and in various support and resource management sectors. Tourism stimulates improvements to local transportation, communication and other basic community infrastructures in West Bengal. The paper provides a theoretical framework for tourism development in West Bengal and their associated issues and concerns. The main objective of this is to promote West Bengal as preferred destination for visitors and provides opportunities for Tourism business which will improve the economy of the people and thereby generates revenue for the State as well. The success of tourism depends on the ability of destinations to engage in sustainable use and conservation of vital resources. West Bengal has improved its share in international tourism receipts during the course of past decade i.e. from about 3.36% in 2000 to about 5.88% in 2012 of foreign tourists visiting India. Key Words: Tourists, Tour, Develop, Foreign Tourists, Tourism Industry

I. Introduction Tourism as a modern term is applicable to both international and domestic tourists. It is the temporary movement of people to destinations outside their normal place of work and residence. Such a pleasure-seeking tourist is a traveller moving from place to place or visiting the same place time and again. Tourism includes all economic activities which are organised around the needs of such travellers. The tourist flow between places depends upon general attractiveness of one country for another and business or cultural connections. Leisure and Holiday based international tours are more visible and dominant in modern international tourism industry. Most of the countries today promoting their tourism to achieve their economic and social targets. Tourism today has become an important segment of India economy contributing substantially to sustainable development of the country. India has succeeded in becoming the most preferred place amongst domestic and overseas travellers. Tourism exposes international travellers to India’s diverse culture. The tourism sector has been instrumental in generating foreign exchange, employment opportunities and household income for Indians, as it has in many other developing economies. Thus the development of the tourism sector appears to have been as important as the development of other sectors of the Indian economy. In fact Indian tourism industry has gone to new height in recent times. Both tourist arrival as well as revenue earned thereof are showing a steep hike. As per the World Travel and Tourism Council estimate, this sector now generate more than 4% of the country's GDP and more than 20 crore jobs. As a whole, Tourism is expected to generate 13 billion of economic activity now and by 2014, it is expected to grow to $ 25.08 billion. Among the different regions of the country, North India attracts the highest number of tourists. As a whole, 49% of foreign tourists throng to this part of the country while Western India attracts 29% of them. With 18 % of foreign tourist, South India remains in the third spot while Eastern region has a very negligible share of only 4 % of foreign tourists. II. Study Area West Bengal is a state situated in the eastern part of India, which shares its international border with Bangladesh, Nepal and Bhutan. The state also shares ethno-linguistic similarity with Bangladesh. It stretches from Himalayas in the north to the Bay of Bengal in the south. West Bengal stands surrounded by Assam and Sikkim in the northeast, Orissa in the southwest and the states of Jharkhand and Bihar in the west. The State lies between 27°13'15" and 21°25'24" north latitudes and 85°48'20" and 89°53'04" east longitudes.

Page 239

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

West Bengal spreads over an area of 34,267 sq mile (88,752 sq km) and the capital is Kolkata (Calcutta). West Bengal has the Rajmahal hills on its north-western side and the Shillong Plateau on its north-eastern border. The state stands bounded by the Indian peninsular shield of Archean basement rocks on the west. Geographically, the state is quite diverse, consisting of high peaks of Himalaya in the northern extremes and coastal regions in the southern parts, with plateaus and Ganges delta coming in between. Coming downward, the state houses some of the rare species of wildlife in the Sundarbans that is also the natural habitat of the famous Royal Bengal Tiger. West Bengal is also the only state in India where Himalayas are in the north and Sea is at the south, having plains and plateaus covering the remaining region. This state has been always known for its rich culture and heritage. In total West Bengal (WB) state comprises 19 districts. III. Objectives of the Study The main focus of this study is to critically evaluate various issues and concerns of Tourism Development in India in general and West Bengal in particular. To have a proper idea about the issue the study includes the following objectives:(i) To study the growth and performance of tourism industry in West Bengal. (ii) To analyze the different issues and concerns which are related to tourism industry in the State. (iii) To analyze the tourism destination and products of the State and to identify the major challenges of this smokeless industry. (iv) To study the present status and trends in the flow of tourists to West Bengal. (v) To suggest ways for improvement of tourism industry as a perspective tool of economic development in West Bengal. IV. Materials and Methods This study is basically descriptive in nature and based on secondary information. The present paper intends to examine the growth of tourism development and their related issues and concerns in West Bengal. The study analyses published books, different published research works, newspaper, magazines, reports of various government authorities, and websites. Secondary data has been collected from the Department of Tourism for the year 2000-2012 and different charts has been prepared and analyse and an inference has been drawn as per the need of the study. The Census data were also referred for this study. The nature of the present research work is explorative and the whole work has been done by descriptive as well as analytical methods. V. An Overview of Tourism in India Tourism plays an important role in economic development and creation of jobs in India. The systematic development of tourism in India is also linked with the Industrial revolution and the change in the mode of travels with introduction of Rail travels, Aviation and automobile revolution. However systematic development of tourism in India started from the 2nd Five Year Plan (1956-61), when there was some allocation for tourism development and thus tourism was recognized in the Plan document and emphasis was put for its systematic development. In 2011, India's share in international tourist flows was 0.64 percent of world travelers (India's share in the international tourism receipts was relatively higher at 1.61 percent in 2011), and 2.9 percent of travelers from Asia-Pacific (share in tourism receipts being 5.72 percent). All these shares have been steadily rising since 2002, and were not significantly affected by the 2008 financial crisis. The Travel and Tourism Competitiveness Report of 2012 by the World Economic Forum ranks India 12th in the Asia-Pacific Region and 68th globally; the report is very bullish on India's tourism growth outlook. During the year 2011, the number of Foreign Tourist Arrivals (FTAs) in India reached the level of 6.29 million, registering a growth of 8.9% over the FTAs of 5.78 million in 2010. The growth rate of 8.9% in tourist arrivals in India was almost double the growth of 4.4% in tourist arrivals worldwide. The tourism sector in India, therefore, has fared quite well vis-à-vis the world. Foreign Exchange Earnings (FEE) from tourism in India during 2011 were $16.56 billion as compared to $ 14.19 billion in 2010, showing a growth of 16.7%. The tourism industry has helped growth in other sectors as diverse as horticulture, handicrafts, agriculture, construction and even poultry. Both directly and indirectly, increased tourism in India has created jobs in a variety of related sectors. The numbers tell the story: almost 20 million people are now working in the India’s tourism industry. The Tourism Ministry has also played an important role in the development of the industry, initiating advertising campaigns such as the 'Incredible India' campaign, which promoted India’s culture and tourist attractions in a fresh and memorable way. The campaign helped create a colorful image of India in the minds of consumers all over the world, and has directly led to an increase in the interest among tourists.

Page 240

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

V. Relevance of the Study The importance of Tourism, as an instrument of economic development and employment generation, particularly in remote and backward areas, has been well-recognized the world over. Tourism generates local employment both directly in the tourism sector and in various support and resource management sectors. Tourism stimulates profitable domestic industries – hotels and other lodging facilities, restaurants and other food services, transportation systems, handicrafts and guide services. Tourism generates foreign exchange for the country and injects capital and the new money into the local economy. The business of tourism improves the general economic condition of those, who are directly involved in this sector. Tourism diversifies the local economy particularly in rural areas where agricultural employment may be sporadic or insufficient. Tourism seeks decision making among all segments of the society, including local population so that tourism and other resources users can co-exist. It incorporates planning and zooming which ensures Tourism Development appropriate to the carrying capacity of the eco-system. Tourism stimulates improvements to local transportation, communication and other basic community infrastructures. It also leads to the infrastructural development of the underdeveloped tourist destinations. Tourism creates recreational facilities which can be used by the local communities as well as domestic and international visitors. It also encourages and helps pay for preservation of archaeological sites and historic buildings and districts. Tourists tend to have disposable income that they spend in the country they are visiting. They also, on the whole, have more leisure time with which they use on numerous, shorter vacations throughout the year. Most tourists are well educated with sophisticated tastes which have resulted in the demand for better service and products. Many tourists also travel with their families, resulting in the need for more family-oriented vacation spots as well as niche destinations for other demographics, such as water sports vacations and spa resorts. Tourism is a dynamic and pervasive industry that provides a range of benefits and value to organisations, communities and regions that participate in the industry. Tourism can provide value for a destination in a number of ways:  Economic – increased and diversified economic activity; flow-on economic benefits through a community; stimulus for economic development and investment;  Social/Cultural – enhanced quality of life, community development, employment and income, conservation of cultural heritage, increased amenity, community pride;  Environmental – awareness of environmental significance, conservation of natural and built environments, implementation of sustainable practices. VI. Human Resource in West Bengal As per Census 2011, West Bengal has population of 9.13 Crores, an increase from figure of 8.02 Crore in 2001 census. Total population of West Bengal as per 2011 census is 91,276,115 of which male and female are 46,809,027 and 44,467,088 respectively. In 2001, total population was 80,176,197 in which males were 41,465,985 while females were 38,710,212. The total population growth in this decade was 13.84 percent while in previous decade it was 17.84 percent. The population of West Bengal forms 7.54 percent of India in 2011. In 2001, the figure was 7.79 percent. Literacy rate in West Bengal has seen upward trend and is 76.26 percent as per 2011 population census. Of that, male literacy stands at 81.69 percent while female literacy is at 66.57 percent. In 2001, literacy rate in West Bengal stood at 68.64 percent of which male and female were 77.02 percent and 59.61 percent literate respectively. In actual numbers, total literates in West Bengal stands at 61,538,281 of which males were 33,818,810 and females were 27,719,471. Density of West Bengal is 1,028 per sq km which is higher than national average 382 per sq km. In 2001, density of West Bengal was 903 per sq km, while nation average in 2001 was 324 per sq km. Sex Ratio in West Bengal is 950 i.e. for each 1000 male, which is below national average of 940 as per census 2011. In 2001, the sex ratio of female was 934 per 1000 males in West Bengal. VII. The Present Scenario The West Bengal attractions offer the visitor with a wonderful opportunity to explore the various places of tourist interest of the state. West Bengal is blessed with an immense tourism potential. Being an important state of India, West Bengal is thronged by numerous tourists all over the year who are absolutely thrilled by the wide gamut of tourist attractions. Ranging from the numerous state museums to the unique art galleries, and from the educational and entertainment centers to the engineering marvels, the West Bengal Attractions provides the tourists to choose from a plethora of important tourist places. The tourist attraction of West Bengal reflects the rich cultural heritage and traditional legacy of the state that has triggered down to the modern era. Upholding the traditional heritage, the museums of West Bengal bears relics to the rich historical past of the state. One can

Page 241

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

experience the lost glory and grandeur of West Bengal in the museums which are the store house of antique pieces, sculptures and tokens of the past. The art galleries display the rich artistic skills and imaginative creativity of the people of West Bengal. The long corridors of the art galleries ponder on the intellectual advancement of the artist who expresses their inner most feelings through the art works. West Bengal is blessed with many parks and gardens that perform the dual function of educating and entertaining the visitors. The splendid white monument of the Victoria Memorial reminds one of the British era in our country and enriches us with the knowledge of history, the attractive gardens provides one relief from the hustle bustle of the city life. The Science City provides the visitors with an opportunity to amass knowledge about the various scientific activities while relieving us from the stress of our daily life. The bridges which connect one part of the city to another are a perfect example of the engineering skills of West Bengal. West Bengal has many bridges that are one of their kinds in all over India. VIII. Major Tourism Destinations and Products West Bengal offers the tourists an opportunity to experience long unending beaches with gentle rolling sea lined with Casuarina forests. A number of sea resorts viz. Digha, Shankarpur, Junput, Bakkhali, Sagardwip have sprung up on the East coast of Bengal. Given the variance of the tourism sites in the State, West Bengal has something to offer throughout the year.

West Bengal is a State rich in resources which can be leveraged for tourism. Thus natural scenery, favourable weather and climate and cultural heritage are used for area development through promotion of tourism. West Bengal is a key tourist destination for both domestic and foreign tourists also because of tourist attractions, from the hill station of Darjeeling to the Sagar Island in the confluence of the Ganga and Bay of Bengal. Some of the important tourist centres are Calcutta, Digha (Sea beach) at Medinipur district, Bakkhali Sea Resort and Sunderbans (famous for Royal Bengal Tiger and Crocodile project) at South 24-Pargana district, Bandel (Church) at North 24-Pargana district, Tarakeswar (pilgrim centre), Kamarpukur (birth place of Sri Ramakrishna) at Medinipur district, Gadiara (picnic spot) at Howrah district, Shantiniketan (work place of Rabindranath Tagore), Bakreshwar (pilgrim centre) at Birbhum district, Durgapur (industrial city) and Bardhaman at Bardhaman district; Mukutmanipur (dam & deer park), Bishnupur (ancient temples) at Bankura district, Ayodhya Hills at Purulia district, Murshidabad (historical palace & museum) at Murshidabad district, Gour and Pandua (historic town) at Malda district, Nawadweep and Mayapur (pilgrim centre) at Nadia district, Darjeeling, Mirik, Kalimpong, Kurseong, (famous for scenic beauty) at Darjeeling district, Jaldapara (wild reserve) and Dooars at Jalpaiguri district. X. Growth and Performance of Tourism Tourist arrival pattern is understandably an important indicator of prevailing demand scenario and that indirectly suggests the strength of tourism industry including the supply-side. Growing at a compounded annual growth rate (CAGR) of about 13 per cent, India's foreign exchange earnings from the tourism sector are likely to reach US $26 billion in 2015 from the current level of about $20 billion, as per apex industry body of the Associated Chambers of Commerce and Industry of India (ASSOCHAM). In terms of the India's share in the tourism receipts as per Market Research Division, Ministry of Tourism, Government of India, the country has increased its number of Foreign Tourist inflow from 58.9 lakhs in 2000 to 207.31 lakhs in 2012 and the domestic tourist recorded as 2201 lakhs in 2000 to 10363 lakhs in 2012. In the year 2012, as many as 207.31 lakhs foreign tourists visited India, out of which 12.19 lakhs are from West Bengal. In terms of the India's share in the tourism receipts in the Asia-Pacific region, India has increased its share from 3.2

Page 242

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

per cent in 2002 to about 5.5 per cent in 2012 and India has also improved its ranking from 13th to 7th in this regard. Tourist Inflow in India & West Bengal: 2000-2012 Year

Domestic Tourists (Lakhs)

Foreign Tourists (Lakhs)

Total Tourists (Lakhs)

2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

47.37 49.43 88.44 113.01 123.80 135.67 158.08 185.80 193.14 205.28 210.72 222.56 227.30

1.98 2.84 5.29 7.05 7.76 8.96 9.98 11.54 11.33 11.8 11.92 12.13 12.19

49.35 52.27 93.73 120.06 131.56 144.63 168.06 197.34 204.47 217.08 222.64 234.69 239.49

Total Domestic Tourists in India (Lakhs) 2201 2364 2669 3090 3662 3919 4623 5265 5629 5630 5631 8645 10363

WB Domestic Tourists Share (in %) 2.15 2.09 3.31 3.66 3.38 3.46 3.42 3.53 3.43 3.65 3.74 2.57 2.19

Total Foreign Tourists in India (Lakhs) 58.9 54.4 51.6 67.1 83.6 99.5 117.5 132.7 141.12 142.12 143.12 194.97 207.31

WB Foreign Tourists Share (in %) 3.36 5.22 10.25 10.51 9.28 9.01 7.54 8.70 8.03 8.30 8.33 6.22 5.88

Source: (i) (ii)

Market Research Division, Ministry of Tourism, Government of India. Interim Report, Identification of Tourism Circuits across India: West Bengal, April2012,Submitted to Ministry of Tourism, Government of India, By IL&FS Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd (IL&FS IDC), National Level Consultant, Gurgaon, Haryana.

Domestic & Foreign Tourist Visits in India: 2000-2012

Tourists in Lakhs

12000 10000 8000 6000

4000 2000

Index Total Foreign Tourists

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

Total Domestic Tourists

West Bengal is a land of splendid destination with rich cultural heritage, historical heritage, flora & fauna, spectacular beaches & mountains & wildlife. There are a few states in India with the variety that West Bengal has offered. Tourism, in the recent times, is one of the most happening sectors of the State. There has been an overall increase of about 385% growth of tourist inflow (both domestic and foreign) in West Bengal since the year 2000. Making significant strides in the tourism sector, West Bengal has improved its share in international tourism receipts during the course of past decade i.e. from about 3.36% in 2000 to about 5.88% in 2012. During 2003, the State recorded the highest share of about 10.51% of foreign tourists visiting India. On the other hand, the domestic tourist share in the State is increased from merely 2.15% in 2000 to 2.19% in 2012. Domestic & Foreign Tourist Visits in West Bengal: 2000-2012 250

Tourist in Lakhs

200

150

100

Index

Foreign Tourists Domestic Tourists

0 2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

Total Tourists

A statistics from the West Bengal State Tourism Department shows that there had been 49.35 lakhs tourists in the year 2000 while in 2012 the figure has shot up to 239.49 lakhs including both foreign and domestic tourist.

Page 243

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

West Bengal commands sixth highest share of about 5.88% per cent in total foreign tourist arrivals during 2012 in India. The number of foreign tourist arrival in WB has increased by 6.2 times during 2000-2012 i.e. from about 1.98 lakhs foreign tourists visiting WB in 2000 to about 12.19 lakhs foreign tourists in 2012 thereby registering a growth of over 515 per cent during this period. The domestic tourists’ arrival in the State recorded from 47.37 lakhs in 2000 to 227.30 lakhs in 2012 with the increase of about 380% during 2000-2012. The highest percentage share of domestic tourist in the State is during 2010 with 3.74% of the country’s total. % Share of Domestic & Foreign Tourists in West Bengal to Total India 14

Tourists in Percentage

12 10 8 6

Index

Domestic Tourists Foreign Tourists

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

The overall scenario thus emerging enables to suggest that tourism demand and supply in the State is very improving. West Bengal has the locational advantage of Kolkata international airport, which many tourists might be using as entry point for their movements in Eastern India. West Bengal has been the traditional entry point to Eastern India, the Northeast and the land-locked countries of Nepal, Bhutan and Bangladesh, which are easily accessible from the State. This geographical advantage perhaps explains in a large way why West Bengal consistently figures among the highest foreign tourist attractions in India. It is also home to two of India's major religious events, the annual Gangasagar mela and the world famous Iskon festival at Mayapur. It is therefore not surprising that West Bengal accounted for over 5.88 percent of the foreign tourists visiting India in 2011. XI. Challenges The major challenges are need to preserve the environment and natural resources, the need for education, proper understanding for both tourists and local people, and the need to generate a democratic movement which helps people at all levels to participate in tourism development. The Tourism Industry faces with various challenges in the field of human resources; one of the crucial issues in this regard is the quality of manpower. The industry is vitally faced with the demand for qualified quality personnel. One of the key areas in terms of tourism development in West Bengal is creation of a more appropriate form of tourism to replace “Mass Tourism”. Appropriate Tourism is a kind of tourism that is more favorable and beneficial to the local community and the challenge ahead for West Bengal’s tourism industry is to implement and establish Appropriate Tourism at the ground level. Hotel are mushrooming in India of different shapes and sizes without any proper care of the fragile environment or even basic security for the property and life of tourists. This is very dangerous to countries like India where tourism is going to be the mainstay for employment generation, social up-liftment and source for foreign exchange earnings. Now many state tourism corporations are also running hotels. No doubt, for booming domestic tourism, these establishments are rendering a very good service but equally these establishments are lacking required facilities. All the more they lack trained manpower. The conservation and sustainable use of natural, social and cultural resources is crucial. Therefore, tourism should be planned and managed within environmental limits and with due regard for the long term appropriate use of natural and human resources. Tourism should support a wide range of local economic activities, taking environmental costs and benefits into account, but it should not be permitted to become an activity which dominates the economic base of an area. Local communities should be encouraged and expected to participate in the planning, development and control of tourism with the support of government and the industry. Particular attention should be paid to involving indigenous people, women and minority groups to ensure the equitable distribution of the benefits of tourism. Tourism being a highly labour intensive industry, there should be an integrated HRD system with both public and private sector participation to develop human resources to meet the requirements of the industry. Tourists are also irritated on account of unwanted paper work, time wasting compliance of rules and regulations and redtapism in India. In addition to customs and immigration formalities, language barriers are also the major problems faced by the foreign visitors. The success of future tourism is intrinsically connected with the way in which the industry and the tourism system understand and incorporate the emerging critical trends that support its expansion. The most imperative

Page 244

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

factors for successful tourism development include product enhancement, marketing, regulations and human resource development. The role of the State is pivotal because a large number of tourism resources like foreshore lands on the coast, heritage monuments, forest and wild life, inland water bodies and major infrastructure like airports, roads, ports vest with it. XII. Future Prospect West Bengal aims to become a preferred tourism and tourism-related investment destination by leveraging its unique geographical setting along with its various tourism-related assets. It will develop necessary infrastructure and promote tourism in an integrated manner which will not only bring in more investment and further the socio-economic goals of the Government, but also ensure that all these are in conformity with the relevant acts, rules and regulations relating to environmental protection. The overall aim of the Tourism Department is to see that the tourism sector contributes towards improving the quality of life of people in general. The West Bengal tourism development presently follows the Tourism Policy of 2008, which aims:  To develop a portfolio of tourism products by utilizing its unique ecological, historical, cultural, religious, wildlife, sports, shopping, health care, educational and human assets.  To facilitate tourism by all segments, particularly the middle and lower income tourists, by making the tourist spots in the State more easily accessible through single-window facility at the State capital and at the district headquarters and on the internet. The West Bengal government is currently preparing to unveil a comprehensive 'Tourism Policy', “with a major thrust on creating a separate brand for West Bengal”. The state has begun its Beautiful Bengal campaign to sensitize tourists about the many attractions of the state, namely Hill Tourism in Darjeeling and Dooars, Ecotourism in Sunderbans, River Tourism, Kolkata Heritage Tourism, Beach Tourism along the coastline, etc. The state tourism department also hosts Tagore Literary Festival, Kolkata; Urban Heritage Conservation Festival, Kolkata; Tea Tourism Festival, Darjeeling; Hazarduall Utsav, Murshidabad; Digha Festival; Bishnupur Festival; and Music Festival, Darjeeling. The State has taken the Kolkata/Hooghly Riverfront Development as a priority for development as a major tourist attraction, which is being readied for implementation. In addition to existing tourist destinations, the state is taking special care to develop tourism in North Bengal, Digha and Sundarbans in a customised way. The State government is also finalizing plans to further develop a 'Buddhist Trail' so as to attract more foreign tourists in the state; among other things the proposal included a 10-day trip to cover this circuit by a state-of-the-art train like 'Palace on Wheels' twice a month. The Central and State Government must come up with more inclusive tourism policies and programmes to take the momentum forward and derive better synergy of tourism and development. There is no dearth of attractions, resources or manpower; rather the State has all of that in plenty and in huge diversity. Leveraging these vast resource bases of the state for building a qualitatively better and stronger tourism industry should provide a winning proposition for all stakeholders, especially the common man. XIII. Conclusions The success of an organization depends on its ability to affect continuous improvement and provide quality products and services to its customer. This will require every personnel in the organization to possess the requisite knowledge, skill and attitude. Proper identification of tourist segments and focused marketing efforts, with the help of professionals, should be undertaken. Only overall growth can help in improving revenue generation, which needs to grow in line with the additional capacity being set up by the hospitality industry. Tourism activities depend upon nature and natural heritage, it is essential to ensure that tourism development is ecologically sustainable –ecological process must not be neglected. Similarly tourism offers real experience of unique culture of the country and the State. Hence the development should ensure that social and cultural sustainable tourism development compatible with the culture and values of the local people. The agenda for action should concentrate around community participation in tourism development and planning, training of the personnel associated with tourism development so that they can provide quality services without devaluing the same. In the framework of action it is necessary to ensure that the benefits to the community are so spread out that the people perceive the benefits flowing to them. Similarly, there is need for a legal and procedural frame work that deals adequately with social evils like exploitation, child use, sex tourism, interference with heritage products etc. In conclusion, the path for department of accessible tourism is tough and one has to negotiate with many culpable challenges and bottlenecks. Perhaps, some of those are not difficult to deal with or manage. What would be needed is certain degree of commitment, earnest efforts and coordination on the part of direct stakeholders. When it comes to more complex problems involving considerable financial commitment and coordination, it would be necessary to institute suitable policy mechanisms and higher level of inter-department coordination mechanisms. XIV. Suggestions  Proper planning of master plans needs to be prepared with specific objectives be integrated with Assam’s overall economic and social development objective.

Page 245

Sherap Bhutia, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 239-246

 Proper development of infrastructure, tourist facilities, enhancement of communication networks etc.  All the information, instructions, suggestions should be made available in Braille and large print. Large print material should be placed at eye level.  All travel and tourism organisations should be advised to document the Factsheets on access enabling facilities in their premises and publicise them.  Tourism communication strategy should be such that accessible tourism information would be integral to all campaigns.  Realise and respect the value of environment, flora and fauna, monuments and cultural heritage.  Practice conservation of nature and culture as a way of life.  Research should be undertaken throughout all stages of tourism development and operation to monitor impacts, to solve problems and to allow local people and others to respond to changes and to take advantages of opportunities.  Zonal manpower resource centre should be formed to recognize tourism as a factor for regional development. These manpower resource development centres should conduct studies on the availability of skilled and semi-skilled human resources in their respective regions.  The quality of services given by hotels, tourist resorts and facilities en route must be supervised by experienced and knowledgeable managers. References [1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

Babu, Sutheeshna, (2008), Spatial Dimensions of Tourism in India A macro-level perspective. In S. Babu, S. Mishra and B.B. Parida (ed.), Tourism Development Revisited: Concepts, issues and challenges, Response Books- Sage Publishers, New Delhi, pp. 285-305. Berno, T. and Bricker, K. (2001): Sustainable tourism development: the long road from theory to practice, International Journal of Economic Development 3(3), pp. 1-18. Brown, Frances and Hall, Derek (2008) ‘Tourism and Development in the Global South: the issues’, Third World Quarterly 29 (5), pp. 839 – 849. Cronin, L. (1990): A strategy for tourism and sustainable developments, World Leisure and Recreation 32(3), pp. 12-18. Dodds, R. & Butler, R. (2010): Barriers to implementing sustainable tourism policy in mass tourism destinations, Tourismos, Vol. 5, No.1, pp. 35-54. Government of India, India Tourism Statistics (2010), Ministry of Tourism, Market Research Division, New Delhi, India. Government of India, Indian Tourism Statistics at a Glance (2011), Department of Tourism, New Delhi, India. Government of India, Indian Tourism Statistics at a Glance (2012), Department of Tourism, New Delhi, India. Hubrecht, J. & Teare, R. (1993): A strategy for partnership in total quality service. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 5(3), pp. 1-5. Interim Report, Identification of Tourism Circuits across India: West Bengal, April – 2012, IL&FS Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd (IL&FS IDC), National Level Consultant, Under Ministry of Tourism, Govt. of India. IITTM- ICC Report, Travel and Tourism Industry in India: Looking East, Travel India 2011, Indian Institute of Tourism and Travel Management (An Organisation of Ministry of Tourism), Gwalior, India. Kreishan, F. M. M (2010): Tourism and Economic Growth: The Case of Jordan”, European Journal of Social Sciences, Vol.15, No.2, pp. 63-68. Liu, Z. (2003): Sustainable tourism development: a critique, Journal of Sustainable Tourism 11(3), pp. 459-475. Report, India as a Hotspot for Inbound Tourism: Reigniting Destination Appeal, Federation of Indian Chambers of Commerce and Industry (FICCI), Kolkata, India. Sharpley, R. (2000): Tourism and sustainable development: exploring the theoretical divide, Journal of Sustainable Tourism 8(1), pp. 1-19. Tosun, C., (1999): “An Analysis of Contributions International Inbound Tourism to the Turkish Economy”, Tourism Economics, Vol.5, pp. 217-250.

Websites [1] [2]

Banglar Mukh, the official portal of the West Bengal State Government, retrieved on 10th May, 2014 from http://wb.gov.in/portal/banglarMukh The official portal of Government of West Bengal, Department of Tourism, retrieved on 10 th May, 2014 from http://www.wbtourism.gov.in/

Page 246

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

EARLY CENTRES OF ORIGIN OF AGRICULTURE IN THE MIDDLE GANGA PLAIN Dr. Shitala Prasad Singh Associate Professor, Deptt. of Ancient History, Archaeology & Culture, D.D.U. Gorakhpur University Gorakhpur, India The Ganga plain has played a major role in the origin and development of the history and Archaeology of India. It is divisible into three main units: (1) Upper Ganga plain (ii) Middle Ganga Plain and (iii) Lower Ganga Plain. The Ganga and its tributaries, the major drainage systems provide a vast fertile alluvium track and serve as a strong base for early human occupations in Middle Ganga plain (Singh : 1971-183-193). The Middle Ganga plain (240 30’ N-270 50’ N. and 810 47’ E-87050’ E) measuring about 144, 409 sq.km. is bounded by the Himalayan tarai in the north, Vindhyan plateau in the south, Ganga-Yamuna confluence in the west and BiharBengal border in the east. On the basis of the river system, the middle Ganga plain is sub-divided into the Ganga plain North and Ganga Plain south. The Ganga plain north is further sub-divisible into (1) the GangaGhaghara doab (ii) the Ghaghara-Gandak interfluve, (iii) Gandak-Kosi interfluve and (iv) Kasi-Mahananda interfluve and the latter, i.e. the Ganga Plain south into (1) West of Karmamsa (ii) Karmanasa east interfluve (iii) tower son valley and finally (iv) the Magadha-Anga plain (sing 1971 : 190-92).

The Middle Ganga plain was a meeting point of different cultures of north, south, east and west. The divine gospels contained in some of the Upanisads, were conceived and preached in this region. It is the land associated with the story of Ramayana. The deductive portions of the Mahabharata are supposed to have got their final shape in this region. It was also a nerve centre of the political, economic and religious upheavals of 6th Century B.C. and witnessed the second urbanization of the subcontinent.

Page 247

Dr. Shitala Prasad Singh, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 247-251

The middle Ganga plain is now credited with one of the early centres of origin of agriculture and domestication, which paved the way for development of the Neolithic and Chalcolithic Cultures and Civilization in the early Iron age in the area. The evidence of such transition in India is found in the Mesolithic Cultures, which suggests that the agriculture and domestication was a slow developmental process, extending across several millennia but it had a revolutionary effect on human history. The evidence of wild rice, millet, jujube etc. from excavations of the Mesolithic sites and scenes of plants in the rock paintings in the hilly regions indicate that the plant food was included in the Mesolithic diet. A good number of grinding stones from many of the sites also suggest that the wild grains were pasted for consumption (Misra 2002, 2007-2008). Their artifact inventory comprises microliths and debitage, plenty of sand stone fragments and other raw materials brought from the Vindhyan region. Fragments of querns, mullers, hammerstones, etc. fashioned on sand stone, quartzite and basalt have been reported. This indicate that the Mesolithic people used to collect wild seeds, edible roots, etc. for supplementing their dietary items. On this context the occurrence of wild rice from the late Mesolithic phase at Chopani Mando assumes considerable importance. The changing climatic conditions during early and middle phase of Holocene in the middle Ganga plain played a significant role in the evolution of early farming cultures. The excavations and explorations conducted during the last five decades by university of Allahabad, Banaras Hindu University, Deen Dayal Upadhyay University Gorakhpur, University of Patna, U.P. state Archaeology Department and Patna circle of the Archaeology Department and Patna circle of the Archaeological survey of India have furnished a complete cultural sequence of the region- Epipalaeolithic, Mesolithic, Neolithic, Chalcolithic, Early Iron Age, NBPW, Sunga-Kushana, Gupta and Early Medieval periods. Neolithic Settlement: The first stage of food production in human history is termed Neolothic world wide. The pustoral and farming practices of this early stage are characterized by incipient traits. The location of the Neolothic settlements near the flood plain of the rivers indicate that the Neolithic people were aware of the role of river for cultivation. These are sedentary settlements, generally situated in shallow basin-shaped bluff surrounded by natural ridges. Subsistence: The subsistence of the Neolithic people was based on the exploration of plants and animals, by domestication as well as by hunting and gathering. The evidence of cultivation of plants has been found in the form of rice husk used as degraissant in the pottery as well as charred grains of rice of domesticated variety. The cultivated variety of rice has been identified as Oryza Sativa and wild variety are oryza nivara and Oryza rufigona (Vishnu-Mittra and Sharman.d.) The available evidence, thus, indicates that besides agriculture and domestication the Neolithic people of the Mid Ganga plain also practiced hunting, catching and fishing. Material Culture: The ceramic industry of the Neolithic Gangetic plain is rich and varied. The available evidence indicates that in the early stage of the culture as indicated at Chirand, Lahuradeva, Jhusi and Hetapatti people sere using hand made pottery but subsequently the slow wheel appears to have been used for the purpose. Occurrence of painted shards has been reported from Imlidih Khurd, Lahuradeva, Chirand and Senuwar. The cord-impressed were has been found in Neolithic context at Chirand, Sohagaura, Lahuradewa, Jhusi and Hetapatti in the Middle Gagetic plain. The salient feature of each of the five excavation are enumerated below. Chirand Chirand is situated on the confluence of Ganga and Ghaghara rivers, about 11km east of Chapra in district Saran. The excavation at the this site was conducted by the Patna University and the Deptt. of Archaeology and Museums, Government of Bihar. This excavation was conducted by B.P. Sinha and his team intermittently for about ten seasons. Waina: The ancient settlement of Waina (Lat. 250 45’ 5” N; Long. 840 0’ 5” E) is situated Ballia, U.P. on the left bank of old bed of Chhoti Sarju, a tributary of the Ganga. Khairadih: Located on the right bank of river Ghaghara, a tributary of the Ganga in district Ballia, Khairadih contains the relics of a township of the Kushana period. The affluent nature the settlement is fully born out by the Kusana period cultural remains in the settlement pattern, especially in its town planning. The horizontal excavation of 1980-86 revealed well laid town planning with roads running in the cardinal direction joined by lanes at right angles. These are flanked by houses, some of them having underground structures, possibly for storage. The roads are brick-paved with traces of rut-marks at places. The use of full sized bricks the broad square pillared structure underline the significance of a particular building that housed coins (Singh, 1990-91 : 78-86) Bhunadih: The ancient settlement at Bhunadih (Lat. 250 59’ 10”, Long. 840 5’ 10”) is located 2 Km. east of Janwan ont he right bank of Bahara nala, about 28 Km. north of Ballia town on the Ballia-Sikanderpur road. The mound extends in an area of about 4 acres and the extant height gradually rises to well over a metre.

Page 248

Dr. Shitala Prasad Singh, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 247-251

Sohgaura : The ancient settlement of Sohgaura (Lat. 260 30’ 30” N ; Long. 830 15’ 25” E.) is situated at the confluence of the Rapti and Ami rivers in a district Gorakhpur. Imlidih Khurd: The ancient settlement of Imlidih (Lat. 26030’30” ; Long. 830 12’ 5”) is an inconspicuous, featureless mound located on the left bank of Kuwano, a tributary of Ghaghara river. It was excavated during 1992, 1993 and 1995 by us (Singh 1991-92 ; 1992-1993; 1993-94). Dhuriapar: The ancient settlement of Dhuriapar (Lat. 26 0 15’ 25” N. Long. 830 14’ 31” E) is situated on the left bank of the Kuwano river about 46 Kms. south of Gorakhpur. Lahuradewa: The ancient settlement of Lahuradewa (Lat. 260 46’ N; Long. 820 57’ E.) is located in Kuwano-Ami Doab in district Sant Kabir Nagar. It is about 5 Km. south to the Bhujaini-crossing situated on the BastiGorakhpur Highway No. 28. Jhusi: The ancient settlement of Jhusi (Lat. 250 26’ 10” N.; Long 810 54’ 30” E( is situated at the confluence of the Ganga and Yamuna in Allahabad district have revealed a long and continuous cultural sequence ranging from Mesolithic to early medieval periods through Chalcolithic, pre N.B. PW with iron and N.B.P.W. periods. Hetapatti: The ancient settlement of Hetapatti (Lat. 250 29’ 0” N; Long. 800 55’ 31’ E.) is situated Allahabad, U.P. on the left bank of the Ganga. The explorations conducted in the eastern part of the mid Ganga valley during the last five decades have resulted in identification of several Neolithic settlements, and the region is emerging as one of the independent centres of origins of rice cultivation. Earlier the traces of early farming culture in the middle Ganga plain were found in three geographical zones; in Bihar, in the northern slopes of the Vindhyas and in the Saryupar plains of eastern Uttar Pradesh (Singh 1998). Primary context sites pertaining to the Neolithic culture have been reported in eastern Uttar Pradesh and Bihar. The important excavated sites in Uttar Pradesh include Jhusi (Misra et al. 2002-2003) and Hetapatti (Pal and Gupta 2005) in Allahabad, Bhunadih (Singh and Singh 1997-98) and Waina (Singh and Singh 1995-96) in Ballia (Singh et al. 1994-95), Sohgaura (IAR 1974-75: 4647, Chaturvedi 1985) and Imlidih Khurd (Singh 1992-93, 1993-94) in Gorakhpur, Lahuradewa (Tewari et al. 2001-2002, 2002-2003, 2004-2005, 2007-2008) in Sant Kabirnagar district, while Chirand (IAR 1981-82 : 1314, Verma 1971, Narain 1970, Varma 1998, Sinha 1994, Roy 1989) in Saran, Chechar Kutubpur (IAR 1977-78 : 17-18) in Vaisali, Taradih (IAR 1984-85 : 9-10, IAR 1986-87: 23-24, IAR 1987-88: 9-11) in Gaya, Maner (IAR 1985-86: 11-12, 1986-87 : 25-26, IAR 1987-88: 11-12, IAR 1988-89: 7-8) in Patna and Senuwar (Singh 1990, 1997, 2001, 2004) in Rohtas district in Bihar. Most of these excavated sites are milti-culture sites having yielded archaeological relics ranging from Neolithic to early historical periods (Misra-2007). Table: Neolithic Sites in the Middle Ganga Plain Name of the Site Jhusi (Lat 250 26’ 10” N Long 810 54’ 30” E) Hetapatti (Lat 250 29’ 0” N. Long 810 55’ 31” E) Bhunadih (Lat 250 19’ 10” N Long 840 5’ 11” E) Waina (Lat 250 45’ 5” N Long 840 5” E) Lahuradewa (Lat 260 46’ N Long 820 57’ E) Sohgaura (Lat 260 30’ 30” N; Long 830 15’ 25” E) Imlidih (Lat 260 30’ 30” N, Long 830 12’ 5” E) Chirand (Lat 250 45’ 5” N Long 840 50’ E) Chechan-Kutubpur (Lat 250 30’ 10” N, Long 850 30’ 45” E) Taradih (Lat 240 42’ N Long

Location Allahabad, U.P., on the confluence of the Ganga and Yamuna Allahabad, U.P., on the left bank of the Ganga. Ballia, U.P., on the right bank of Bahera nala, a tributary of Ghaghara. Ballia, U.P. on the left bank of old bed of Chhoti Sarju (Tons), a tributary of the Ganga. Sant Kabir Nagar, U.P. on a horseshoe lake. Gorakhpur, U.P., on the confluence of Ami and Rapti. Gorakhpur, U.P., on the left bank of the Kuwano river, a tributary of the Ghaghara. Saran, Bihar, on the confluence of the Ghaghara and Ganga. Vaishali, Bihar, on the left bank of the Ganga. Gaya, Bihar, South-west of

Excavated by University of Allahabad

Thickness 1.5m

Reference Misra et al. 2002-03

University of Allahabad Banaras Hindu University

60 cm

Pal and Gupta 2005

About 50 cm

Singh and Singh 199798

Banaras Hindu University

About 40 cm

Singh and Singh 199596

State Archaeology, U.P. Gorakhpur University Banaras Hindu University

45 cm

Tewari et al. 2002-2003

60 cm

Chaturvedi 1985

50-60 cm

Singh 1992-93

State Archaeology, Bihar and Patna University. ASI, Patna Circle

3.5m

S.R. Roy 1989

State Archaeology,

70 cm

IAR 1977-78 17-18

IAR 1984-85 9-10, IAR

Page 249

Dr. Shitala Prasad Singh, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 247-251 850 0’ E)

Mahabodhi temple.

Maner (Lat 250 30’ 45” N Long 840 45’25” E)

Patna, Bihar, on the bank of the Ganga.

Patna University

3.45

Senuwar (Lat 240 56” N Long 83” 56’ E)

Rohtas, Bihar, Right bank of Kudra river.

Banaras Hindu University.

1.50m

Bihar

1986-87 23-24, IAR 1987-88 9-11 IAR 1985-86 11-12, 1986-87, 25-26, IAR 1987-88, 11-12, IAR 1988-89, 7-8. IAR 1986-87; 26-28

Table: Showing the Main Ceramics, Shapes and Painting Traditions of Neolithic Stage in middle Ganga Plain Sites Sohgaura

Cultural Periods Pd. I

Chirand

Pd. I

Red ware, Grey ware (in less quantity), Black, Black & Red ware (largely handmade and rarely made by turn-table method.

Imlidih Khurd

Pd. I

Corded ware and plain Red ware.

Lahuradeva

Pd. I A Pd. I B

Seguwar

Pd. IA

Pd. IB

Ceramics

Reference

Corded ware, Rusti-cated ware and small quantity of Red ware

Chaturvedi 1985 : 103-04 Verma 1970-71:21

Mainly course variety of Red ware, Black and Red ware which includes hand and wheel turned (slow wheel) varieties Course variety of Red ware, Black and Red ware with few sherds of Grey ware and Black were. Red ware and Burnished Red ware, Burnished Grey ware,Cord-impressed and Rusticated ware, crude Black and Red ware. All these have been distinguished mainly on the basis of surface treatment and other technological details. All these are mainly wheel made, although hand-made are also found. All the preceding (IA) ceramics and common shapes are continue with improvement of surface treatment.

Singh 1992-93:2324

Tewari et.al. 20023:39-43

Singh 1988-89. 617.

Jhusi

Pd. I

Cord impressed ware, Rusticated ware, Burnished Red ware, Burnished black ware and crude Black and Red ware. The first three may considered as sub groups of Red ware. Pots are thick to medium in fabric and ill fired. Core of the pots are blackish, Grayish and occasionally reddish. Clay used for making pots is not well levigated and uneven surface of pots ware indicating that these pots are handmade.

Misra et.al. 2009:23

Hetapatti

Pd. I

Hand made pottery characterised by the Cord-impressed ware, Rusticated ware, ordinary Red ware and occasionally Burnished Red ware.

Pal 2007-08. 273

Recent excavations of the early farming culture sites in the Gangetic Plain have revealed interesting evidence of a center of early origin of agriculture in India. The excavations at Lahuradewa in Sant Kabir Nagar district and at Jhusi in Allahabad district have revealed a Neolithic culture characterized by mostly handmade ceramic industry, bone tools, beads of semi-precious stone, micro disc-beads of steatite, circular hut floors, cultivated and wild cereals and domesticated and wild animal bones. The comparative study of the culture with that of the Vindhyas indicates that its origin lies in the Vindhyan Neolithic culture. The early chronology indicates that it was one of the early centres of origin of agriculture. The problem of the antiquity of the Neolithic culture of the region is still not finally settled but now we have some relevant 14 C dates from the excavated Neolithic sites of the Vindhyas and Ganga Plain Considering three of C-14 dates reading 4530 185 BC (PRL 101), Koldihwa as dependable, the culture was dated to the 7 th – 6th millennium BC (Sharma et al. 1980). But being the only site of such antiquity doubts were raised by several scholars. The 14C date belonging to the transitional phase of the Neolithic to Chalcolithic at Koldihwa is 1440  120 BC (PRL 223). The absolute dates obtained from Mahagara also indicated a late date to the culture, though these dates have the possibility of contamination of samples. Two TL dates reading 2265 BC and 1616 BC and four 14C date reading 1440  150 BC (PRL 409). 1330  120 (PRL 408), 1440  100 BC (PRL 407) and 1480  110 BC (BSIP) have been obtained from the samples from Mahagara. These dates are not consistent with the stratigraphy possibly due to contamination of samples. In the light of calibrated 14C date obtained from Kunjhun, reading 3530-3335, the beginning of the Vindhyan Neolithic culture was proposed to 4th millennium BC. (Clark and Khanna 1989). Three 14C date have come to light from recent excavations at Lahuradewa in the middle Gangetic Plain, which read as 5320  90 BP (BS 1951) (cal B.C. 4220, 4196, 4161) AND 6290  160 BP (BS 1966) (cal BC 5298) (Tewari et al. 2001-2002, 2002-2003). Recently three relevant 14C dates have been obtained from Tokwa. When calibrated these read 6591 BC (BS-2417), 5976 BC (BS-2369), 4797 BC (BS2464). An AMS 14C date for a carbonized domesticated rice would push the antiquity of the Neolithic culture at Lahuradewa in 7th millennium BC (Tewari et. al. 2004-2005: 40). From the Neolithic horizon of Jhusi three 14C dates have been obtained. These dates when calibrated, read 7477 BC (BS-2526), 5837 BC (BS-2524) and 6196

Page 250

Dr. Shitala Prasad Singh, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 247-251

BC (BS-2525). The earliest date obtained from the site would put the beginning of the Neolithic culture of the site in 8th millennium B.C. Regarding the span of the Neolithic culture, observations of P. Singh are very significant, domestication was a process which took considerable time and domestication of each type of domesticable animal and plant species would have taken place in different ecological niches at different times’ (Singh 1991:5, Singh 2002: 128). In the Ganga Plain Neolithic culture and Neolithic way of life lasted for a long time starting from 8th – 7th millennium B.C. to 3rd – 2nd millennium B.C. Acknowledgements: I am extremely grateful to Prof. J.N. Pal, ex-Head of Department of Ancient History, Culture & Archaeology, Allahabad University, Allahabad for his discussions on the various aspects of this paper. References Allchin, B. and R. Allchin 1997. Origin of a civilization : The Prehistory and Early archaeology of South Asia, New Delhi : Viking Penguin India. Binford, Leuis 1968, Post-Pleistocene Adaptations. In New Perspectives in Archaeology. S.R. Binford and L.R. Binford (Eds.) pp. 313-41. Chicago : Aldine. Clark, J. Desmond and Gurucharan S. Khanna, 1989. The site of Kunjhun II, Middle Son Valley, and its Relevance for the Neolithic of Central India. In old problems and New Perspectives in the Archaeology of South Asia. Wis consin Archaeological Reports Vol. 2. J.M. Kenoyer (Ed.) pp 29-46 Madison : Department of Anthropology, University of Wisconsin. Cockburn, J. 1879 notes on Stone Age Implements from Khasi Hills and the Banda and Vellore Districts, Journals of the Asiatic Society of Bengal XLVIII, pt. 2. Harvey, E.L., D. Fuller, J.N. Pal and M.C. Gupta 2005. Early Agriculture of the Neolithic Vindhyas (North-Central India). South Asian Archaeology 2003 ate Franke Vogt and Hans-Joachim Weisshaar (Eds.), pp. 329-334. Aachen : Linden Soft Verlog E.K. Indian Archaeology : A Review 1962-63, pp. 39-41, 1963-64, pp. 57-58, 1971-72, p.49, 1973-74 pp. 26-27, 1975-76, p.45, 1984-85, pp. 1112. Joglekar, P.P., J. N. Pal, V.D. Misra and M.C. Gupta 2008 Faunal Remains Recovered from the Neolithic Phase at Jhusi District Allahabad, Uttar Pradesh. Puratattva 38:251-259. Misra, V.D. 2002. Origin, chronology and transformation of the Mesolithic Culture in India. In Mesolithic India. V.D. Misra and J.N. Pal (Eds.) pp 447-464. Allahabad : Department of Ancient History, culture and Archaeology University of Allahabad. Misra, V.D. 2007. Stone Age cultures, their chronology and Beginnings of Agriculture in the North-Central India. Man and Environment 32 (1) : 1-14. Misra, V.D., J.N. Pal and M.C. Gupta 2004. Signifance of Recent Excavations at Tokwa in the Vindhya and Jhusi in the Gangetic Plain. Journal of Interdisciplinary Studies in History and Archae-ology 1(1) : pp. 120-127. Pal, J.N. 1977. ‘Bhartiya Nava Pashanik Sanskritiyan (Hindi). In ‘Bhartiya Pragaitihasik Sanskritiyan (Hindi) R.K. Verma pp. 272-282. Allahabad : Paramjyoti Prakashan. Pal J.N. 2008 Recent excavations at Tokwa : Fresh light ont he early farming culture of the Vindhyas History of Science, Philosophy and culture in Indian civilization (General Ed. D.P. Chattopadhyaya) Volume V Part I, History of Agriculture in India (upto C. 1200 A.D.). Lallanji Gopal and V.C. Srivastava (Eds.), pp. 48-69, New-Delhi. Concept Publishing Company. Pal. J.N. and M.C. Gupta 2005. Excavations at Hetapatti (Allahabad District). Some Preliminary observations Journal of Interdisciplinary Studies in History and Archaeology 2(1) (Summer 2005) : 163-168. Pokharia, A.K., J.N. Pal and Alka Srivastava 2009. Plant macro remains from Neolithic Jhusi in Ganga Plain : evidence for grain-based agriculture. Current science, Vol. 97, No. 4, 25 August 2009, pp. 564-572. Possehl, G.L. 1988. Radio-carbon dates from South Asia, Man and Environment Vol. XII, pp. 169-196. Singh, P. 2002. The Neolithic cultures of Northern and Eastern India. In Indian Archaeology in Retrospect volume I : Prehistory (Archaeology of Possehl, G.L. and P.C. Rissman 1992, Chronology of prehistoric India : From Earliest times to Iron Age, Chronology in old world Archaeology (ed. R.E. Ehrich), Vol. I. P. 63. South Asia) S. Settar and Ravi Korisettar (Eds.) pp. 127150. New Delhi : Indian Council of Historical Research and Manohar Publishers. Singh, B.P. 1997. Neolithic and Chalcolithic Pottery of Middle Ganga Plain : A case study of Senuwar. Ancient Ceramics (Historical Enquiries and Scientific Approaches) P.C. Pant and Vidula Jayaswal (Eds.) pp. 3.33. New Delhi : Agam Kala Prakashan. Singh, P. 1993-94 Further Excavations at Imlidih Khurd-1993. Pragdhara 4 : 41-48. Singh, P. and A.K. Singh 1995-96. Trial Excavations at Waina, District Ballia (U.P.), Pragdhara : 41-61. Singh, P and A.K. Singh 1997-98. Trial excavations at Bhunadih, District Ballia (U.P.) Pragdhara 8 : 11-29. Singh, Shitala Prasad, 1996, Palaeo-Environment and Prehistoric Cultures in the Adwa Valley, Allahabad. Sinha, H.P. 1994 Archaeological and Cultural History of Bihar, (with special reference to Neolithic Chirand). New Delhi : Ramanand Vidya Bhawan. Tewari, Rakesh, R.K. Srivastava and K.K. Singh 2001-2002. Excavations at Lahuradewa, District Sant Kabirnagar, Puratattva 32 : 54-62. Tewari, Rakesh, R.K. Srivastava, K.K. Singh, K.S. Saraswat and I.B. Singh 2002-2003. Preliminary Report of the Excavations at Lahuradewa, District Sant Kabirnagar, U.P. 2001-2002 : wider Archaeological Implications. Pragdhara 13:37-68. Tewari, Rakesh, R.K. Srivastava, K.S. Saraswat, I.B. Singh, K/K/ Singh 2007-2008. Early farming at Lahuradewa Pragdhara 18 : 348-373. Thapar, B.K. 1965, Neolithic Problem in India, In Indian Prehistory : 1964 V.N. Mishra and M.S. Mate (Eds.) pp. 87-112. Poona. Deccan College Post Graduate and Research Institute. Verma, R.K. 1989, Pre- Agricultural Mesolithic society of the Ganga Valley, P. 55-58 in old problems and New perspectives in the Archaeology of South Asia.

Page 251

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Integrated Corporate Communication Dr. Rachna Rastogi Department of English, Institute of Applied Sciences &Humanities GLA University, Mathura (U.P.)-281406, India Abstract: There most prevalent notion in the management world today is; that the future of any corporation vitally depends on how it is viewed by key stakeholders, investors, patrons, its human resources, and members of the community in which the company operates. Globalization and commercial crises have further strengthened this faith. CEOs and senior decision-makers and policy makers of many huge organizations and multinationals consider protecting their company’s reputation to be ‘critical’ and view it as one of their most imperative objective. This objective of building, maintaining and protecting the company’s reputation is actually the nucleus task of corporate communication practitioners. However, despite the importance the task and contribution of corporate communication is, in many companies, still far from being fully understood. In this regard Media and marketing have brought ground-breaking changes in all facets like politics finance advertizing and business world. Modes of communication have also undergone striking transformation; information floats like air in the atmosphere and Communication being the vital source of building rapport with clients and customer given a new dimension to the corporate or business world. Talking about the consideration of media reforms, it has empowered marketing scenario drastically. Success of any corporate depends largely on its communicational strategies. Corporate communication is a fine art where passion and intelligence both plays are required in perfect harmony. it advocates the culture of organization with an objective to fetch and retain clientele by building corporate image. Today because of rapidly changing technology and instant media coverage, any corporate catastrophe is uncovered within seconds, and is uploaded on web for its thorough revelation, around 8o percent coverage of any communication reaches to the masses, at a faster rate in a day or two using television as a rapid means and to the rest of the population it is reached via radio/ FM, bulletin, brochure, press release, and above everything through social networking sites. This sophisticated media environment has created the need for more planned communicational strategies, Therefore, any communication from organization should be circulated so efficiently and with paramount care, that it could leave a long lasting notion on the minds of its viewers and readers. Thus this paper focuses on the recent style and strategies devised for effective corporate communication. Key words: Corporate, communication, strategies, catastrophe, harmony, accountability, empowered, information-flow, revelation, masses. Rapid revelation of any event some time results in quick and constructive fame, but sometimes contrary to instant reward it leads to crisis and torment the reliability of company, typically brought by hostile or negative media attention. This situation can be any sort of legal dispute, burglary, mishap catastrophe, fire, flood or manmade failure that could be credited to company’s name and fame. It can also be a state of affairs where in the eyes of the media or general public, company did not respond to one of the above state in the suitable behavior. Every association is vulnerable to crises. It is an era of stiff competition where stakeholders are well aware about each and every slightest move of its associations. Every single word uttered by the corporate member is evaluated in realistic framework. This explanation is not all surrounding but can acclimatize companies with a state where employees may need to take calculative action in order to minimize the catastrophe. If handled correctly the turmoil can be minimized. On the contrary it takes years and years to retain a good-will in the market but minutes to wipe-out its recognition. For minimizing the anarchy decision-makers have to be equipped with intellect and wit for what to do in the time of emergency but also what to say; ensuring that their response is professionally synchronized and morally fair. If the organization is not prepared to face the crises, result can be devastating and loss can be irretrievable. One thing which is critical in the time of crisis is to inform about the event clearly, quickly and accurately. If this is done unmistakably commotion can be minimized. I. Introduction Devastation, crisis or adversity is a situation that alarms the goodwill of a company, typically brought by hostile or depressing media attention. This situation can be any sort of lawful dispute, theft, mishap disaster, fire, flood or manmade breakdown that could be credited to company’s name and fame. It can also be a state of affairs

Page 252

Rachna Rastogi, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 252-255

where in the eyes of the media or general public, company did not respond to one of the above state in the suitable behavior. Every association is vulnerable to crises. It is an era of stiff competition where stakeholders are well aware about each and every slightest move of its associations. Every single word uttered by the corporate member is evaluated in realistic framework. This explanation is not all encompassing but can acclimatize companies with a state where employees may need to take calculative action in order to minimize the catastrophe. If handled suitably the turmoil can be minimized. On the contrary it takes years and years to maintain a good-will in the market but minutes to obliterate its recognition. For minimizing the chaos decision-makers have to be geared up not only for what to do in the time of crisis but also what to say; ensuring that their response is professionally coordinated and ethically sound. If the organization is not prepared to face the crises, result can be devastating and loss can be irrevocable. One thing which is crucial in the time of crisis is to inform about the event clearly, swiftly and accurately. If this is done unmistakably commotion can be minimized. Developing Team understanding for Administering Emergency Companies to meet any contingency should have a team vital to recognize what measures should be taken in the time of disaster. The team should consist of persons who are significant to the situation. Team should include as a minimum the CEO, the chief of Public Relations, the Vice President, the Senior manager from the division in charge of the milieu who was involved in the situation that has brought about the calamity, the safety and security officer, the organization Lawyer, and anyone else who might be able to shed some light on the situation such as eye witnesses. The function of this team is to come up with a calculated strategic plan and decide who should be the representative to put the matter before media and public. A copy of the management recall schedule should be attached and should encompass cellular phone numbers and pager number which should be issued to the chief and team members). As we know that crisis is not always at the most suitable time and place. A complete management list is suggested as nobody knows who may be needed. Once the crisis communication team is selected a list should be made of the people on the team and what each team member is responsible for. This document contains a sample form. In addition to the crisis communication team the Public Relations or Communications department should be supplemented with proficient people who can answer phone calls and if required escort media because answering to the calls from media promptly is essential. As soon as possible a prepared statement should be given to this staff. This statement should be accurate and reasonable such as "Details are still being gathered but there will be a press conference before 5:00, give me your name and number and I will call you back to let you know when." Accountability of Administering Communication team One of the first responsibilities of the crisis communication team should be to decide the suitable positioning or message to tackle the emergency. This is where "inform correctly, closely and honestly" begins. It is always best when a mistake has been made to acknowledge it up front, and begin doing whatever is possible to re-establish credibility and poise with internal and external audiences. This may be difficult for senior management to do, especially if the Lawyers are involved since it is their job to reduce the ultimate legal cost to the company. However, if crises team does some homework legal costs can be minimized, because the first and foremost goal of the team is to protect the reliability and reputation of the Company in the market.  On no account slouch or speak ill for anybody, don’t refuse or hide your/ company’s concern.  Don’t ignore the problem hiding the state of affairs will only make it worse.  Don't let the lawyers make the verdict. While they are fine interpreter, it may cause the crisis to go up.  The cause of almost all crises fall into two broad categories: deliberate acts and acts of lapse. Task of Administering Communication team: It is important to step out the role of the team members in the company and place the most reliable consistent and accountable person in the situation as an external interrogator to view the crisis from the eye of the public. Ignoring the situation will only make the situation worse. Examples of categories to consider for positioning are:  Human error  Organizational error  Illegal dealings  Ignominious supervision  Loathsome quality control  Ill-treatment of confidential information  Errors of verdict  Insufficient operating procedures So bearing in mind the Good will of company and its consequences state any comments. Keep in mind that people tend to remember what they hear first and last. Selecting spokesperson

Page 253

Rachna Rastogi, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 252-255

One individual should be designated as the primary spokesperson to signify the Company, he should be skilled enough to make official statements and answer media questions throughout the crisis. A back-up to the designated spokesperson should also be prepared to fill the gaps or the primary information to avoid errors in interpreting the event by the spokesperson. In addition to the chief spokesperson and the backup spokesperson, individuals who will serve as technical experts or advisors should also be nominated. These resources might include a financial expert, an engineer, and a leader in the community or anyone to whom company considers necessary during a specific kind of crisis. This will take some brainstorming by the crisis communication team since what is needed may not always be apparent. The spokesperson should be technically competent and emotionally established. Person devoid of interpersonal skill cannot effectively sustain work climate. He must posses high individual energy with personal integrity and affirmative work ethic. Persuation and critical thinking alongwith sound communication skill mentoring relationship which improves judgmental skill or skill for leading change.Thus the internal communications personnel should be expert, and must have strong conviction and confidence so that he can help in generate support and trust of public.  At ease in front of a TV camera and with reporters, if possible, experienced in handling media,  Capable in directing reply to other related topic too,  Expert in identifying key points, able to communicate explicitly without using jargon, and must be equipped with enormous vocabulary.  Well-informed about the organization and be able to establish fidelity with the media,  Experienced enough to project confidence to the audience, suitable in regard to diction, appearance and appeal, genuine, straightforward and credible, accessible to the media  He should be able to assist media interviews, and expert enough to remain calculative unruffled and composed in panick and tensed situations. In addition to the designated representative, it can be anticipated that other parties concerned in the catastrophe; police, fire department, health officials, etc. should have back up in line with the spokesperson. Media Policies and Procedures Select a place to be used as a media center. It should be at some distance from offices of the crisis communication team, spokesperson and emergency operations center to ensure that media are not in the middle of the action. Locations for interviews and press briefings should be decided by the crisis communications team. Don't change the rules that are already established for the media. If the media are currently required to be escorted then during a crisis they should be required to be escorted. These things should be considered and preparations made now to find people who can escort media during a catastrophe. If there are special circumstances that would require them to be escorted such as a safety hazard, they should be advised of this up front. Any change in the way the media is dealt with during a crisis may change the views of the reporter. It is important that they feel that you aren't trying to hide anything. However, remember that reporters have the right to interview anyone they want to and if they don't get the answers they want from you they will get them somewhere. They are all after the scoop. They all want a different angle than the reporter standing next to them. They will try for that scoop with you. If the possibility is there to provide them with what they want, consider it very carefully. All media should be treated equally. What is given to one (such as access to an area affected by the crisis) should be available to all media. Practicing Tough Questions A crisis situation is always difficult when dealing with the media. Therefore, tough questions and rehearsals are necessary to help the spokesperson prepare.  It is imperative, at the onset of the crisis, that the spokesperson, backup and advisors spend some time rehearsing  Prepared statements and answers to possible "tough" questions that may be asked by reporters.  If possible, similar preparations should be conducted prior to each media interview, briefing or news conference.  Practice ground-breaking questions, which are very insensitive, harsh, violent forceful, and crude.  It is better to over-prepare than to be surprised by the depth of questioning by the media.  Be tough and be prepared.  These practice sessions should be for internal use only and not for distribution outside the organization.  Don't volunteer information unless it is a point the company wants to make and the question hasn't been asked.  Don't talk off the record or testimony. Prepared Statements If you don't communicate immediately, you lose your greatest opportunity to control events. First news release should comprise minimum information i.e., the who, what, when and where of the situation. Facts must be given based on the gathered information from reliable and definite sources. Don't over reach and don't hypothesize.

Page 254

Rachna Rastogi, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 252-255

The effect of expressing apprehension and generating good will at the consumer level is securing the trustworthiness of your customers and employees. If your employees and customers don't feel like insiders, they are going to act like outsiders. You must have a prepared statement on hand that can be used to make an initial general response to the media. As the crisis progresses and new information and facts become available, it is also advisable to develop prepared statements to be made by the spokesperson at the onset of any media interview, briefing or news conference. These prepared statements can provide accurate and precise information without missing any important point. Mock-up News Release A ___________________ at ____________________ involving __________________ occurred today at ________________. The incident is under investigation and more information is forthcoming. A (what happened) at (location) involving (who) occurred today at (time). The incident is under investigation and more information is forthcoming. II. Conclusion Thus in any corporate, employees are like variety of communication vehicles. While some employees can learn everything they need to know through societal media platforms or emails, others find it necessary to discuss things face to face. Employees prefer to be communicated with in a “real world” environment. A recent article suggested that “they want intranets that look like the best news/information websites. In a nut shell communication at work place must be transmitted in a way that employees find authentic, engaging and maneuvering to face any challenging situation at work place. Although it is difficult to condense all best practices about Business Communication into one succinct research, but by adopting certain procedures and practice the impact of catastrophe can be minimized for better workplace management. While catastrophe begin as a negative threat, effective crisis management can lessen the harm and in some case allow an organization to appear stronger than before the crises took place. However, crises are not the ideal way to improve an organization. But no organization is immune to disaster, so all must do their best to prepare for one. References [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

Paul Argenti, Janis Forman June 7, 2002 “The Power of Corporate Communication” Crafting the Voice and Image of Your Business. Mitroff, I. I., Harrington, K., & Gai, E. (1996, September). Thinking about the unthinkable. Across the Board, Paper Back Publisher. Sturges , D.L (1994) Communicating through Crisis: A Strategy for organizational Survival, Management. D Lavania and Rachna Rastogi Viswakarma Business Review, Honing Soft Skill through Vedantic Constitution pp4-11,July 2010, VIM,Pune Hearit, K. M. (2006). Crisis Management by Apology Corporate Response to Allegation of Wrong Doing. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associations. Crisis Communications: A Casebook Approach (Routldge Communication Series) by Kathleen Fearn Banks Paperback. Crisis Management: Mastering the Skills to Prevent Disasters (Harvard Business Essentials) by Harvard Business School Press Paperback. Crisis Communication: Practical PR Strategies for Reputation Management and Company Survival. Organizational Change: Creating Change Through Strategic Communication (Foundations in Communication Theory) [Paperback]. Laurie K. Lewis Strategy as Practice: Research Directions and Resources [Paperback] Gerry Johnson. Crisis Management: Master the Skills to Prevent Disasters (Harvard Business Essentials) [Paperback] Harvard Business Essentials.

Page 255

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Evaluation of Groundwater Quality and its Suitability for Drinking and Agricultural use in and around Hingoli Region, Maharashtra, India Godbole Mahendra T. & Patode H.S. School of Earth Sciences, Swami Ramanand Teerth Marathwada University, Nanded (M.S.), India Abstract: This study was conducted to evaluate factors regulating groundwater quality in an area with agriculture and drinking water as main use. 53 groundwater samples have been collected from in and around Hingoli Region, Maharashtra, India covers an area of approximately 36 Km2 and underlain by the Deccan Trap lava flows of upper Cretaceous to Eocene age. Rapid development in recent years has led to an increased demand for water, which is increasingly being fulfilled by groundwater abstraction. Detailed knowledge of water quality can increase understanding of the hydrochemical system, to achieve this; a hydrochemical investigation is carried out in the study area. Groundwater samples were chemically analyzed for major physicochemical parameters in order to understand the different geochemical processes affecting the groundwater quality. Analytical results shows by taking into consideration of except RSC, overall, ratios such as SSP (Post-monsoon 2009-2011 87.41% are <50 & Pre-monsoon2010-2012 82.55% <50 ) indicates good quality of water.100% samples of study area from Post-monsoon 2009 to Pre-monsoon 2012, SAR are <10 shows excellent quality of water for agriculture and drinking water point of view. PI has assessed and all samples from every seasons of study area falls under the category of excellent to good i.e( 0-25 excellent class). KR also shows that the overall all samples falls <1 indicates good quality of water Keywords: Groundwater analysis, Hingoli Region, irrigation water quality, Cretaceous to Eocene age. I. Introduction The source of water supply to the area is through bore wells and dug wells. Irrigated agriculture is depend on adequate water supply of suitable quality. Water quality concern has been plentiful and readily available. For irrigation, the quality of water determines if optimum returns of from the soil can be obtained as the quality affects the soil, crop and water management. Nearly all water contains dissolve salts and trace elements, many of which results from the natural weathering of the earth’s surface (Nahid Sultana, M. Aminul Haque & Syed Fazle Elahi, 2009). In most irrigation situations, the primary water quality concern is salinity levels, since salts can affects both the soil structure and crop yields. The elaboration and implementation of sustainable water use strategies based on the detailed data on the seasonal variation of the water quality that is strongly related to dilution processes taking place during high flow periods specially in post-monsoon seasons, and to the loads of soluble compounds carried by the return waters utilized for drinking and irrigation (Crosa, et al. ,2006).The results reveal that except some of the sample’s parameters like, EC, TDS. All other quality parameters are safe for irrigation and drinking purpose. Groundwater in study area is utilized for both agricultural and drinking purposes hence the hydrochemistry is discussed in order to understand water rock interaction process and to investigate the concentration of the total dissolved constituent present in groundwater with respect to the standards of safe potable water. Climate Climate of the district is characterized by a hot summer and a general dryness throught the year except during the south west monsoon seasons, which is from June to September while October and November constitute the post-monsoon seasons.. The variation in rainfall from year to year is large and study area falls in drought prone area hence it is characterized by an erratic behaviour of rainfall. Geology and Hydrogeology The area consists of Deccan Trap encompassing different types of basaltic flows, separated by red bole. The basaltic lava flows belonging to Deccan volcanic province that flooded during upper Cretaceous to Eocene age. The Stratigraphic sequence and lithology as indicated given below. Formation

Age

Lithology

Deccan Trap

Upper Cretaceous to Eocene

Vesicular and Amygdaloidal Zeolitic Basalt inter bedded with red bole.

The prominent geological units observed in study area are the horizontally disposed basaltic lava flows and each flows has distinct two units. The upper layer consists of vesicular and amygdule zeolatic sasalt, and lower one is

Page 256

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263

compact basalt. The study area consists of four types of rocks like compact amygdaloidal, vesicular and tachylytic basalt. Hydrogeology The area consists of Deccan Trap, encompassing different types of basaltic flows, separated by red bole. The occurrence of groundwater is found in shallow and deep aquifers. The Deccan Trap consists of four types of rocks like compact, amygdaloidal, vecicular, and tachylitic basalt. The groundwater is found in compact basalt due to the presence of secondary porosity, i.e. Fracture and joints in the rocks. Depth of the dug wells is from 5.18 to 54.8 mt. and 12.19 to 122 mt. for bore wells. The soil thickness is about 0.2 mt to 12.19 mt. and average is 2.94 mt. The chemical composition of groundwater of the study area is shown in Table 1. The chemical composition of the groundwater is controlled by nature of geochemical reaction, velocity and volume of groundwater flow, lithology, precipitation and role of human activity (Matthes and Harvey,1982; Reddy, Subba Rao and Reddy 1991, Bhatt and Sakalani, 1996.). Hydrogeology The area consists of Deccan Trap, encompassing different types of basaltic flows, separated by red bole. The occurrence of groundwater is found in shallow and deep aquifers. The Deccan Trap consists of four types of rocks like compact, amygdaloidal, vecicular, and tachylitic basalt. The groundwater is found in compact basalt due to the presence of secondary porosity, i.e. Fracture and joints in the rocks. Depth of the dug wells is from 5.18 to 54.8 mt. and 12.19 to 122 mt. for bore wells. The soil thickness is about 0.2 mt to 12.19 mt. and average is 2.94 mt. The chemical composition of groundwater of the study area is shown in Table 1. The chemical composition of the groundwater is controlled by nature of geochemical reaction, velocity and volume of groundwater flow, lithology, precipitation and role of human activity (Matthes and Harvey,1982; Reddy, Subba Rao and Reddy 1991, Bhatt and Sakalani, 1996.) Hydrochemistry The chemical constituents of groundwater are result of geochemical processes occurring due to the reaction of water and geologic materials (Appelo et al. 1996). The hydrochemistry of the groundwater assess on the basis of EC, TDS, Ca, Mg, TH, Na, K, NO3, SO4 etc. (Table-1.). During post-monsoon (2009, 2010 and 2011) and premonsoon seasons (2010, 2011 and 2012), it is observed that the average concentration of EC, TDS, Cl, Ca, Mg, TH, TA, are much more than the pre-monsoon seasons. The concentration of these elements increases in postmonsoon seasons may be due to the effects of leaching during rainy season (K. Srinivasamurthy, et. al 2009). The concentration of sodium (Na) was more in pre-monsoon and potassium (K) have remain constant values in both the seasons, it is indicates that lower geochemical mobility. Nitrate (NO3) and sulphate (SO4) shows more concentration indicate infiltration of surface water into groundwater during rainy season. Nitrogen in groundwater is mainly derived from fertilizer or nitrogen fixing bacteria leaching of animals dung in agriculture field, sewage and septic tank from city area or industrial influent through soil from MIDC to groundwater. II. Study Area The study area is a part of Kayadhu basin, bounded by latitudes 19 042’ & 190 44’ and longitudes 770 7’ & 770 10’ the area includes Hingoli City, is a head quarter of district located on the bank of Kayadhu River. Apart from this, the area consists of seven villages like Devulgaon Rama, MIDC area Hingoli, Andharwadi, Gadipura, Ganeshwadi, Warud Gawali etc.

Page 257

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263

The study area covers an area of about 36 sq.Km2 (Toposheet 56E/2; Fig.1). The major sources of employment are agriculture, horticulture and animal husbandry. The MIDC area of Hingoli consists of some Industries like, PVC pipe Industry; oil industry etc. III. Material and Methods The current study was designed to investigate the condition of groundwater contamination in the study area. The chemical investigations of groundwater are results of chemical process occurring due to the reaction of water and geochemical materials ( Appelo et.al.,1996). The hydrochemistry of the groundwater assessed on the basis EC, TDS, Ca, Mg, TH, Na, K, NO3, SO4 etc. Water quality parameters such as pH, EC, Temperature were analyzed immediately. Other parameters were later analyzed in the Laboratory of School of Earth Sciences, S.R.T.M. University, Nanded. Total dissolved solids (TDS) were computed by the multiplying the electrical conductivity (EC) by the factor (0.64) .Total Hardness (TH) as CaCO 3 and Calcium (Ca) were analysed titrimetrically, using standard EDTA. Magnessium (Mg) was calculated by taking the differential value between Total Hardness (TH) and calcium concentration chloride (Cl) was determined by titrimetrically by standard AgNO3 titration. The content of the Sodium (Na)and Potassium (K) in ground water was estimated flame photometrically, employing Elico-flame photometer. Sulphate (SO4) and Nitrate (NO3) detected by U.V.Spectrophotometer. All parameters are expressed in (mg/l). Except pH units and electrical conductivity is expressed in micromoh/cm. IV. Results and Discussion The quality standards for drinking water have been specified by the World Health Organization (WHO) in 2004.The behavior of major ions (Ca, Mg, Na, K, HCO 3, SO4, Cl) and important physico-chemical parameters such as pH, electrical conductivity (EC), total dissolved solids (TDS), and total hardness (TH) and the suitability of groundwater in the study area are discussed below. Table 1. Physico-chemical parameters of groundwater and its comparison with standards WHO (1996) Parameters MPL

Highest Desirabe

ISI (1995)

Post-monsoon 2009-2011

Pre-monsoon 2010-2012

MPL

Min.

Max.

Average

Min.

Max.

Average

6.5

7.5-8.5

6.5-9.2

6.1

8.41

7.06

6.78

7.92

7.31

1400

.........

119.12

8971.1

2881.60

249.56

8557.17

2397.98

TDS

1500

500

1500

76.23

5741.5

1461.11

128.21

5101.5

1268.93

Cl Ca Mg TA(CaCO3) Na K SO4 Na3 TH

1000 500 100 ...... 22 ..... 400 45 .....

250 75 50 300 ...... ..... 200 .... .......

1000 200 100 600 .... ...... 400 45 .......

28.4 5.88 12.23 32 5.2 0.1 6 10 45.09

1012 184.4 99.8 1078 68.03 7.8 101 90 645.12

444.20 786.4 53.50 293.33 23.98 3.59 40.99 43.51 266.39

10.6 15.16 4.44 30 3.5 0.1 9 10 10.06

829.2 169.26 97.68 276.66 40.7 6.4 92 86 554.4

229.07 72.46 47.05 118.88 19.52 2.88 37 39.05 219.78

Drinking suitability The analytical results have been evaluated to ascertain the suitability of groundwater in the study area for drinking and agricultural uses. The analytical results for all the parameters for the groundwater samples in the study area from post monsoon 2009-2011and pre-monsoon 2010-2012 are presented in the Table1. pH pH is a measure of the balance between the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxyl ions in water. The pH of water provides vital information in many types of geochemical equilibrium or solubility calculations (Hem1985). The limit of pH value for drinking water is specified as 6.5â&#x20AC;&#x201C;8.5 (WHO2004, 1996; ISI1993, 1995). The pH value of most of the groundwater samples in the study area varies from 6.1-8.41and average is 7.06 in post-monsoon 2009-2011 and 6.78-7.92 and average is 7.13 in pre-monsoon season from 2010-2012. Electrical conductivity (EC) Electrical conductivity is a measure of water capacity to convey electric current (S. V. Sarath Prasanth.et.al. 2012.). It is used to estimate the amount of dissolved solids. It increases as the amount of dissolved mineral (ions) increases. In the study area, the value of conductivity ranged between 119.12 to 8971 and average is 2981.60 in post monsoon seasons of 2009-2011:S/Cm. The EC pre-monsoon season 2010-2012 is ranging from 249.56 to 857.17 and average is 239.7 The maximum concentration of electrical conductivity (EC) in the study is 8971 :S/Cm (0.25 ds/m) which is above WHO (1996) .This could be related toa slightly acidic condition (G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff,2011).

Page 258

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263

Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) generally reflects the amount of minerals content that dissolved in the water, and this controls its suitability for use. High concentration of total dissolved solid may cause adverse taste effects. Highly mineralized water may also deteriorate domestic plumbing and appliances (G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff,2011).In the study area, the concentration value of TD ranged between 76.23 to 5741 mg/L with the average value is 1461 in post-monsoon 2009-2011 and in pre-monsoon season the EC ranges from 128.21 to 5101.5 and average is 1268.93. The average values of post-monsoon 2009-2011 and pre-monsoon 2010-2012 is within the maximum permissible limit of WHO (1996). It must be said that the water is thus good for human consumption (domestic) and agricultural purposes. Chloride (Cl-) A major ion that may be associated with Individual Septic Disposal System (ISDSS) is chloride (Canter and Knox, 1985). Chloride is present in all natural waters, usually in relatively small amounts; however, chloride also can be derived from human sources. Chloride is not effectively removed by the septic systems and therefore, remains in their effluent high concentration of chloride in water is known to cause no health hazard, hence, its readily available in almost all potable water. In the study area, the concentration of chloride is range between 28.4 to 1012 mg/L, and average is 444.20 in post- monsoon 2009-2011 and in case of premonsoon 2010-2012 Cl values ranges from 10.6 to 829.2 and average are 229.07 which is below the maximum allowable concentration of (WHO, 1996). Calcium Ca2+mg/L Calcium contributes to the hardness of water and it is the fifth most common element found in most natural waters. The sources of calcium in ground water especially in sedimentary rocks are calcite, aragonite, gypsum and anhydride (G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff,2011). The calcium concentration in the sampled well in the study area is 5.88 to 184.4 and average is 78.64 in post monsoon season 2009-2011 and in pre-monsoon season from 2010-2012 is ranging from 15.16 to 169.26 and average is 72.46. All the values of Ca are within the permissible limit of (WHO1996). The possible source of this calcium is limestone or gypsum. Magnessium (Mg2+) Magnesium is one of the most common elements in the earth’s crust. It is present in all natural waters. It is an important contributor to water hardness. The sources of magnesium in natural water are dolomites and mafic minerals (amphibole) in rocks. The solubility of dolomite in water depends on the composition. The concentration of Mg in study area are ranges from 12.23 to 99.8 and average is 53.50 in post- monsoon season 2009-2011 and 4.44 to 97.68 and average is 47.50 is recorded in pre-monsoon season 2010-2012. All the values of Mg in study area are within the permissible limit and the water quality is good for the health. Total Alkalinity Total alkalinity is a measure of the capacity of water or any solution to neutralize or “buffer” acids. This measure of acid-neutralizing capacity is important in figuring out how “buffered” the water is against sudden changes in pH. Alkalinity should not be confused with pH. pH is a measure of the hydrogen ion (H+) concentration, and the pH scale shows the intensity of the acidic or basic character of a solution at a given temperature. The reason alkalinity is sometime confused with pH is because the term alkaline is used to describe pH conditions greater than 7 (basic). T he most important compounds in water that determine alkalinity include the carbonate (CO32-) and bicarbonate (HCO3-) ions. Carbonate ions are able to react with and neutralize 2 hydrogen ions (H+) and the bicarbonate ions are able to neutralize H+ or hydroxide ions (OH-) present in water. The ability to resist changes in pH by neutralizing acids or bases is called buffering. One source of alkalinity is calcium carbonate (CaCO3), which is dissolved in water flowing through geology that has limestone and/or marble. The concentration of total alkalinity is ranges from 32 to 1078 and average is 293.33 in post-monsoon season 2009-2011 and in pre- monsoon 2010-2012 season it is varies from 30 to 276.66 and average is 118.88. The highest desirable limit of total alkalinity of WHO (1996) is 300. In study area all the values are within the permissible limit. Sodium (Na) Sodium is an important constituent for determining the quality of irrigation water. Sodium bearing minerals like albite and other members of plagioclase feldspars, nephelene and sodalite weather to release the primary soluble sodium products (Biswajeet Pradhan, et,al.2011). Most sodium salts are readily soluble in water, but take no active part in chemical reactions. Sodium has wide variations in its concentration in ground water. The sodium content of the samples was determined by a flame photometer. Sodium content in the water samples varies between 5.2 to 68.03 and average 23.98 in post monsoon 2009-2011 and in pre- monsoon 2010-2012 it varies from 3.5 to 40.7 and average is 19.52. Potassium Although potassium is nearly as abundant as sodium in igneous rocks, its concentration in ground water is comparatively very less as compared to sodium nearly one-tenth or one-hundred that of sodium( Biswajeet Pradhan, et,al.2011). This is due to the fact that the potassium minerals are resistant to decomposition by weathering. The potassium concentration in the water was deter-mined with the help of Flame photometer.

Page 259

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263

Analysis of water samples in the study area indicates that potassium value varies between 0.1 to 7.8 and average is 3.59 ppm in post-monsoon 2009-2011 and also detected in the range of 0.1-6.4 and average is 2.88 in premonsoon 2010-2012. Sulphate (SO42-) mg/L Sulphate occurs in water as the inorganic sulphate salts as well as dissolved gas (H2S).Sulphate is not a noxious substance although high sulphate in water may have a laxative effect. The concentration of sulphate (SO 42-) in study area is between 6 to 101with the average value of 40.99 in post-monsoon 2009-2011mg/L. The detected values of SO4 in pre-monsoon season range between 9 to 92 and average is 37 mg/L. The highest permissible limit of SO4 is 300 all the values are below this limit. The high concentration of sulphate in the other settlements is likely due to the dissolution of gypsum. Nitrate (NO3): Sources of nitrate in water include human activity such as application of fertilizer in farming practices, human and animal waste (which relate topopulation). The concentration of NO 3 IS The concentration of nitrate (NO3) Is ranges from 10 to 99 and average is 43.51in post-monsoon season 2009-2011 and it varies from 10 to 86 and average is 39.05 in pre-monsoon season 2010-2012 . Some of the localities of study area rises up above the permissible limit of WHO. The possible cause may be the highly populated and the human waste management system is poor (shallow pit toilets and open defecation in thebushes) and also the use of nitrogenous fertilizer and animal dung in farming is a likely source of input into the ground water of this chemical (G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff,2011). Total hardness (TH) The total hardness is varying from 49.05 to 645.12 and average IS 266.39 in post-monsoon 2009-2011 and in pre-monsoon it ranges from 10.06 to 554.4 and average is 219.78mg/L. Groundwater of the entire study area lies within the maximum permissible limit prescribed by ISI. Sawyer and McCarty (1967) classified groundwater, based on TH, as ground water with TH\75, 75–150, 150–300 and [300 mg/l, designated as soft, moderately hard, hard and very hard, respectively. Assessment of ground water quality for irrigation Purposes Assessment of the groundwater quality of the study area was done to determine its suitability for domestic and agricultural purposes water for each of these purposes is require meeting certain safety standard that have been set by either World Health Organization or agencies (G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff,2011). Agricultural use Water for agricultural purposes should be good for both plant and animals. Good quality of Waters for irrigation are characterized by acceptable range of:  The Soluble Sodium Percentage (SSP)  The Residual Sodium Bicarbonate (RSBC)  The Magnesium Adsorption Ratio (MAR)  The Kellys Ratio (KR)  The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS)  The Permeability Index (PI) The results of the different irrigation indices for rating irrigation water quality are presented in Table 4. Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR): The Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) was calculated by the following equation given by Richards (1954) as: SAR=Na/√ (Ca2+Mg2+)/2 , where all the ions are expressed in meq/L. The sodium adsorption ratio gives a clear idea about the adsorption of sodium by soil. It is the proportion of sodium to calcium and magnesium, which affect the availability of the water to the crop. The sodium adsorption ratio of groundwater obtained in the present study are 0.10 to 0.56 with the average values are 0.33 in post monsoon season 2009, in post monsoon-season 2010 it varies from 0.10 to 0.62 and average is 0.37 and in postmonsoon season 2011 the values of SAR are 0.83 to16.95 and average is 03.52. The SAR values of premonsoon 2010-2012 are also <10. It means that all the water samples. Table 2. Classification of groundwater (Post-monsoon-2009-2011) on the basis of SAR Post-monsoon 2009-

Post-monsoon 2010

Post-monsoon -20011

Range < 10 10-18 18-26 >Unsuitable Range < 10 10-18 18-26 >Unsuitable Range < 10 10-18

Water Class Excellent (S1) Good (S2) Doubtful (S3) Unsuitable (S4) Water Class Excellent (S1) Good (S2) Doubtful (S3) Unsuitable (S4) Water Class Excellent (S1) Good (S2)

Samples 53 Samples 53 Samples 53 -

%age 100 %age 100 %age 100 -

Page 260

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263 18-26 >Unsuitable

Doubtful (S3) Unsuitable (S4)

Table 3. Classification of groundwater (Pre-monsoon-2010-2012) on the basis of SAR Pre-monsoon 2010

Pre-monsoon 2011

Pre-monsoon 2012

Range

Water Class

Samples

%age

< 10 10-18 18-26 >Unsuitable Range

Excellent (S1) Good (S2) Doubtful (S3) Unsuitable (S4) Water Class

53 Samples

100 %age

< 10 10-18 18-26 >Unsuitable Range < 10 10-18 18-26 >Unsuitable

Excellent (S1) Good (S2) Doubtful (S3) Unsuitable (S4) Water Class Excellent (S1) Good (S2) Doubtful (S3) Unsuitable (S4)

53 Samples 53 -

100 %age 100 -

All samples from post-monsoon 2009-2011 and pre monsoon 2010-2012 are falling within the excellent categories. Overall SAR shows that the ground water quality is suitable for irrigation. The Soluble Sodium Percentage (SSP) The Soluble Sodium Percentage (SSP) was calculated by the following equation (Todd, 1995): SSP = (Na + K) x 100/Ca2+ + Mg2++Na + K. Where, all the ions are expressed in meq/L. Sodium percent is an important factor for studying sodium hazard. It is also used for adjudging the quality of water for agricultural purposes. High percentage sodium water for irrigation purpose may stunt the plant growth and reduces soil permeability (Joshi et al., 2009). The soluble sodium percentage values of shallow groundwater in the study area ranges between 11.61 to 67.46 and average is 29.11 in post monsoon 2009, the values of SSP are ranges from 10.39 to 74.61 and average is 34 in post monsoon 2010 , and in post monsoon 2011 it ranges from 12.82 to 344.86 and average is 42.78 . In post monsoon season 2011, 84.90% SSP of study area are <50 it indicates good quality of water for irrigation purpose. While 15.09% is more than 50 it indicates that the unsuitable water quality for irrigation. Over all values of SSP are less than <50 in post-monsoon 2009-2011and in pre monsoon 2010-2012. Table 4. Classification of groundwater on the basis of SSP of post-monsoon 2009-2011 Range

Water Class

Samples

%age

<50

Good

>50

Bad

94.33 5.66

Postmonsoon 2010

<50

Good

83.01

>50

Bad

16.98

Postmonsoon 2011

<50

Good

84.90

>50

Bad

15.09

Postmonsoon 2009

Table 5. Classification of groundwater on the basis of SSP of Pre- monsoon 2010-2012 Pre-monsoon 2010 Pre-monsoon 2011 Pre-monsoon 2012

Range

Water Class

Samples

%age

<50

Good

86.79

>50

Bad

13.20

<50

Good

86.79

>50

Bad

13.20

<50

Good

81.63

>50

Bad

16.32

Residual Sodium Bicarbonate (RSBC) Residual Sodium Bicarbonate (RSBC) The Residual Sodium Bicarbonate (RSBC) was calculated according to Gupta and Gupta (1987): RSBC=HCO 3-Ca2+ where, RSBC and the concentration of the constituents are expressed in meq/L. The concentration of bicarbonate and carbonate influences the suitability of water for

Page 261

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263

irrigation purpose. The water with high RSBC has high pH. Therefore, land irrigated with such water becomes infertile owing to deposition of sodium carbonate (Eaton, 1950). The residual sodium bicarbonate values of water samples from the study are in good to doubtful categories as shown in (Table No.5). Table 6. Classification of groundwater on the basis of RSBC of Post-monsoon 2009-2011 Range

Water Class

Samples

%age

Post-monsoon 2010

<1.25 1.25-2.50 >2.5 <1.25

Good Doubtful Unsuitable Good

09 18 26 17

16.98 33.96 49.05 32.07

Post-monsoon 2011

1.25-2.50 >2.5 <1.25

Doubtful Unsuitable Good

14 22 17

26.41 41.50 32.07

1.25-2.50 >2.5

Doubtful Unsuitable

11 25

20.75 47.16

Post-monsoon 2009

Table 7. Classification of groundwater on the basis of RSBC of Pre-monsoon 2010-2012

Pre-monsoon 2010

Pre-monsoon 2011

Pre-monsoon 2012

Range

Water Class

Samples

%age

<1.25

Good

07.54

1.25-2.50

Doubtful

79.24

>2.5

Unsuitable

13.20

<1.25

Good

33.96

1.25-2.50

Doubtful

26.41

>2.5

Unsuitable

39.62

<1.25

Good

36.73

1.25-2.50

Doubtful

32.65

>2.5

Unsuitable

30.61

Maximum samples from post monsoon 2009-2011 and pre-monsoon 2010-2012 shows the falling of RSBC under the class doubtful to unsuitable. Permeability Index (PI) The soil permeability is affected by the long-term use of irrigated water and the influencing constituents are the total dissolved solids, sodium bicarbonate and the soil type. In the present study, the permeability index values range between 6.02 to 13.15 and average is 9.66 in post-monsoon 2009. In both the seasons from post-monsoon 2009-2011 and pre-monsoon 2010-2012 shows that all the water samples fall within Class I and ClassII and can be categorized as good irrigation water (Doneen, 1964). Table 8. Classification of ground water on the basis of Permeability Index from post-monsoon 2009-2011 Range

Water Class

Samples

%age

Post-monsoon 2010

<25 25-75 >75 Range

Class I (Excellent) Class II (Good) Class III(Unsuitable Water Class

53 Samples

100 %age

Post-monsoon 2011

<25 25-75 >75 Range

Class I (Excellent) Class II (Good) Class III(Unsuitable Water Class

53 Samples

100 %age

<25 25-75 >75

Class I (Excellent) Class II (Good) Class III(Unsuitable

53 -

100 -

Post-monsoon 2009

Table 9. Classification of ground water on the basis of Permeability Index from pre-monsoon 2010-2012 Post-monsoon 2009 Post-monsoon 2010

Post-monsoon 2011

Range <25 25-75 >75 Range <25 25-75 >75 Range <25 25-75 >75

Water Class Class I (Excellent) Class II (Good) Class III(Unsuitable Water Class Class I (Excellent) Class II (Good) Class III(Unsuitable Water Class Class I (Excellent) Class II (Good) Class III(Unsuitable

Samples 53 Samples 53 Samples 53 -

%age 100 %age 100 %age 100 -

Kellys Ratio (KR)

Page 262

Godbole Mahendra et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 256-263

The Kellys Ratio was calculated employing the following equation (Kelly, 1963) as KR=Na /Ca 2++Mg2+ The kellys Ratio (KR) values of the study area ranged as good class in post-monsoon season from 2009-2011 and in pre-monsoon season 2010-2012 therefore the area is considered as suitable for irrigation purposes. V. Conclusion The groundwater quality of Hingoli region, Maharashtra, India was assessed for its irrigational and domestic suitability. The values of average total dissolved solids in study area of post monsoon season 2009-2011 is 1461.11 mg/L and in pre-monsoon season 2010-2011 average value is 1268.93.Both the seasons values of TDS are below the highest desirable limit of WHO and ISI. The average values of all detected physico chemical parameters such as Ca, Mg, TA (CaCO3), Na, K, NO3, SO4 are well within the permissible limit. Soluble sodium percentage ,permeability index ,residual sodium bicarbonate and sodium adsorption ratio obtained for most of the water samples were found to be within the safe limits. In addition, most of the other irrigation indices of the sampled water also fall within the permissible level indicating low sodic waters. The groundwater will neither cause salinity hazards nor have an adverse effect on the soil properties and are thus largely suitable for irrigation purpose (G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff,2011). References Abdalla, O.A.E., 2009. Groundwater recharge/discharge in semi-arid regions interpreted from Isotope and chloride concentrations. Hydrogeol. J., 3: 679-690. Apha (american public health association) (1996) standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater, 19 th eds. Public health association, washington, dc. Ayers, R.S., (1977) quality of water for irrigation, j. Irrigation and drainage div., asce, vol. 103, no. Ir2, pp. 135-154. Ayers, R.S. and D.W. Westcot, 1985. Water quality for agriculture FAO irrigation and drain. Paper No 29(1):1-109. Canter, I.W. and R.C. Knox, 1985. Septic Effects on Ground Water Quality Michigan. Lewis Publishing Inc., pp: 336. Biswajeet Pradhan and Saied Pirasteh, (2011), Hydro-Chemical Analysis of the Ground Water of the Basaltic Catchments: Upper Bhatsai Region, Maharastra. he Open Hydrology Journal,2011, 5, 51-57 Doneen, L.D., 1964. Notes on water quality in agriculture. Published as a water science and engineering paper 4001, Department of Water Science and Engineering, University of California. Drever, J.I., 1988. The Geochemistry of Natural Water Englewood Cliffs. Prentice Hall, New Jersey, pp: 437. Eaton, F.M., 1950. Significance of carbonate in Irrigation waters. Soil Sci., 67(3): 128-133. Gupta, S.K. and I.C. Gupta,1987. Management of Saline Soils and Water. Oxford and IBH Publication Coy, New Delhi, India, pp: 399. G.I. Obiefuna and A. Sheriff, ( 2011). Assessment of Shallow Ground Water Quality of Pindiga Gombe Area,Yola Area, NE, Nigeria for Irrigation and Domestic Purposes, Research Journal of Environmental and Earth Sciences 3(2): 131-141, 2011 ISSN: 2041-0492. Joshi, D.M., A. Kumar and N. Agrawal, 2009. Assessment of the irrigation water quality of River Ganga in Haridwar District India. J. Chem., 2(2): 285-292. Kelly, W.P., 1963. Use of saline irrigation water. Soil Sci., 95(4): 355-391.NWQS, 2007. Nigeria Water Quality Standard, Nigerian Standard for Drinking Water Quality. SON, pp:14-17.

Page 263

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Onset of Discussion and Realistic Characters in Drama Dr Parul Yadav Lecturer, English Literature & Communications Amity University Haryana (India) Abstract: With the onset of realism in modern drama, a new dramatic technique had to be evolved to replace the old tricks of romantic and conventional drama. The credit of introducing a new dramatic technique to modern drama goes to Henrik Ibsen. He revolutionized modern theatre by his realistic and social themes. Shaw was greatly influenced by Ibsen’s dramatic technique but he never imitated Ibsen and was quite original in dramatizing his themes. Shaw brought technical novelty in drama through exposition, situation and by explaining and solving the problem through discussion. Discussion, which is represented by clash of minds, is the best means of presenting social problems to the audience. In Shavian plays, however, there is no action like the shooting at one another by stage actors but there is exhibition and discussion of the character and conduct of the stage figures who are made to appear real people by the playwright. The important feature of Shaw’s technique is that he educates the idealist through the shattering of his false illusions by reality and to make him understand life’s purpose. It is the Shavian hero who raises the romantic idealist to a higher level of spiritual development. Key words: Discussion, drama, exposition, unravels, conflict Ibsen come out as a realistic dramatist with his view that the more familiar the situation, the more interesting the play. Before Ibsen it was held that the stranger the situation, the better the play. Shaw appreciated Ibsen for taking situations in his drama from real life. He highly praised Ibsen when he evaluated the latter’s achievements as a modern dramatist. On the same ground, Shaw criticized Shakespeare: Shakespeare had put ourselves on the stage but not our situations…. Ibsen supplies the want left by Shakespeare. He gives us not only ourselves, but ourselves in our own situations. The things that happen to his stage figures are things that happen to us. (Shaw Critical Essays 144) Besides this Shaw has made a comment that: Shakespeare survives by what he has in common with Ibsen, and not by what he has in common with Webster and the rest. (Shaw Critical Essays 142) Thus, Shaw places Ibsen over Shakespeare because Ibsen deals with our day to day life problems realistically and effectively awakening our conscience. To Shaw, in the tragedy of Hamlet what more important is the introduction of a short play The Murder of Gonzago than the whole play. This is the play that Hamlet makes the players act before his uncle. Though the play is artlessly constructed, it causes a great effect on Claudius because it is about himself. Shaw said: Ibsen substituted a terrible art of sharp-shooting at the audience, trapping them, fencing with them, aiming always at the sorest spot in their consciences. (Shaw Critical Essays 145) Ibsen condemned the old stage tricks which used to make audiences take interest in unreal people and improbable circumstances. He makes his audience the persons of his drama and the incidents of their own life the incidents of his drama. Shaw declares: Hence a cry has arisen that the post-Ibsen play is not a play, and that its technique, not being the technique described by Aristotle, is not a technique at all. (Shaw Critical Essays 145-146) In the plays of Shaw the element of discussion found great importance. He believed discussion, which is represented by clash of minds, is the best means of presenting social problems to the audience. According to Shaw, this element of discussion originated in the last act of A Doll’s House when Nora says to Torvald, “We must sit down and discuss all this that has been happening between us.” (Ibsen, A Dolls 99)

Page 264

Dr Parul Yadav, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 264-268

Now in Ibsenite plays we have exposition, situation and unraveling through discussion. Earlier there was well made play technique in which there was an exposition in the first act, a situation in the second, and unraveling in the third. Moreover, Shaw estimated discussion as the test of the dramatist. Shaw’s originality lies in his making the discussion central to his dramatic design. He made discussion a vehicle for social reform. Shaw disliked Ibsen’s putting discussion in the end of the play when the audiences are almost tired. It raises the need to see the play over again to follow the earlier acts in the light of the final discussion. For Shaw, the technical novelty of post Ibsen drama lies in: the introduction of the discussion and its development until it so overspreads and interpenetrates the action that it finally assimilates it, making play and discussion practically identical. (Shaw Critical Essays 146) Shaw was charged by critics, they said that his characters talk but do nothing. They often criticized Shaw for the lack of action. But this charge is not true as Shaw’s characters act through discussion and therefore, critics’ complaint have no ground to stand upon. Archibald Henderson observed: In A Doll’s House and Candida you have action producing discussion; in the Doctor’s Dilemma you have discussion producing action, and that action being finally discussed. In other plays you have discussion all over the shop. Sometimes the discussion interpenetrates the action from beginning to the end. Sometimes, as in Getting Married and Misalliance, the whole play, though full of incident, is a discussion and nothing else. (Henderson 435) The action of Shaw’s characters, however, is verbal most often. In Arms and the Man, the little tale of the coat and the portrait provides the decisive turn in action through discussion: Bluntschli: When you strike that noble attitude and speak in that thrilling voice, I admire you; but I find it impossible to believe a single word you say. Raina : Captain Bluntschli! Bluntschli: Yes Raina : Do you mean that you said just now? Do you know what you said just now? Bluntschli: I do. Raina : I! I! How did you find me out? (Shaw, Arms p 61-62) After this discussion Raina inclines towards Bluntschli she passes over forever from Sergius world to Bluntschli. This is the way of Shavian action. The fact that Bluntschli conquers gains its force and importance from the context in which the opposite was to be expected. However, discussion is main device of Shaw’s technique for his reversal of relations as is clear from the above example from Arms and the Man. There is a different sort of Shavian reversal through discussion in Widowers Houses. In this play, Shaw’s hero Trench asks the heroine to throw up her dowry which is earned by her father through evil sources. But she refuses to be poor to preserve her innocence. But later on, it turns out that the source of the hero’s own unearned income is the same as that of girl’s father. The hero renews his strength by recovering from this shock and gets the girl by yielding before the corrupt social order. All this is done only by discussion. However, in Shavian plays the discussion does not affect the basic structure of the play. On the Rocks has hardly any story and lacks major incidents. But it is a long discussion on the economic crisis in England under poor leadership. In the play, discussion is almost identical with the plot. In the exposition, Shaw introduces certain ideas and develops them during the conflict and then in the end draws a short conclusion through discussion. Similarly the story of You Never Can Tell is brief. The play projects the problem between husband and wife, and between parents and children only through discussion. At last the conclusion is brought out through discussion. However, this exploitation of discussion as a dramatic device is both Ibsenite and Shakespearean. Like Ibsen, Shaw makes the discussion of a social problem basis of his play and like Shakespeare; Shaw makes his discussion through long rhetorical speeches and through moral percepts. Thus, Shaw gave importance to discussion instead of plot in his play. He rejected the primacy of plot in the well -made play, perfected by Eugene Scribe, based on the Aristotelian assumption that plot is the soul of drama. But for Shaw discussion is the soul of drama. In one of his prefaces, Shaw wrote, “Plot has always been the curse of serious drama and indeed of serious literature of any kind.” (The Complete 869) Moreover he told his biographer Henderson, “I avoid plots like the plague” because “plots are deadwood”. ( Henderson Table 22) But this does not mean that Shaw does not use plots. It is simply to say that he does not use it in the Aristotelian sense of the arrangement of incidents. The old tricks of preparation, catastrophe, and denouncement and so forth are mechanical tricks of construction in Shaw’s views. Shaw’s discussion of the difference between himself and Archer during their collaboration on Widowers Houses will be helpful in our understanding of Shaw/s views on plot:

Page 265

Dr Parul Yadav, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 264-268

(Archer) did not agree with me that the form of drama which had been perfected in the middle of the nineteenth century in the French theatre was essentially mechanistic and, therefore, incapable of producing vital drama. That it was exhausted and, for the moment, sterile, was too obvious to escape an observer of his intelligence: but he saw nothing fundamentally wrong with it, and to the end of his life, maintained that it was indispensable as a form for sound theatrical work, needing only to be brought into contact with life by having new ideas poured into it. I held, on the contrary, that a play is a vital growth and not a mechanical construction; that a plot is the ruin of a story and, therefore, of a play, which is essentially a story; that Shakespeare plays and Dickens’ novels, though redeemed by their author’s genius, were as ridiculous in their plots as Goldsmith’s hopelessly spoilt Good natured Man: in short, that a play should never have a plot, because, if it has only natural life in it, it will construct itself, like a flowering plant, for more wonderfully than its author can consciously construct it. (Shaw, Pen Portraits 22) This means that mere mechanical arrangement of incidents cannot make a drama a good work of art. There should be more than a plot, i.e., there ought to be author’s philosophy of life and social criticism also. On the stage the energy must flow naturally and the play also must develop itself naturally and vitally.Henrik Ibsen was greatly influenced by the well made play, though Shaw condemned well made play of Scribe and Sardou. Eric Bentley commented in his essay The Making of a Dramatist: Hence it would have been quite possible for a writer in 1890 to denounce Scribe and Sardou and simultaneously to steal their bag of tricks from Ibsen. (Bentley 58) The subject of Widowers Houses is one that Scribe and the young Dumas brought to the nineteenth century theatre: marrying or refusing to marry, money, But the play is a great reversal of custom, Shaw refuses to accept Auger’s ending breaking out of the war and reducing the heroine’s father to poverty in order to make it honourable for the hero now to marry the lady. Shaw condemned the sheer accident as a means for the ending of the play. He introduces a great reversal of custom. Shaw insisted on anti-climax whereas Scribe dedicated all his art to the Big Scene at the end or a little before the end. Eric Bentley observed that whereas in a well-made play, Bluntschll and Louka would have soared to the heights of Raina and Sergius, in the Shavian play Raina and Sergins drop with a bump to the level of Bluntshcli and Louka. This anti-climax is possible only in Shaw’s plays. Though Shaw always condemned the well-made play, it is obvious that both Ibsen and Shaw rode into prominence on the shoulders of Scribe and the well-made play, as did Chekhov, Wilde and Strindberg. (Darwin 190) It is the reversal of relationships which made Shaw most distinct from Scribe and even Ibsen. But while for Ibsen the past is dynamically and tragically real, for Shaw it is unreal. Shaw is a prophet and a playwright of the future and frees present reality from the past. Though Shaw often commented against the ‘old tricks’ of preparation, conflict and unraveling, he has much often derived many of his dramatic devices from the Renaissance drama and combined it with Ibsenite technique of unresolved techniques etc. Dr. C.D. Sidhu has wisely studied this aspect of Shaw’s dramatic technique, especially in Shaw’s tragicomedies which according to him can be divided like Shakespearean tragedy into: exposition, conflict and unraveling. In exposition Shaw sets the situation out of which complication arises. The conflict forms the bulk of the play corresponding to the second, third and fourth acts of a five-act tragedy. Thus, out of the exposition, conflict and catastrophe of a traditional tragedy, Shaw discards catastrophe and substitutes the denouncement or unraveling through discussion. Discussion is another name for unraveling. In spite of the differences of Shavian tragicomedies in their act and scene division from traditional five-act tragedy, their structure follows the pattern of rising action, climax, falling action, and unraveling the last being Shaw’s substitute for catastrophe. Thus, Shaw synthesizes all his dramatic tricks and gave it his own name ‘Shavian’. He took these dramatic tricks from various sources- from traditional drama, well-made play and modern realistic drama of Henrik Ibsen and many other sources. Therefore, we see Shavian dramatic technique is unique in itself and a case of piracy cannot be leveled against it. In the Quintessence of Ibsenism, Shaw said: Rhetoric, irony, argument, paradox, epigram, parable, the rearrangement of haphazard facts into orderly and intelligent situation: these are both the oldest and the newest arts of the drama; …. In the theatre of Ibsen we are not flattered spectators killing an idle hour with an ingenious and amusing entertainment: we are guilty creatures sitting at a play, and the technique of pastime is no more applicable than at a murder trial. (Shaw Critical Essays 146)

Page 266

Dr Parul Yadav, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 264-268

Thus, Shaw adopted the technique of Ibsen for his own dramatic purpose. He invented the technique of playing upon the conscience of the audience. Shaw observed that Ibsen discarded the old stage tricks by which audiences were made to take interest in unreal and romantic characters and incidents. Ibsen replaced these old tricks of introducing unreal incidents and characters in the play and substituted: a forensic technique of recrimination, disillusion, and penetration through ideals to the truth, with a free use of all the rhetorical and lyrical arts of the orator, the preacher, the pleader, and rhapsodist. (Shaw Critical Essays 146) To both Ibsen and Shaw, romance was an illusion a hereby and they fought against it throughout their long dramatic career. Shaw explained romance as the curse of modern life. According to him romance deceives mankind and introduces pessimism only in the life. In his preface to Three Plays for Puritans, Shaw wrote, “The lot of the man who sees life truly and thinks about it romantically is Despair”. (Shaw, collected plays 37) No doubt, in our society we have a large class of idealists. Idealists are those who can face fact but cannot act accordingly and interpret everything according to certain ethical systems. Shaw believed that all our ideals are shallow and lead mankind to despair and destruction. In the essay The Quintessence of Ibsenism, Shaw has said that “the shallowness of the ideals of men, ignorant of history is their destruction.” (Shaw Critical Essays 4) Thus, Shaw suggested our freedom from the totalitarianism of idealism which is: the policy of forcing individuals to act on the assumption that all ideals are real, and to recognize and accept such action as standard moral conduct, absolutely valid under all circumstances. (Shaw Critical Essays 27) This policy, however, expurgates the facts. In the play Candida, for example, Morell boasts before his wife Candida at the time of domestic crisis, inflated with the idealistic air of respectability, and confusing the dream world for the real one, he says: I have nothing to offer you but my strength for your defence, my honesty for your surety, my ability and industry for your dignity. That is all it becomes a man to offer to a woman. (Shaw, Candida 77) But it is a realist; Eugene, who knows that Candida is “fed on metaphors, sermons, stale perorations, mere rhetoric.” (Shaw, Candida 31) Thus, it was Shaw who confronted an idealist with a realist and who had courage to face facts and tell him the truth. In most of Shaw’s plays women are the sufferers from this idealism. They are being sacrificed at the altar of domesticity. We have an example of his play Candida. In this play the heroine does all sort of work, from household work to take care of children. She nurses her husband like a mother. She provides him all sorts of comforts so that he can prepare his sermon. But all her efforts are considered as her duty. It is the duty of a woman to do all sorts of work. But in the plays of other major realists of modern drama, like Strindberg and Gorki, it the man who has to sacrifice before evil social conditions and by his romantic and idealistic disguises. While the Candida, the heroine is the victim of domesticity and Morell an idealist tyrant, in Strindberg’s Creditors, it is the man who is victimized by domesticity in which woman is a tyrant and a soul destroyer. Ibsen and Shaw believe that women and their work at home have always been victimized and unrecognized by the male dominated society. According to Shaw social progress is possible only through replacing old institutions by new ones. Therefore, he advised women to reject their established duty of absolute surrender to their husbands. The unbearable realities of family are covered by the mask of idealism Shaw’s aim as a realistic dramatist is to expose this mask of idealism and to let his realist say of marriage: This thing is a failure for many of us. It is insufferable that two human being, having entered into relations which only warm affection can render tolerable, should be forced to maintain them after such affections have ceased to exist, or in spite of the fact that they have never arisen. The alleged natural attractions and repulsions upon which the family ideal is based do not exist; and it is historically false that the family was founded for the purpose of satisfying them. Let us provide otherwise for the social ends which the family sub serves, and then abolish its compulsory character altogether. (Shaw Critical Essays 27-28)

Page 267

Dr Parul Yadav, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 264-268

Idealists being terrified at this declare that “Realism means egotism; and egotism means depravity.” (Shaw Critical Essays 31) They denounce the destroyer of ideals as an enemy of society, who is in fact sweeping the world clear of lies. Thus, we see that Shaw created his own dramatic technique suited to his needs. The Shavian way of dramatization is the way of dramatization of reality. His putting up of an idealist confronted by a realist, his wit, humour, satire and irony, his way of exposition, situation and unraveling through discussion all are interpenetrated by realism- the reality of our socio-economic order, our institutions and our moral laws. However, Shaw’s technique served him as the best medium to make the world realize and see reality under the mask of romance, traditional morality and idealism. In Shavian plays the conflict, most often, is between a realist and an idealist, Shaw said, “No conflict, no drama”.8 In his drama we see a special kind of conflict which can lead to both tragic and comic effect at the same time. In his plays the conflicts involving social, moral, and political questions also find favour. He has said: How the material of the dramatist is always some conflict of human feeling with circumstances; so that institutions are circumstances, every social question furnishes material for drama. But every drama does not involve a social question, because human feelings may be in conflict with circumstances which are not institutions, which are part of human destiny… Abnormal greatness of character, abnormal baseness of character, love and death: with these alone you can, if you are a sufficiently great dramatic poet, make a drama that will keep your language alive long after it has passed out of common use. Whereas a drama, with a social question for the motive, cannot outlive the solution of that question. (Shaw on Theatre 59-60) Shaw, therefore, introduced not the conventional villains but social villains idealists who are opposed to all sorts of social and racial progress. There is conflict between the will of social progress and the will of idealistic repression, and not the conflict between the wills of two individuals. Thus, Shaw dramatizes the conflict between the force of the will of the protagonist and the force of the will of status quo defenders. In other words he presents the battle of wills between forces of social good and social evil. In the Shaw’s play villains are idealistic social institutions. His heroes devote themselves to the betterment of God’s work by serving the evolutionary will of the universe. His heroes are not extra-ordinary persons who perform impossible deeds but they are very ordinary persons who give sermons and who have realistic attitude. In the Shavian hero, the will of the world holds supremacy over intellect. His actions include to desire, to imagine, to will and to create and he hates the “seven deadly virtues of respectability, conventional virtue, affection, modesty sentiment, devotion to the other sex, and romance”. (Henderson, Man of the Centary 744) Thus, we see that Shaw created his own dramatic technique suited to his needs. The Shavian way of dramatization is the way of dramatization of reality. His putting up of an idealist confronted by a realist, his wit, humour, satire and irony, his way of exposition, situation and unraveling through discussion all are interpenetrated by realism- the reality of our socio-economic order, our institutions and our moral laws. However, Shaw’s technique served him as the best medium to make the world realize and see reality under the mask of romance, traditional morality and idealism. References

[1]. [2]. [3]. [4]. [5]. [6]. [7]. [8]. [9]. [10].

Archibald Henderson, George Bernard Shaw, Self Revealed, Fortnightly Review, 125(1926) Archibald Henderson, Table Talk of George Bernard Shaw. New York: Harper Bros., 1925 Daniel Darwin, Bernard Shaw: A Psychological study, London: Associated University , Presses, 1975 Eric Bentley, “The Making of a Dramatist”, G.B Shaw: A collection of critical Essays, ed. R.J. Kaufmann C New Delhi: Prentice- Hall of India Private Limited, 1979 Ed E.J. West, Shaw on Theatre , New York: Hill and Wang, 1958 George Bernard Shaw, Arms and the Man, ed. A.C.Ward, Bombay: Orient Longman, Limited, 1976. George Bernard Shaw, Major critical Essays, London: Constable and Company Limited, 1955 George Bernard Shaw, Pen Portraits and Reviews , London: The standard constable edition, 1963 Henrik Ibsen, A Dolls house, Ghosts, An Enemy of the People, Rosmersholm, tr. Michael Meyer ,Garden city, N.Y 1966. The Complete Prefaces of Bernard Shaw, London: Paul Hamlyn, 1965.

Page 268

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Effects of Community Based Schools in Promotion of Education Established By Khwendokor in Rural Areas of Khyber Agency, Pakistan Shahzad Khan Graduate School of Life and Environmental Sciences Department of Appropriate Technology of Sciences and Sustainable Development University of Tsukuba, Ibaraki, Japan Abstract: Present study was conducted during 2008-2009 with the aims to identify the educational facilities provided by Khwendokor and its effects in promotion of education. Three villages of Landi Kotal Tehsil of Khyber Agency was selected purposely, where Khwendokor was working since 2005. A total of 65 respondents were randomly interviewed with the help of a pre-test questionnaire. Main findings of the study revealed that 37% and 63% of sampled respondents preferred community based schools due to low charges for the students on monthly basis and near homes respectively. The charges per child per month were on average Rs. 200, which was described by 43% of the respondents. It was also mentioned by 30% of the sample respondents that increase took place in literacy rate after the establishment of Khwendokor. The study further mentioned that 52.31 % of sample respondents preferred the community based schools because the students were provided with free books and uniform. Moreover 55.38% of sample respondents were interested in extra curricula activities like sports day, which were also arranged by Khwendokor in the area. Most of the respondents recommended that such types of schools should also be established in the other villages in tribal areas. Moreover, the Maliks and local members should also take initiatives for the mobilization of the parents to send their children to schools. Key words: literacy improvement, school going children, extra curricula activities, Khwendokor, community based schools. I. Introduction Education plays an important role towards social progress, political stability and economic development. Education brings economic development because it enhances the productivity and efficiency of the people and provides them necessary skills. Due to education people assume their respective roles and fulfill them efficiently and eventually support the sustainable economic growth of the country. The under developed education system of Pakistan has created many problems in the country. According to most of the social scientists and experts, poor role of education system is critical factor of political instability, economic disorder and social inadequacy (Hussain 1998, Khalil et, al 1990, Komatsu 2008). After decades of ignoring schools and school reform effortsoften out of a sense that nothing could be done in the world of community development without focusing on the schools which had become much more silent in the last ten years, community leaders can play an important role in the development of educational activities (Michele Cahill 1996).The vital role and significance of education system is largely neglected in Pakistan, although blessed with tremendous resources and vast manpower, the process of education is not only training or directing but also developing the child physically, mentally and emotionally. Education is liable for integrated, overall growth and development of the child. Education develops the child in such a way that he is capable of allowing his mind and its freedom in the world of truth, his imagination for the world which belongs to the art, and his sympathy for the world of human relationships. This is what we call a balance or overall development (Katozai, 2005). Khwendokor was established in 1993 in village Lakary, District Peshawar. Its initial focus was on women and environment. After analyzing the context and capacity of Khwendokor in 1997 the focus shifted to women and children development. Khwendokor is working in KPK and Federally Administered Tribal Area (FATA). Community based school is a social service institution and its basic goals and objectives are socially oriented within the parameters of a given community. Community based schools have been opened by Khwendokor in January 2005.The aim of the community based schools formation was to bring awareness in the community and to provide books and other requirements to the students of the community. These schools provide education from kindergarten to middle and also provide adult education to the community. The Khwendokor has its educational activities for the last 5 years in all over Landi Kotal. The present study was conducted to see the fact that whether the community based schools introduced by Khwendokor had enhanced the primary education in rural area. Before this organization the government schools were far away from the village. Moreover, due to social, cultural and financial barriers the parents did not permit their children to go outside the village for the purpose of

Page 269

Shahzad Khan, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 269-272

education. Most of the parents were illiterate and unaware of education. Due to the establishment of Khwendokor community based schools, Khwendokor mobilized the community and brought awareness in the people of the area. The parents started sending their children to the schools. In order to see the effects of these schools the study was initiated with the objective to identify the educational facilities and to see the effects of Khwendokor in promoting education. II. Meterials And Methods Landi kotal was selected as the universe of the study. Khwendokor has started its activities in Landi Kotal since its establishment in 2005. There are 172 villages in Landi Kotal Tehsil of Khyber Agency. Three villages namely Sultankhel, Talabkhel and Ghanikhel, were purposely selected because Khwendokor is working in these villages for the last 3 years as compared to other villages where the organization has recently started its educational activities. The detail of the number of villages, number of schools and number of students is given below. The parents of the children were randomly selected for interview. Selection of Sample Respondents. In Talabkhel there was one school and total numbers of students were 115 in which 35 students were selected as sample size with the ratio of 30% in each village, in Sultankhel there was also one school and the total number of students were 50 in which 15 sampled respondents were selected. In village Ghani khel there was also one school in which total number of students were 50 and 15 were selected as sample respondents. III. Results And Discussion Reason for preference to community based schools. Table No. 1 shows that 37% sampled respondents preferred the community based schools as the charges were very low while 63% respondents preferred it for near to their home. It is clear that the community based schools has helped the poor people in obtaining education for their children at minimum cost and at doorstep. Table I: Reasons for preferences to community based schools Village Name Talab Khel

Near to home No. % 23 65.71

Charges are low No. % 12 34.29

Total

Sultan khel

73.33

26.67

Ghani khel

46.67

53.33

Total

63.08

36.92

No. 35

% 53.85 23.08 23.08 100

Cost of education per child. In table 2, 44.62% of the sample respondentsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; shows that the cost was 0-100 as these children were living very near to the schools, while the cost per child for 43% and 12.31 % were RS 200 and RS 400 per month respectively. The variation in cost can be attributed to near and far from the schools. This shows that the average cost per child is very low and easily affordable for the community in tribal area. Table II: Cost of education per child Village Name

Rs 0-100

Rs 200

Rs 400

Total

No.

Talab Khel

37.14

45.71

17.14

53.85

Sultan khel

53.33

46.67

23.08

Ghani khel Total

8 29

53.33 44.62

5 28

33.33 43.08

2 8

13.33 12.31

15 65

23.08 100.00

Problems faced by the sample respondents while sending their children to school. In table 3, the data shows that 41.54% of the sample respondents have transport problem while 30.77% have the problem of school charges while 27.69% respondents have social problem as the parents were reluctant to send their female children due to tribal tradition. Although the charges were minimum but some of the respondents were living below poverty line and little chares were not possible for them. Table III: Problems faced by sample respondents Village name Talab Khel Sultan khel Ghani khel Total

Transport No. 16 8 3 27

% 45.71 53.33 53.33 41.54

School charges No. 8 4 8 20

% 22.86 26.67 53.33 30.77

Social constraints No. 11 3 4 18

% 31.43 20 26.67 27.69

Total No. 35 15 15 65

% 53.85 23.08 23.08 100

Role of Khendokor in increasing literacy rate

Page 270

Shahzad Khan, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 269-272

All the respondents were agreeing with view that the Khwendokor has increased the literacy rate and have encouraged and motivated the parents to send their children to schools. Out of the total of 65 sampled respondents, 33.85 % were of the view that the school enrolment has increased 30 % while 21.54% were of the view that enrollment increased above 40 %. Any how the literacy rate has increased in the area under study but the variation may be due to transport charges, near to home and to some extent of fee charges. Table IV: Role of Khwendokor in increasing literacy rate village Name Talab Khel

10% No. 4

% 11.43

20% No. 12

% 34.29

30% No. 11

% 31.43

40 % and above No. % 8 22.86

Total No. 35

Sultan khel

6.67

53.33

20.00

Ghani khel

13.33

53.33

20.00

Total

10.77

33.85

21.54

% 53.85 23.08 23.08 100.00

Educational facilities provided by Khwendokor The highest ratio of respondents (52.31%) was satisfied of books and uniform provided by Khwendokor , While 29.23 % showed their satisfaction from tuition centers. The remaining 18.46 % were happy with the teaching staff provided by the khendokor. This shows that the organization is trying her best to provide every type of facility to promote the education. Table V: Educational facilities provided by Khwendokor village Name Talab Khel

Books and uniform No. % 19 54.29

Teaching staff No. % 4 11.43

Tuition centres No. % 12 34.29

Total No. 35

% 53.85

Sultan khel

46.67

26.67

23.08

Ghani khel

53.33

26.67

20.00

23.08

Total

52.31

18.46

29.23

100.00

Extracurricular activities arranged by Khwendokor. Extra curriculum activities like sport, debates and quiz competition can play an important role in promotion of education. Data in the table 6 shows that 55.38% of the sampled respondents were satisfied with the sports days arranged by Khwendokor in community based schools while 24.62% and 20 % were satisfied in the arrangement of quiz competition and debate respectively. This shows that Khwendokor provides all the extra curriculum activities as required for the health and fitness of the students. Table VI: Extra curricula activities arranged by Khwendokor village Name Talab Khel

Sports day No. 20

% 57.14

Debates No. 7

% 20

Quiz competition No. % 8 22.86

Total No. 35

Sultan khel

53.33

26.67

Ghani khel

53.33

26.67

Total

55.38

24.62

% 53.84 23.07 23.07 100

IV. Conclusion And Recommendations Khwendokor has played an important role in promoting education in Landi Kotal Khyber Agency. Before the formation of community based schools by Khwendokor, there was no proper education system and there was lack of awareness for the promotion of education especially for female in Khyber agency. Due to Khwendokor the awareness was created resultantly literacy rate increased and basic requirement for promotion of education like uniform, books, trained teachers, arrangement for extra curriculum activities and transport at minimum charges were provided by Khwendokor. The local people are highly satisfied with this system of education and they suggest such type of schools to be established in other areas of the province. Community participation is very necessary in the promotion of education, both community members and teachers should co-operate each other. Moreover, the Maliks and local members should also take initiatives for the mobilization of the parents to send their children to schools. References [1]

Cahill, M. (1996). Schools and community partnerships: Reforming Schools, revitalizing.

Page 271

Shahzad Khan, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 269-272

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

Hussain, S. (1998). Community participation of sustainable development in rural area (A case study of village Tekni Payan, District Dir Unpublished thesis Department of social work. University of Peshawar. p. 194-105. Khalil, F. M. Asghar, and A. Muhammad. (1990). Evaluation of District Council Komatsu,T (2008). Qualitative inquiry ino local education Administration in Pakistan, Interanational Journal of Educational Developmen,Vol.29,(3) 219-226. Katozai, M .A (2005). A comprehensive study of Education for headmasters and headmistress .Ed(1st),7 Murrell, P. C. Jr. (2001). The community teacher: A new framework for effective urban teaching. New York: Teachers College Press. Omer, M., Tareen. (1998). Project of primary health care. Deptt. Of Health, Punjab, Pakistan. p. 29. Raja, B.H., (1997). Role of NRSP in the community development through community participation at Hajira Azad Kashmir, Unpublished thesis, Deptt. of Social Work. Uinv. of Peshawar. Pp. 70-71 Viens, D.(2001). Madagasar: A development approach to community based school management Findings, World Bank. p. 4.

Page 272

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

The Impact of Parents’ Educational Level on Educational Achievement and Aspiration of Secondary School Girls Manpreet Kaur Assistant Professor, Guru Gobind Singh College of Education (For Women), Giddarbaha Panjab University, Chandigarh, India C/O Umesh Tuli: House no. 318, Ajit Nagar, Patiala-147001, India Abstract: Educational achievement is of paramount importance particularly in the present context. According to our society it is the only criteria by which we can determine the performance of the students and their aspiration level. Obviously great emphasis is placed on achievement by parents’ and in the school right from the beginning of formal education. Academic achievement of a child depends to a great extent on parents’ educational level, personality, socioeconomic status, adjustment, environment, self-concept etc. The study is based on theoretical assumption that the educational level of parents effects the educational achievement and aspiration level of the children. Especially, where the students are growing up to take selfdecision of their choice at senior secondary level. All individuals are trying to achieve more and more in the various fields of life and thus we need to observe the impact of parents’ education level on educational achievement and aspiration of secondary school girls. Keywords: academic achievement, parent’s educational level, aspiration of secondary school girls etc. I. INTRODUCTION “Education is discipline for the adventure of life, research is intellectual adventure and the universities should be homes of adventure shared in common by young and old” -A.W. Whitehead Environment plays decisive role in human life. A number of studies have been conceived to ascertain the influence of environment on academic achievement of children. Psychologists have said that academic achievement and success of pupil is influenced by intelligence and environment. Intelligence is defined as innate mental ability. For practical purpose of teaching and learning it means all rounds in born mental ability to learn and acquire skills. Hence intelligence is an important determinant of scholastic achievement. It plays important role in laying down the limits of achievement. Human beings are always immersed in social environment, which not only change the every structure of the Individual or just compels him with a very readymade system of sign. As the child’s environment shifts from the home to the neighborhood and school, changes take place in her concepts of family members. Furthermore the child’s increasing ability to perceive meaning to situations makes him realize that the parents’ especially mother plays an important role in decision and adjustment. Neither one specific environment of the family nor any one specific aspect of family life is responsible for specializing the child. If the total character of the home environment is favorable, the chances are that favorable good characteristics of personality will develop. The type of relationship that exists between the child and his parents ‘is the main contributing factor. Sir, Peter H. Rossi of Chicago University conducted a study on “Social Factor in Academic Achievement.” The major findings under this category is that a student’s intelligence relates more strongly to his achievement level that between 40% and 60% of the variation among students could be accounted for by variation in I.Q. level. It is apparent that the home may be regarded as the real place of learning “for the development of special skill to deal with other people. Only when children have satisfactory social relationship with members of their family, they enjoy social relationship with people outside the home, have healthy aspiration and attitudes towards people and learn to function successfully. Of all the home factors in the early years of life which influence the child’s personality, academic achievement and aspiration and behaviors of child. Various studies established the relation between socio economic factor and achievement, the relation between a specific factor – parents’ education and the student’s achievement, attitude and aspiration have not been much studied.

Page 273

Manpreet Kaur, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 273-278

The life pattern of an individual is greatly influenced by the impact of the environmental factor in which he lives. According to Brown “No other institution except home has so significant, a role in the transition of the individual to a person from original nature to human nature.” Through family environment child adopts ideas, values, aspirations, attitudes and modes of behavior. Attitude and aspirations of children have their origins in the family relationship in the home. As Groves points out “the family provides through the intimacies of personal experience and the interaction of one member with another, something unique which makes it unlike any other familiar cluster.” Therefore, the most significant out of school influence on child's learning is probably the home .A good environment of the family provides all therefore the most significant out of school influence on the child‘s type of facilities for the child which facilitates his growth and development while poor family conditions may have contrary effects. Parents ' education is part of home environment .The positive relationship of motivation to learning is universally accepted by both educators and behavioral scientist. Motivation can give impetus, purpose and direction to an individual. Thus, the educational environment at home motivates the girl to higher achievement to favorable attitude, reach higher aspiration level towards education and higher vocational goals. The present study makes an attempt to study “the impact between educational achievement and aspiration of children and parents.” II. JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROBLEM The world is becoming more and more competitive .one of the burning problems of today; in the field of education is how to raise the standard of educational. Quality of performance has become the key factor for personnel progress. Parents desire that their children climb the ladder of performance to as high as possible. In order to help the pupil having low scholastic achievement, identification of their environment is essential. It is therefore necessary to find out how far the parents educational level is responsible for students scholastic achievement and aspiration. The quality of achievement and aspiration are integral parts of life. If there is a positive high relation between the parents ‘education and the children achievement have a great responsibility in making up for the lack of education of the parents. This work would also be of practical help to teachers in motivating and guiding the student in the right path. III. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4.

To find out the impact of mothers educational level educational achievement of secondary school girls. To find out the impact of fathers educational level on educational achievement of secondary school girls. To find out the impact of mothers educational level on aspiration of secondary school girls. To find out the impact of father educational level on aspiration of secondary school girls. IV. HYPOTHISES



There exists no difference between mothers’ educational level and educational achievement of secondary school girls. There exists no difference between fathers’ educational level and educational achievement of secondary school girls. There exists no difference between mothers’ and fathers’ educational level and educational aspiration of secondary school girls.

 

V. SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY    

Study will bring into light how far the parents’ educational level effects their children achievement. Study will help to find out the effect of parents’ educational level on aspiration of their children. It may help the officials to formulate policies to disperse the facilities in a better planned manner. Study will contribute to the researches undertaken to find out the discrepancies in educational field and will consequently help in the modernization of the society. VI. DELIMITATION OF THE STUDY

The present study was limited to a sample of 60 girls of secondary classes. A questionnaire was prepared for measuring the aspiration level of the students. The students were from four secondary schools (15 students from each school) of Rajpura. VII. REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE Benhur, C. C. Conducted a study on “Relationship between Socio Economic status and Academic Achievement of students in High school.” It was found that pupils of different socio- economic status differ significantly from

Page 274

Manpreet Kaur, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 273-278

each other in their achievement. The pupils of higher socio- economic status have obtained higher mean achievement scores. The higher score was that of pupils belonging to the upper middle class and the lowest is that pupils of lower middle class. The mean scores of academic achievement shows improvement as the social status of pupils increases. Aggarwal, Y.P. and Saini V.P. made an investigation on the topic, “Pattern of study habit and its relationship with achievement and parent’s economic and educational status.” It was found that there was no dependence between study habits and educational status of the parents ‘they were essentially unrelated and independent. Chi- square tests of independence were applied to the data thus categorized, the tests established that there was no dependence between study habits and economic status of the parents' and study habits and educational status of the parents'. Mukker, Iswar Dutta focused a study on “Intelligence, Socio- Economic-status, values and educational aspiration of the boys in English – Medium Schools and Hindi -Medium Schools in 1970. English –Medium students are superior to Hindi –Medium boys with regards to intelligence. English –medium students have higher educational and professional aspirations than Hindi –medium students. Both the type of students has attached importance to political and theoretical values in the same rank order. Aesthetic value ranks the lowest in the case of both the types of students. Stern (1950) done survey, on “Relation between home and school” and reveled that parents attitude has a direct effect on Childs attainment. Parent teacher relationship is also important for good attainment. Bank, Kevin Marjori studied, “Environmental Correlates of Diverse mental abilities” and found that the verbal number, spatial and reasoning ability test scores will be significantly related to subsets of scores of environmental forces. Parental dominance dimensions had either low or negligible relationship with the mental abilities. Environmental force scores are more highly related to the mental ability test scores than are the gross indicators of the environment. Obbora, Michael E. (1968) made investigation on “The impact of parental Educational level on the educational achievement, attitude, aspiration and expectation of the child” and resulted that there is no major difference in achievement between high-educated mother and high-educated father groups. There is no significant difference among students attitude towards study between high educated mother and high educated father groups. In the study by Maitra (1985) home environment was found to be important variable which could cause under achievement among the gifted. Studying the effect of home environment on the cognitive styles of student, Paul (1986) concluded that the factors of home environment like recognition of the child, achievement, parental aspiration encouragement for initiative and freedom it had positive and significant correlation with each of the four modes of cognitive styles studied. (Dr.) Heenu Gupta, considered Relationship between locus of control, anxiety, level of aspiration and academic achievement and concluded that Locus of control has been found to correlate negatively and significantly with academic achievement for the total sample. Anxiety has been found to have a significantly negative correlation with academic achievement for the total sample. Level of aspiration correlated negatively and significantly with academic achievement for the total sample. Socio – economic status has been found to have a significantly positive correlation with academic achievement for the total sample. VIII.PROCEDURE Selection of Sample The study was conducted on a selected sample of 60 girls class X of four secondary school of Rajpura. The investigator made the selection of the girls studying in X class because girls of this age are mature enough to express their educational aspiration as they have to select their subjects keeping in view of their future plans. This is the stage when they prepare themselves for college life of some professional training. The number of institutions along with students is limited because of the limited time available. Description of the tools used in the study A questionnaire constructed by the investigator was used for collecting information about educational aspirations of the students and their parent’s educational qualification. The questionnaire is a list of planned reticular topic with space provided for indicating the response to each statement related to a particular topic with space provided for indicating the response to each statement intended for submission to a number of persons for reply. Questionnaire The questionnaire consisted 17 questions related to the subject. It is a mixed form of questionnaire in which closed as well as opened form of items were included because mixed typed questionnaire is considered appropriate for collecting required data from the students. General instructions for answering the questions were given on the front page of the questionnaire.

Page 275

Manpreet Kaur, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 273-278

IX. ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF DATA Hypothesis I: Showing Difference between Mean and‘t’ value of achievement of students according to Mothers' educational level Sr. No. Students grouped according to S.D. Mean 't' value of mothers' Educational Level comparable level 1 Higher vs. average 8.1(H) 1.80 0.94* 2 Average vs. lower 7.5(A) 1.00 0.55* 3 Higher vs. lower 7.3(L) 2.80 1.49* *'t' value is non-significant at 0.01 and 0.05 level The difference between higher and lower educational group is maximum which shows that there is difference between the educational achievement of higher and lower educational group. This research indicates that the difference of‘t’ value is no significant at 0.01 and 0.05 level. Hence, the educational level of mothers of various groups has positive impact on the students. So the students of higher educational group have higher achievement. Students of average and lower educational group have average and lower achievement respectively. On the whole, it can be said that mother educational level is having a positive impact on their children education. Hypothesis II: Showing Difference between Mean and‘t’ value of achievement of students according to Fathers' educational level Sr. No. Students grouped according to Fathers' S.D. Mean 't' value of Educational Level comparable level 1 Higher vs. average 9.0(H) 2.72 1.24* 2 Average vs. lower 8.5(A) 1.10 0.53* 3 Higher vs. lower 8.4(L) 3.82 1.76* *‘t’ value is non- significant at 0.01 and 0.05 level. The difference between higher and lower educational group is maximum, which shows that there is difference between the educational achievement of higher and lower educational group. This research indicates that the difference of‘t’ value is non-significant at 0.01 and 0.05 level. Hence, the educational level of fathers’ of various groups has positive impact on the students. Hypothesis III: Showing Difference between't' value of achievement of students according to Mothers' and Fathers' educational level Sr. Students grouped according to 't' value of comparable group 't' value of comparable No. Parents' Educational Level according to Mothers' group according to educational level Fathers' educational level 1 Higher vs average 0.94* 1.24* * 2 Average vs lower 0.55 0.53* * 3 Higher vs lower 1.49 1.76* *‘t’ value is no significant the at 0.01 and 0.05 level. The above table shows the‘t’ value of the three educational groups according to mothers’ and fathers’ educational level. This research indicates that both mothers’ as well as fathers’ educational level has positive impact on educational achievement of children. But mother’s educational level is more effective than the father’s educational level, at higher, average and lower educational level respectively. Hence, there is a positive impact of parents’ educational level on educational achievement of secondary school girls but mothers educational level although both play major important role in educational achievement of secondary school girls. X. FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS FINDINGS AND CONCLUSION FOR ASPIRATION: Liking for the subject has been the most dominant facts for determining the choice of the subject. Another factor influencing the students in the choice of their subject is the better performance in the subject and then usefulness for profession and subject guidance at home, were factors which influenced students respectively. Teaching profession is the most popular profession among the girls .The reason for this may be the social acceptance of teaching profession and its respectability and also the proper balance between the professional and family life. Respectability attached to the profession is the main reason given for preference for the job. A wish of the parents’ is a negligible factor influencing very few students.

Page 276

Manpreet Kaur, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 273-278

Majority of the girls have creative hobbies. There is positive impact of parents’ educational level. Especially, mother on the aspiration of secondary school girls as their choice varies according to the guidance provided. FINDINGS AND CONCLUSION FOR ACHIEVEMENT: The difference between the higher and lower educational group is maximum which shows that there is difference between the educational achievement of children of higher educational group, average and lower educational group have higher, average and low achievement scores respectively in comparison. On the whole, there is a positive impact of parents’ educational level on educational achievement of secondary school girls but mothers’ educational level is more effective than fathers’ educational level although both play major role in educational achievement of secondary school girls. As the educational level increases from lower to higher, the achievement of the students increases. On the basis of analysis of data and the objective and hypothesis of the study following results were interpreted: There is positive impact of mothers’ educational level on the achievement of secondary school girls. Achievement of students varies according to their mother’s educational level. Mother with higher, average, and lower educational level have high, average and low impact on the achievement of children, respectively. There is a positive impact of fathers’ educational level on the achievement of secondary school girls. Achievement of students varies according to their fathers’ educational level. Fathers’ with higher average and lower educational level have high, average and low impact on the achievement on the children respectively. There is a positive impact of parents both mother and father on educational achievement but in comparison to father, mothers ‘educational level plays more important role in students achievement. There is a positive impact of parents’ educational level aspiration of secondary girls as their choice varies according to the guidance provided. XI. BIBLIOGRAPHY Books Referred Ajeh, A.O. (1983) Bajwas, R.S. and Wilfred, A.S. (1980) Best .J.W. (1983) Brown, F.J. (1969) Buch, M.B. (1974)

Buch M.B. (1972-78) Buch , M.B. (1978-83) Buch, M.B. (1983-88) Butcher, H.J. Cronback, J. (1964)

Ecological Correlates of Academic Achievement in School.” The Progress of Education Vol. LXVII. Educational Sociology. Indian publication, Ambala Cantt. Research in Education Delhi prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. Education Sociology prentice Hall. New York. A Study of Research in Education Center of advanced study in Education, Baroda. Printed at the Sanity Mudranalaya. Ahmadabad. Second Survey of Research in Education. NCERT, New Delhi Publication. Third Survey of Research in Education. NCERT, New Delhi Publication. Fourth Survey of Research in Education. Vol.1, NCERT New Delhi publication, 1991. Sampling in Educational Research Manchester, Manchester University Press. Essential of Psychological Testing Hoper and Row New York.

De, Meis, J.L. and Stearns E.S. (1993)

Relationship of school entrance age to academic and social performance “The Journal of Education research” Vol .86.

Garrett, H.E. (1965)

Statistics in Psychology and education Longmans Green and Co. New York. Educational Psychology The Macmillan Co., New York.

Gates, A.I. (1963)James, W. (1990)

Psychology New York. Hold in B. Donn An Introduction to personality. New Jersey Prentice Hall, Inc.

Kamal, A.R. (1984)

Education and Social Changes in India Somiya Publication Pvt. Ltd. Bombay. Foundation of Behavioral Research Winston Inc. Vocational Aspiration and Interest of Sc / ST Students.” The Progress of Education Vol. LVIII. Social Changes in India Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Ghaziabad.

Kerlinger, F,N. (1964) Khobragade , N.T. (1993) Kuppuswamy , B. (1986)

Page 277

Manpreet Kaur, American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 273-278

Mathur , S.S. (1977)

Educational Phychology in India Vinod Pustak Mandir, Agra.

Mishra, L. (1987)

Hobbies of Higher Secondary girls Students of Science and Arts. University College of Education, Sagar.

Naidu, C.B. and Padmanabhaiah S. (1993)

“The impact of pre – primary Education on the Academic performance of class I children.” Experiments in Education Vol. XXI. “Parents sex Bias in Education and Family Acceptance of the child on achievement in physical Science of Secondary School Pupils”. Experiments in Education Vol. XXII.

Pillai, K.S. and Usha, P. (1994)

Phatak , A .B. (1972) Phatak, A.B. and Singh R.R. (1983)

Raju, S. and Gafoor, P.K.A. (1994)

“Factors differentiation high and low Achievers in Science” Ph.D. Education, Udaipur University. “Achievement motivation and aspiration of Tribal Adolescents, A comparative study.” The Rajasthan Board Journal of Education. 19 C.D. “Some Socio personal Factor of Tribal and Non – Tribal pupils in Relation to Achievement in Biology.” Experiments in Education. Vol. XXII.

Page 278

American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences

Available online at http://www.iasir.net

Application of ARIMA Model for Forecasting Production of Jasmine Flower in Madurai District of Tamil Nadu, India 1

K. Prakash and 2B. Muniyandi 1 Ph.D. Research Scholar, 1,2 Department of Economics, School of Economics, Bharathiar University, Coimbatore – 641 046, Tamil Nadu, India. Abstract: Agriculture is known as the backbone of Indian economy, plays a very eulogistic role for the development of economy. Around 70 per cent of the population gets livelihood directly or indirectly from the Agriculture and allied sectors. Horticulture development had not been given priority in India until recent years; post 1993 the focused attention was given to horticulture development through an enhancement of plan allocation and knowledge-based technology. This decade is called a “Golden Revolution” in horticulture production. Jasmine is one of the important species in India, more than 80 Jasmine species are found here. Indian government has already declared flower based industry is a “SUNRISE INDUSTRY”. The paper revealed that the production and forecasting of Jasmine flower in Madurai district of Tamil Nadu. Time Series data covering the period of 2000-01 to 2012-13 was used for the study. The study reveals that Autoregressive Integrated Moving Average (0, 1, 0) are the best fitted model for forecasting of Jasmine production in Madurai respectively. The results show the total Jasmine production can be increased in future, if land reclamation and conservation measures are adopted. The projection shows that Jasmine flower will play a vital role to improve economic conditions of the Jasmine cultivated farmers. Keywords: ARIMA Model; Jasmine Flower; Production; Forecasting. I. Introduction Flowers are inseparable from the social fabric of human life. Flowers being adorable Creation of God befits all occasions be it at birth, marriage or death. In the past, flowers were not of much economic importance. One would grow flowers to fulfill his or her aesthetic desire. At times, flowers were offered for sale to meet the special requirements of people. With the passage of time drastic changes have come about in the life style of people leading to commercialized cultivation of flowers. Today, flower plants are no longer meant for only window garden, but it plays an important role in the decoration of the living houses and office establishments. Floriculture is a fast emerging and highly competitive industry, with the continuous introduction of new cultivators and new crops, cultural techniques are changing and hence new products are developing. Ornamental crop culture technology is improving with the availability of equipment and there is a sea change in the trend of consumers. A new generation of growers is coming forward to employ modern technology for maximizing production and offer quality production for consumer acceptability, thus fetching a better price (Mathivanan B. 2013). Though the history of flower production started from 1950 but, during 1990s, floriculture began to emerge as a reliable economic option (Ananya Sahu 2011). Floriculture has become one of the important high value agricultural industries in many countries of the world (Singh B.K. 2010). The science and art of commercial floriculture has been recognized as an economic activity with the potential for generating employment and earning valuable foreign exchange. In several countries of the world, floricultural products are amongst the main export items of agricultural origin. For any country to diversify its agricultural base geared towards export, the ornamental crop industry presents one of the most interesting and viable options. The aesthetic value of flowers and ornamental plants, their use in social events, overall satisfaction in working with them and high income generating power are attracting modern entrepreneurs to invest money in the floriculture industry. The demand for flowers and ornamental plants for different needs like religious, official ceremonies, parties, house decoration, weddings, funerals, etc, is on the rise. This demand for fresh flowers and plants is increasing world-wide over the coming years. The recent liberalization policy of the Government of India has given Phillip to commercialized agriculture particularly horticultural crops. Growing of flowers is in vogue in India since long time. Nevertheless, growing of cut-flowers has emerged as an important industry mainly to cater to the needs of the demand in the overseas market. It is being viewed as a high growth industry in our economy. There is a tremendous transformation in our floriculture sector mainly due to the entry of corporate who are producing cut-flowers to meet the emerging demand in the developed countries for floricultural products. The Government of India has also identified floriculture as a niche area with vast

Page 279

K. Prakash et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 279285

potential for export. There are many incentives given by the Government for setting up of floricultural units as Export oriented units (EOUs) (Sudhagar.S 2013). Commercial floriculture in India comprises of both the modern and traditional group of flowers. In the recent past, export of the traditional group of flowers, particularly, Jasmine and tuberose has picked up because of their increasing demand from the Indian population settled in foreign countries (USA, UK, Singapore and Gulf countries). The flowers produced in the state are being exported to the neighboring countries viz., Singapore, Malaysia, Sri Lanka and the Middle East countries (Karuppusamy.R 2012). Jasmine is an important fragrant flower that is cultivated predominantly in temperate climate. (1) The history of jasmine goes back to Egypt dynasties, Chinese emperors, Kings of Afghanistan, Nepal, Persia, and Spain. Its different varieties are recognized as the national flower for countries like Pakistan and Paraguay. It is grown for its aroma parts of the world of which Jasmine Sambac and Jasmine Grandiflorum can be seen extensively in India (2) Strings of Jasmine flowers are used by women to enhance their beauty and fragrance. The wearing of Jasmine flower strings on the hairs of lactating mothers of some parts of South India is associated with increased lactation and delayed ovulation. These flowers find place in floral decoration of marriages, to consecrate a sacred wedding ceremony, as a form of expressing love, affection, happiness and honouring the guests. The exchange of garlands made of Jasmine in marriage symbolizes the natural circle of protection and sacred bride to the spiritual life. Medicinal uses of Jasmine extracts include anti-inflammatory, mild analgesic (3) antioxidant (4) antiseptic, antiviral (5) and enhancement of immunity. It is used for treating skin diseases like ulcers (6) boils and vesicles. It produces a feeling of optimism, confidence, euphoria, strongly cooling and calming effects. It is most helpful to treat apathy, indifference and depression. A natural aphrodisiac, Jasmine's exquisite aroma has a powerful effect on frigidity and impotence. It can relax the mother and help relieve the pain of childbirth due to its antispasmodic effect (Aswini Dutt. R 2011). The species used are Jasminum Sambac (Gundumalli or Madurai Malli), Jasminum Auriculatum (Mullai) and Jasminum Grandiflorrum (Jathimalli/Pitch). The first two species are mainly cultivated to sell as fresh flowers, whereas the third is cultivated for the perfumery industry’s needs. Tamil Nadu is the leading producer of jasmine in the country with an annual production of 77,247 tons from a cultivated area of 9360 hectares. The flowers harvested in the state are exported to neighboring countries like Sri Lanka, Singapore, Malaysia and the Middle East. The major Jasmine producing districts of Tamil Nadu are Madurai, Dindigul, Salem, Tirunelveli, Virudhunagar and Trichy. Jasmine flowers are native to India, China and Iran (Ambika T. 2012). With its heady fragrance, exclusive size and shape, the ‘Madurai Malli’s uniqueness has a district reputation universally. Farmers from Madurai, Theni, Dindigul, Sivaganga and Virudhunagar districts cultivating ‘Madurai Malli’ are jubilant as it has been given the Geographical Indication (GI) mark by the Geographical Indications Registry. Application for GI was made in June 2000 and approval came on January16 (Vandhana, 2013). II. India’s distinctive advantages for development of the floriculture sector India has relatively better opportunities for development of the floriculture sector for the following reasons: 1. Diverse agro-climatic conditions and geographical locations suited for growing various types of flowers. 2. Skilled manpower to absorb the technology and implement the same at a relatively low cost. 3. Soil and water supply at most locations. 4. Good radiation/ sunlight leading to healthier plant growth and better quality flowers. 5. Light rains and salubrious climate during winter, the prime export season, leading to sustained high yields. 6. Good period of sunlight even during the heavy rains leading to continued plant growth and proper yield. 7. India is located centrally for catering to European and Far Eastern markets, as well as being close to the South East Asian and Middle East Asian markets that have high consumption requirement of flowers (Ev Murray 2006). III. Review of Literature The author has given some related studies to support the study which is as follows: Nageshwar Rao and Behra (2001) reported that flower growers are earning more than Rs.40, 000 per acre annually by the way of raised cultivation. According to them, farmers are able to harvest up to 2 lakh flowers per acre per annum. They concluded that the flower growers do not consider marketing of flowers as a problem except price fluctuation. Nagagowda and Narayana Gowda (1990) in their study made an attempt on “Effect of Cycocel and Mallic Hydrazide of Yield in Gundumalli” They have analysed Jasmine flower and extraction of essential oil that the pattern freshly prepared Cycocel and Msaluic Hydroxide each at 1000 and 2000 PPM were sprayed and prepurring. They results that Cycocel treated plants recorded higher flower yield in February and March. However, they revealed that, April, May and June are peak flowering months in jasmine (Gundumalli).

Page 280

K. Prakash et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 279285

Raghava (1996) has observed that the floriculture is emerging as an important venture in the world. It has become a potential of money spinner for the third world countries commercial floriculture is becoming important from the export agricultural. The total area under flower crops was estimated to be around 3400 hectares. The area under flower crops increased to 38000 hectares in 1992-93. India’s share in the world was only 0.6 per cent till 1990. Since as many as 134 collaborations attracting foreign investment of more than Rs.100 crores have been approved by India at an estimated total outlay of more than Rs.1000 crores. Raghava and Dadlani (2000) have pointed out the growing domestic market of flower. A study of the Delhi market in 1995 estimated a trade of more than Rs.50 crores annually. This has increased many times during the last 4 to 5 years which has seen a major growth in business as evidenced by the florist shops in every locality in Delhi. A similar situation exists in all other major cities in the country. The green house produce has also led to appreciation of quality flowers for obtaining better prices. The range of products has vastly improved. Flowers like Authurium, Orchid, Illium, Callality, Bird of Paradise. Stanthus and Liatrice which one saw only in international stalls at flower shows or in magazines are being sold on street corners along with good quality rose, gladiolus, carnation, gerbera and Chrysanthemum. Ashok Dhillion et.al. (2003) have selected three districts and one block from each district on the basis of the area of flower production from each selected district from each block the list of village was prepared to find where flower production is adopted from these village 120 growers were randomly and 13 large growers. This study revealed that flowers are grown in 1850 hectares during 1996-2000. According to their findings, in Haryana, flower production has emerged as one of the most lucrative businesses due to the higher potential of returns in comparison to other horticultural crops. IV. Objectives of the Study 1. To suggest appropriate ARIMA model for the generation of forecasting production of Jasmine flower in Madurai District, Tamil Nadu, India and to make ten years forecast with appropriate prediction interval. 2. To generate forecasts of production of Jasmine flower in Madurai District, Tamil Nadu in India by using appropriate ARIMA models. V. Materials and Methods The Auto Regressive Integrated Moving Average (ARIMA) model is a generalization of an Autoregressive Moving Average (ARMA) model. These models are fitted to time series data either to better understanding the data or to predict future points in the series. The existing study applies Box-Jenkins (1970) forecasting model popularly known as ARIMA. The ARIMA is an extrapolation method, which requires historical time series data of underlying variable, generally this ARIMA model was used in macro level data analysis. This paper applies the model in micro level. The model in specific and general forms may be expressed as follows, let Yt is a discrete time series variable which takes different values over a period of time. The corresponding AR (p) model of Yt series, which is the generalizations of autoregressive model, can be expressed as: AR( p) :Yt  0  1Yt 1  2Yt 2  ...   pYt  p   t (1) Where, Yt is the response variables at time t, Yt-1, Yt-2……Yt-p is the respective variables at different time with lags

0 ,1,..., p are the coefficients and

 t is the error factor. Similarly, the MA (q) model which is again the generalizations may be specified as: MA (q): Yt  t   t Where,

of moving average model

 1 t 1     q t  q  vt

 t is the constant mean of the series, δ1… δq is the coefficients of the estimated error term,  t

(2) is the error

term. Combining b o t h t h e m o d e l i s c a l l e d a s A R I M A models, which has general form as:

Yt  0  1Yt 1  2Yt  2     pYt  p   t  1 t 1     q t  q  vt

If Yt is stationary at level or I (0) or at first difference I (1) determines the order of integration, which is called as ARIMA model. To identify the order of p and q the ACF and PACF is applied. A. Data Jasmine is one of the important species in India, more than 80 Jasmine species are found here. Tamil Nadu is the leading producer of Jasmine in the country with the annual production of 1.021 million from a cultivated area of 0.183 million hectares. The data collected and analyzed to draw a meaningful interpretations and to assess the situation in the Jasmine flower economy in India. The secondary data have been used for the study purpose. In order to analyze the growth rate, the time series data of production, of Jasmine flower were collected from various publications, official records and web sources such as Hand Book of Statistics on the Indian Economy, Office of the Assistant Director of Statistics, Madurai, Directorate of Horticulture and Plantation Crop, Chennai etc., have been referred

Page 281

K. Prakash et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 279285

for the collection of data from 2000-01 to 2012-13. For the present study, the statistical tools were employed to assess the growth performance of jasmine flower in Madurai. Since large numbers of data are required for ARIMA models. VI. The following models based on relevant study Chengappa (1980) applied the Box Jenkins model to forecast poor sale and export auction prices of coffee. Monthly data were used and due to the distinct seasonal variation in prices, the ARIMA seasonal model was applied. The poor sale price forecasts were found to be accurate when compared to forecast of export prices. This was attributed to a possible lack of stationary of the data. Hence adoption of differencing procedure or a transformation to make the data stationary was found necessary for a better estimate of export prices. Lanciotti (1990) presented a paper that analysis of time series data of monthly prices for a group of dairy products with the aim of obtaining reliable forecasts. The method of analysis employed is ARIMA as put forward by Box-Jenkins. The time series data covers both wholesale and retail prices for butter, Gorgonzola, Provolone, Grana Padano and Pasmigiano Reggiano. To estimate the reliability of the forecast obtained, a comparison is made with those resulting from naĂŻve models do not require any estimates. Indicators on the accuracy of the forecasts show that except for Grana Padana, Le ARIMA forecasts are better. Mastny (2001) used ARIMA models, also called Box and Jenkins models after their developers, is a group of models allowing the analysis of the time series with various features. The article demonstrates the possible usage of the Box-Jenkins methodology for the analysis of time series for agricultural commodities. The paper contains a basic mathematical explanation of ARIMA models together with a practical illustration of a price development forecast for a selected agricultural commodity. Yin-Runsheng and Mins-Rs (1999) conducted timber price forecasts were univariate Auto Regression Integrated Moving Average (ARIMA) models employing the standard Box Jenkins modeling strategy by using quarterly price series Timber Mart South. The results showed that most of the selected pipe pulpwood and saw timber markets in six southern US states can be evaluated using ARIMA models, and that short-term forecasts, especially those of one lead forecast, are fairly accurate. It is suggested that forecasting future prices could aid timber producers and consumers alike in timing harvests reducing uncertainty and enhancing efficiency. VII. Results and Discussion The result of the study deals with jasmine flower forecasting value of the study area. A. Model Identification The ARIMA model was formulated after assessing the transforming of the variable under forecasting was a stationary series. The stationary series was the set of values that varied over time around a constant mean and constant variance. This model was a common method to check the stationary and explain in the following figure. Figure 1 reveals in this data used were non-stationary. Again, non-stationary in mean was corrected through first differencing of the data. The production and time variable (Yt) could now be examined for stationary. The both blue and red lines shows increasing trend of production of Jasmine in Madurai district. Figure: 1 Time Plot of Jasmine in Madurai

Since, Yt was stationary in mean, the next step was to identify the values of p and q. For this, the autocorrelation and partial autocorrelation coefficients (ACF and PACF) of various orders of Y t were computed and presented in Table 1 and Figure 2. Table: 1 ACF and PACF of Jasmine Production LAG 1 2 3 4

Auto Correlation VALUE 0.707 0.393 0.248 0.105

DF 0.277 0.392 0.421 0.432

Box-Ljung Statistics SIG 8.12 10.858 12.058 12.296

VALUE 1 2 3 4

DF 0.004 0.004 0.007 0.015

PARTIAL AUTOCORRELATION VALUE DF 0.707 0.277 -0.213 0.277 0.129 0.277 -0.168 0.277

Page 282

K. Prakash et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 279285

Figure: 2 ACF and PACF

The order of an ARIMA model is usually denoted by the notation ARIMA (p,d,q), where p is the order of the autoregressive part d is the order of the differencing q is the order of the moving-average process. The ARIMA model were discussed with values differenced once (d=1) and the model which had the minimum normalized Bayesian Information Criterion (BIC) was chosen. The BIC value is to determine the autoregressive order used to estimate the error series. The estimation of parameters for Jasmine flower, production was estimated in Best Fitted Model. The various ARIMA models and the corresponding normalized BIC values are given in Table 2. The value of normalized BIC of the chosen ARIMA was 13.602. Table: 2 BIC value of ARIMA (p,d,q) 0,1,0

13.602

0,1,1

13.774

0,1,2

13.956

1,1,0

13.778

1,1,1

13.952

1,1,2

14.260

2,1,0

14.101

2,1,1

14.288

2,1,2

14.663

B. Model Estimation The second step was the estimation of model parameters were estimated using SPSS.20 version was used to estimate the results and the results were presented in Table 3 and 4. R2 value was 0.92. Hence, the most suitable model for Jasmine production was ARIMA (0,1,0), as this model had the lowest normalized BIC value, good R2 and better model fit statics (RMASE and MAPE). In this justified that the selection of ARIMA (0,1,0) is the best model to represent the data generating process very precisely. Table: 3 Model Estimation ARIMA Model Parameters

Constant

Estimate

Sig.

452.632

504.354

.897

.391

Table: 4 Estimated ARIMA Model Fit Statistics Stationary R-quared

R-squared

RMSE

MAPE

Normalized BIC

.036

.924

730.496

5.293

13.602

Page 283

K. Prakash et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 279285

C. Diagnostic checking This model proves that the verification was concerned with checking the residuals of the model to see if they contained any systematic pattern which still could be removed to improve the chosen ARIMA, which has been done through examining the autocorrelations and partial autocorrelations of the residuals of various orders. For this purpose, Table 5 shows various autocorrelations up to 10 lags were computed and the same along with their significance tested by Box-Ljung statistic. The results indicate none of these autocorrelations was significantly different from zero at any reasonable level. The selected ARIMA model was suitable model for forecasting Jasmine production in Madurai district. Table: 5 Residual of ACF and PACF of Jasmine Flower Production ACF

PACF

Lag Mean

Mean

-.342

.289

-.342

.289

.050

.321

-.076

.289

-.056

.321

-.073

.289

-.133

.322

-.199

.289

Figure: 3 ACF and PACF Plot of Residuals

Table: 6 Forecast for the Production of Jasmine flower in Madurai District SI. No Year Predicated LCL UCL 2013-14 14020.03 12392.38 15647.68 1 2014-15 15030.23 12728.39 17332.07 2 2015-16 16077.6 13258.44 18896.77 3 2016-17 17162.15 13906.86 20417.44 4 Note: (upper control limit UCL and lower control limit LCL) Figure: 4. Actual and predicted of Jasmine Production

Page 284

K. Prakash et al., American International Journal of Research in Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, 6(3), March-May, 2014, pp. 279285

D. Forecasts of Jasmine The four year forecast of Jasmine production was estimated by using the best model of ARIMA is presented in the Table 6. It shows that Jasmine production was increased 14020.03 tons in the year 2013-14, further the predicted production increased to 15030.23, 16077.60 and 17162.15 tonnes for 2015, 2016 and 2017 respectively. The present analyses concluded that the production of Jasmine will increased in the study predicted years. VIII. Conclusion It can be concluded from the study that the production of Jasmine is highly profitable. As far as floriculture is concerned, the steady increase in flowers floriculture has become one of the important commercial trades in feature agriculture which is attracting profits and new ideas to breed new variety of flowers with the concepts of cross hybridization. The results show that the total cropped production can be increased in future, if land reclamation and conservation measures are adopted. The projection shows that Jasmine flower will play a vital role to improve economic conditions of the Jasmine cultivated farmers. Hence, commercial floriculture industry is attracting hi-tech activity to have a better growth and quality of the flowers. Various steps are taken up to improve the quality of the flowers. India has a long floriculture history and flower growing is an age old enterprise. Paying attention to the input needs, forming the association, better resource management, and financial assistance and making various policies as entrepreneur friendly and favorable export policy would lead to a balanced growth of the industry. References Ashok Dhillion, R.K.Khattar and sub singh (2003). Areas and production of Manor flowers grown in Haryana, Agriculture situation in India Vol.LX, (2), 93-94. Ambika, T. (2012). Jasmine: Fit for small growers, Market Survey, June vol.32(9),19-20. Ananya Sahu (2011). Growth of floriculture and its role in promoting socio-economic status of floriculturists of Panskura and Kolaghat blocks, Purba Medinipur, Indian Journal of Geography & Environment 4-12. Aswini Dutt, R. (2011). The rationale behind wearing strings of Jasmine flower by the lactating South Indian women, Iranian Journal of Medical Hypotheses and Ideas, 1-4. Chengappa, P.G. (1980) An analysis of Indian coffee prices - A Spectral approach. Unpublished M.Sc.(Agri) Thesis, IARI, New Delhi. Ev Murray (2006). Export opportunities for Indian floriculture, Cab Calling January – March 50-55. Karuppusamy, R. (2012). Study on marketing and price spread of Jasmine in Erode district of Tamil Nadu, Golden Research Thoughts 2(4), 1- 6. Lanciotti, C.(1990). Forecasts of monthly prices for a group of dairy products – An application of the Box-Jenkins techniques, Rivista-diEconomics-Agraria. 45(3) 465-492. Mastny, V. ( 2001). The use of Box-Jenkins methodology to predict the price development of agricultural commodities, Acta Unierisatatis Agriculturae et Silviculturae- Mendelianae Brunensis, 49(2) 165-172. Mathivanan, B. (2013). a study on rose cultivation and marketing pattern in Hosur taluk, Journal of Exclusive Management Science –2 (12) 2277 – 5684. Nageshwar Rao and Behra (2001). Busines Line Coimbatore 13th March,13. Nagagowda.V and Narayana Gowda.J.V, (1990) Effect of cycocel and mallic hydroxide spray on flowering and seasonal pattern of yield in gundumalli, Indian perfumer, 34, 273-246. Raghava, S.P.S.( 1996). The Hindu survey of India agriculture 103-105. Raghava S.P.S. and Dadlani.N.K. (2000),The Hindu survey of India agriculture, 152. Singh, B.K. (2010) “Adoption of commercial cut flower production technology in Meerut”, Indian Res. J. Ext. Edu. 10 (1), January, PP. 50-53. Sudhagar.S (2013). Production and marketing of cut flower (Rose and Gerbera) in Hosur taluk, International Journal of Business and Management Invention 2 (5) 15-25. Vandhana, M. (2013). Geographical indication tag for Madurai malli, The Hindu January 18. Yin Runsheng and Min, R.S. (1999). Forecasting short-term timber prices with Univariate ARIMA model. J. Ame.Statis.Assoc. 25(1)154-158.

Page 285